You are on page 1of 958

User Manual

Introduction

Safety

System Description

Delivery Specification

Technical Data

Operating Instruction

Maintenance Instructions

Trouble Shooting

Contact List

Rolls-Royce Icon(TM)
Dynamic Positioning System Class 2

Project id
Vessel
Project name
Yard/Hull
Order no.
Document no.
Revision

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

110735
PSV/UT755LC
Simek, 115 (+repeats)

10 Spare parts

11 Tools
CAA-110735-01MU
A

12 Design drawings

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and
may not be copied or com- municated to a third party, or used for any
purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written
consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information
available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation is given
concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any
contractual or other commitment binding upon Rolls-Royce plc or any of
its subsidiary or associated companies.

13 Revision

14 Subsuppliers manuals

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

1
Introduction
1

Purpose .....................................................................................................1-3

Contents ....................................................................................................1-3

Target Groups ...........................................................................................1-3

Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................1-4

References ................................................................................................1-5

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Introduction

1 Purpose
The purpose of the Icon User Manual is to provide the necessary information to plan and
perform a safe and correct operation of the installed system, as well as under-standing
the basic functionality of the equipment. The User Manual covers both operational and
technical aspects of the system.
The personnel involved in using the system must have relevant experience and training
with regards to the use of such systems.

2 Contents
This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter

Contents

1. Introduction

This chapter specifies the purpose and target groups for the
manual. It also contains list of used abbreviations and a
specification of the document conventions.

2. Safety

This chapter specifies safety instructions to follow when


operating and maintaining system.

3. System Description

This chapter briefly describes the system components, the


system design and the functionality.

4. Delivery Specification

This chapter specifies the delivered equipment.

5. Technical Data

This chapter contains technical specifications and


performance data.

6. Operating Instructions

This chapter describes how to use the Icon system.

7. Maintenance Instructions

This chapter describes how to maintain the Icon system,


including both preventive and corrective actions.

8. Trouble Shooting

This chapter describes how to act when a malfunction occur


in the Icon system.

9. Contact List

This chapter contains contact information for Rolls-Royce


Marine, Dept. Control Aalesund and Rolls-Royce World Wide
Support Organization.

10. Spare Parts

This chapter specifies recommended spare parts for the Icon


system.

11. Tools

This chapter describes required and recommended tools for


the maintenance of the system.

12. Design Drawings

This chapter consists of design drawings that serve as an


information source about the installed system.

13. Revision

This chapter contains the revision history for the total binder,
including a listing of contained documents.

14. Subsuppliers Manuals

This chapter contains documentation from other suppliers


than Rolls-Royce, if such has been delivered by RRM.

3 Target Groups
The User Manual is primarily intended for the user of the system. The user must be
properly trained in using and maintaining the system.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 1-3 of 6

Introduction

4 Terms and Abbreviations


Abbreviation or term

Page 1-4 of 6

Description

AC, DC

Alternating Current, Direct Current

AI, AO

Analogue Input, Analogue Output

Az

Azimuth

BASE-T

Basic twisted pair

CAA

Control - Aalesund

CAN-bus

Controller Area Network Bus

CB

Circuit Breaker

NC

Normally Closed

CPP

Controllable Pitch Propeller

CTE

Cross Track Error

CW, CCW

Clockwise, Counter-clockwise

DGPS

Differential Global Positioning System

DI, DO

Digital Input, Digital Output

DP

Dynamic Positioning

DPC

DP Controller (Marine Controller used for DP calculations)

ETA

Estimated Time of Arrival

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

FAT

Factory Acceptance Test

FWD, BWD

Forward, Backward

GNSS

Global Navigation Satellite System

GSN

Global Support Network

GUI

Graphical User Interface

HAT

Harbour Acceptance Test

HDG

Heading

HDOP

Horizontal Dilution of Precision

Heave

Vertical motion of the entire ship

H/W, S/W

Hardware, Software

HUD

Head-up Display

IBS

Integrated Bridge System

I/O

Input/Output

IMO

International Maritime Organization

IOC

I/O Controller (Marine Controller used for I/O calculations)

JS

Joystick System

LAN

Local Area Network

LED

Light Emitting Diode

MultiMode, MM

Fibre-optic cable which allows multiple modes (light rays) to pass


through it

NMEA

National Marine Electronics Association

MP

Main Propeller

N/A

Not Applicable

NO

Normally Open
Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Introduction
Abbreviation or term

Description

Outstation

An outstation provides the interface necessary for the interconnection between the control system and the equipment to be
controlled/monitored (i.e. thruster or switchboard/PMS)

Pitch

The motion of a ship about her transverse axis. This causes the
forward and aft ends of the ship to rise and fall repeatedly.
Pitch is also used as denomination for the angle of the propeller
blades.

PMS

Power Management System

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute

Roll

The motion of a ship about her longitudinal axis. This causes the
ship to rock from side to side.

RRM

Rolls-Royce Marine

RRMC

Rolls-Royce Marine Controller

RSG

Rudder Steering Gear

SAT

Sea Acceptance Test

SB, SWBD

Switchboard

Stbd, Pt

Starboard, Port

S-FTP

Braid and foil screened twisted pair

SP

Setpoint

ST

Straight Tip (a fibre-optic connector used with multimode fiber)

STP

Shielded Twisted Pair

Surge

Alongship movement

Sway

Athwartship movement

THR

Thruster system

VRU

Vertical Reference Unit (also called VRS)

WP

Waypoint

XTE

Cross Track Deviation

Yaw

Rotation about the centre of selected rotation

5 References
References to delivery specific documents are only shown as suffixes in this document.
The document ID syntax is:
CAA-<Project Number>- <Suffix>
See front page of this manual for the delivery specific project number. It is also specified
on the attached lists and drawings to this manual.
Type

Suffix

Description

Drawings

01DC

Cable Diagram

0xDW

Wiring Diagram

01DM

Mechanical Drawing

01DL

Layout Drawing

01LI

Main Item List

01LC

Cable List

01LF

Fuse List

Listings

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 1-5 of 6

Introduction
Type

Documents

Suffix

Description

01LN

Network List

01TS

Sea Trial Acceptance Test (SAT)

01TF

Factory Acceptance Test Procedure

nnMI

Installation Manual *)

nnMU

User Manual *)

nnMX

Common document for Installation and User Manual *)

For Installation and User Manuals, the initial two digits specifies the Chapter No.

Page 1-6 of 6

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU


Revision: C

Safety

Introduction ...............................................................................................2-3

Disclaimer .................................................................................................2-3

Safety Instructions ...................................................................................2-4

Safety Messages .......................................................................................2-4

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-02MX


Revision: A

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-02MX


Revision: A

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Safety

1 Introduction
This chapter provides information regarding safety measures that must be taken to
prevent injury to people and damage of equipment.
Whoever is responsible for the installation, operation or maintenance of this RollsRoyce system, is obliged to read this chapter and fully understand its content before any
installation, operation or maintenance of the system may take place.

2 Disclaimer
Undertaking any work envisaged by this document may either directly or indirectly
create risks to the safety and health of the person undertaking the work or the product
and/or its components while the work is being performed.
It is the responsibility of the user to protect the health and safety of the persons
undertaking the work as well as risk to the product and/or its components. Therefore the
user must ensure that appropriate controls and precautions are identified and taken in
relation to the work envisaged by this document in accordance with the relevant
statutory and legal and industrial requirements.
Neither this document, nor its use, in any way absolves the user from the responsibility
to ensure that the controls and precautions referred to above are implemented.
If any Rolls-Royce product design related features which could create risks to persons,
the product and/or its components are identified, Rolls-Royce should be contacted
immediately.
It is the user's responsibility to make all relevant hazard identifications and risk
assessments of all the activities associated with the use of this document.
It is the user's responsibility to design and implement safe systems of work and to supply
safe equipment (including, without limitation, safety equipment) and training
(including, without limitation, health and safety training) to anyone using this document
to work on products to which it relates.
A user without relevant experience of working in accordance with this document, or
with products to which it relates, should seek appropriate advice to identify the health
and safety controls and precautions that need to be taken while working.
Technical assistance can be sought from Rolls-Royce and will be subject to RollsRoyce's terms and conditions.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-02MX


Revision: A

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 2-3 of 4

Safety

3 Safety Instructions
This Rolls-Royce system is a heading/position control system connected to the
propeller, rudder and thruster control systems on board a vessel. By operating the
system, thrust force will be generated at the different propulsion units.
The operator must at all times be aware of:
Consequences of operating the system to prevent injury to people, damage of
equipment, damage to the vessel operated and damage to the surroundings.
That the system will set out an order signal to the propulsion unit if any position sensor
signal differs from the position set in the system.
Such an event will cause the propulsion units to generate thrust force. Special
consideration must be taken when the operator of the system is involved in other
activities, such as communication, operation of other systems or any other activities that
might take the focus away from the operation of the vessel.

4 Safety Messages
Safety messages in this manual are always accompanied by a safety alert symbol and a
signal word. The safety alert symbol is used to alert the reader about a potential risk of
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
The following types of safety messages are used within this manual:

Warning: Risk of... Indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in death or
personal injury.

Caution: Indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in damage to


equipment or property and seriously impact the function of the equipment.

Note:

Page 2-4 of 4

Alerts the reader to relevant factors and conditions which may impact the
function of the equipment.

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-02MX


Revision: A

System Description
1

General ......................................................................................................... 3

2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

System Overview ......................................................................................... 3


Main Components ......................................................................................... 3
Thrust Allocation ............................................................................................ 7
Signal Processing .......................................................................................... 7
Vessel Model (Filtering and Estimation) ........................................................ 7
Trajectory Generator ..................................................................................... 7
Feedback and Feedforward Control .............................................................. 7

3
Design .......................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch .............................................................. 9
3.2 Operator Station ............................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Graphical Display(s) ......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Operator Station Computer .............................................................. 10
3.2.3 Joystick Device ................................................................................. 11
3.2.4 Positioning Device ............................................................................ 12
3.3 Printer .......................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Additional Operator Station (Optional) ......................................................... 12
3.5 Control Cabinets .......................................................................................... 13
3.6 UPS ............................................................................................................. 14
3.7 Thrust Devices ............................................................................................. 15
3.7.1 Status and Settings .......................................................................... 15
3.7.2 Failure Detection and Failure Handling ............................................ 16
3.8 Sensors and Position Reference System .................................................... 17
3.8.1 Multi Sensor System Handling ......................................................... 17
4
Function ..................................................................................................... 18
4.1 Operation Principles .................................................................................... 18
4.2 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................. 19
4.2.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction ........................................................ 19
4.2.2 Main Layout and Components ......................................................... 20
4.3 System Operation ........................................................................................ 22
4.3.1 Basic Operational Modes ................................................................. 22
4.3.2 Basic System Functions ................................................................... 25
4.3.3 Optional Functions ........................................................................... 27
4.4 Signal Processing Functions ....................................................................... 28
5
Location of Manufacturing Number ......................................................... 33
5.1 Marking Locations ....................................................................................... 33
5.1.1 Product Identification ........................................................................ 33
5.1.2 Company Identification ..................................................................... 33

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

System Description

1 General
This chapter provides an overview of the Icon system and a technical description of the
main components that give the required knowledge about the system.
The figures, drawings and text in this chapter are general and may not comply to the
actual installation on the vessel. For details on the delivered equipment, see chapter
4 Delivery Specification.

2 System Overview
2.1

Main Components
The redundant Icon DP 2 system is based on a triple controller solution with a redundant
fibre-optic network. Interface to sensors and position reference systems, power system
and thruster system are split into logical groups, based on class requirements and system
segregation.
The triple redundant controller solution features a two-out-of-three voting principle. In
case of controller failure and voting rejection, the operator does not have to intervene.
The remaining two controllers are unaffected and continue the operation. The redundant
network solution handles network failures locally on network level. The connected
nodes do not need special functionality to handle network redundancy. With the DP
system integrity preserved, the DP network is separated from networks of other
applications. The DP cabinets, operator stations, sensors and position reference systems
are dual powered from the redundant UPS system.
A typical Icon DP 2 system configuration is illustrated in figure 1. It shows how the
system parts communicate with each other. A typical system may consists of the
following:
Three control cabinets (triple redundant controllers), alternatively a large single
cabinet. See chapter 12 Design Drawings for delivery specific details.
Redundant fibre-optic network
Two or more Icon operator stations with:
- high-resolution colour LCD with touch-screen interface
- Joystick device
- Positioning device
- Remote display controller (located in the operators chair)
Printer(s):
- for printing of alarms, trendings etc.
Manoeuvring mode selector switch
Sensors and position reference systems (of different types)
Two UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
Interfaces to thruster devices (I/O modules or Rolls-Royce HeliconX3).

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-3 of 34

System Description

DP Operator Stations
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch

Sensor and Position


Reference System
Groups

Control Cabinets

Uninterruptible
Power Supplies

DP Network

Thrust Devices

Figure 1

Page 3-4 of 34

Illustration of an Icon DP System Class 2 Configuration

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description
From the UPS, 220 VAC power is distributed to the control cabinet(s), the operator
station(s) and positioning reference systems.
Figure 2 shows how power (220 VAC) is distributed to the system parts.
Operator Station 1

Operator Station 2

Control
Cabinets

UPS 1

Figure 2

Main

Main

Main

Main

Sensors and Position


Reference Systems

Main

Sensors and Position


Reference Systems

UPS 2

Illustration of an RR Icon DP System Class 2 220 VAC Power Distribution

The system can consist of one or three control cabinets, depending on the customer
requirements. For systems with only one control cabinet, the cabinet is divided into three
logical sections with separate power supplies. An addtional I/O cabinet will be installed
when using only one control cabinet.
Addtional UPSs may also be added to the system.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-5 of 34

System Description
The Icon system acquire measurements from the propulsion system, power system,
sensor and position reference systems, and apply thrust setpoints to the propulsion
system, satisfying the commanded surge and sway forces and yawing moment.
The control loop of the Icon system is illustrated in Figure 3.

Thrust Device
Setpoints

Measurements

Power
Limits

Thrust Allocation

Signal Processing

Commanded
Thruster
Forces

Feedback and
Feedforward
Controller

Control System
Estimated Vessel Motion

References

Vessel Model
(Filtering & Estimation)

Trajectory Generator

Operator Input

Figure 3

Page 3-6 of 34

Icon System Control Loop

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

2.2
Note:

Thrust Allocation
A thrust device can be any propeller, thruster or rudder.

3
The force demands in surge and sway and moment demand in yaw from the controller
have to be distributed to each thruster as pitch and/or rpm setpoints and (if applicable)
directional setpoints.
The thrust allocation in the Icon system takes into account:
Available power on each bus bar. The Icon system will not enforce thruster action that
exceeds the available power.
Optimal thruster utilisation in normal operations.
Turning rate of thrusters, pitch and rpm response. The direction of azimuthing thrusters
can either be variable (auto direction) or fixed in a set of pre-defined configurations.
Grouping of thrusters. Two or more thrusters can be arranged to be working as a group.
The purpose is often to reduce changes in thruster direction. In cases where thrusters
cannot produce negative thruster force (reverse direction), this ensures that the thrust
demand is fulfilled without unnecessary turning of thruster direction.
Fixed thruster direction configurations or variable thruster direction.
Forbidden sectors for thruster direction.

2.3

Signal Processing
All measurements to the Icon system have to pass several levels of testing and
processing before being used in the control of the vessel. The type of testing and
processing functions used, is dependant on the signal source, see section 4.4 Signal
Processing Functions.

2.4

Vessel Model (Filtering and Estimation)


Oscillatory motion caused by waves will not be compensated by the thrusters, main
propellers and rudders in auto heading and auto position control. Advanced adaptive
wave-filtering and estimation techniques in combination with the internal vessel model
are used to generate estimates of the low-frequency motion of the vessel that
automatically adjusts to the varying sea-states and operational conditions. The estimated
motion (vessel speed, rate-of-turn, position and heading) is used in the feedback control
of the vessel.

2.5 Trajectory Generator


During automatic change heading and change position operations, the internal trajectory
generator ensures a smooth change of the vessel heading and position. The vessel
motion is according to the operator defined motion settings (maximum surge and sway
speed and rate-of-turn). The start-up and end phase of the movement are automatically
adjusted according to the capacity of the propulsion equipment installed.

2.6 Feedback and Feedforward Control


The feedback controller computes the required surge and sway forces and yawing
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-7 of 34

System Description
moment to keep the vessel on the desired position, heading or track in automatic control
modes of operation. The individual position and heading control gain settings influence
how aggressive the system will respond to deviations in position and heading.
Automatic control modes also use reference feedforward control action, based on the
trajectory generator to speed up the response of the system in change position and
change heading operations. Wind measurements are used for wind compensation. I.e.
the wind force and moment acting on the vessel is derived from wind speed and
direction, wind drag coefficients and wind areas scaled by draught measurements. The
corresponding wind feedforward counter force and moment are commanded.

Page 3-8 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

3 Design
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
The manoeuvring mode selector switch (DP selector switch) is used for the selection
of operational mode (independent Joystick control/Manual/Icon control). The switch is
located on the bridge.

Figure 4

Example of a Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch

The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast disconnection of the
Icon system, in case of an emergency situation.
A fast disconnection will cause the separate thruster/rudder control systems to be
enabled instead of the Icon system.

3.2

Operator Station
The operator station or stations have a display with a touch-screen interface, a
positioning device and a joystick device.
The operator stations can be of different versions:
Fixed mounted
Integrated in the operator chair.
The Icon may be equipped with several operator stations.
The main components of an operator station are:
Graphical display for advanced system operation and status monitoring
Computer
Joystick device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators.
Positioning device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators
Trackball or mouse (optional).

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-9 of 34

System Description

Figure 5

3.2.1

Example of Icon Operator Station

Graphical Display(s)
A graphical display for the Icon system is a high-resolution colour display with a touchscreen interface. The touch-screen is operated with buttons on the display. A button can
have different colours, indicating the current status of the system.

Remote Control Display (Optional)


For Icon operator stations integrated in the Rolls-Royce operators chair, a remote
control graphical display with a touch-screen interface can be mounted directly on the
chair. The main display is mounted in the close vicinity of the operator station.

3.2.2

Operator Station Computer


The computer contains all application software needed for running the Icon GUI
software. It works independently of the control cabinet(s). It communicates via Ethernet
link.

Page 3-10 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

3.2.3

Joystick Device
The joystick device is used for the mode changes and joystick control operations. Main
parts of the joystick device are:
Three-axes joystick device for manoeuvring (surge, sway and yaw)

Illuminated push-buttons for


- System on/off
- Command transfer
- Auto/manual heading
- Heading setpoint increment/decrement
- Alarm silence
- Dimmer.

Figure 6

Joystick Device

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-11 of 34

System Description

3.2.4

Positioning Device
The positioning device is used for the manoeuvering of the vessel during DP control
mode operations. Main parts of the positioning device are:
Two-axes lever for positioning control with an integrated turning wheel for heading
setpoint control
Illuminated push-buttons for
- DP/joystick control mode (auto/manual position, auto/manual surge and sway)
- Increment/decrement of setting values
- Pause/restore of operation
- Enter/apply.

Figure 7

Positioning Device

3.3 Printer
The Icon system is normally equipped with one plain dot matrix monochrome line
printer, used for alarm printouts.
The system can be equipped with an additional network hardcopy colour printer, used
for printing of trendings, screen-shots, etc.

3.4

Additional Operator Station (Optional)


Depending on the class notation and class society there will always be one or more
required main operator stations. Additional operator stations can also be delivered.
These operator stations are delivered as fully or more limited equipped versions.
A fully equipped operator station will have the same hardware components as a main
operator station.
A limited operator station will have a smaller display and will not be able to present
information to the same extent as a fully equipped operator station.

Note:

Additional operator stations may not confirm with class requirements.


Which operator station to use for a given operation, should be chosen
based on type of operation, area of operation and the risk involved.

Page 3-12 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

3.5

Control Cabinets
For DP class 2 systems, three (or alternatively one large) cabinets are required. All
cabinets are based on the same Rolls-Royce Common Platform design.
Each control cabinet have four Rolls-Royce Marine Controllers with interfaces to
operator stations, thruster devices, power systems, position reference systems (GNSS,
laser, radar, hydro acoustics etc.) and different sensors (gyro compasses, VRUs, wind
sensors etc.).
For the alternative DP2 configuration, the control cabinet contains six Rolls-Royce
Marine Controllers.
Figure 8 shows examples of the location of the main components of the control cabinet.

9
3

10

2
1
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Example of an Icon Control Cabinets Layout

Main AC/DC power supply


Circuit breaker for the AC/DC power supply/supplies
Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
CAN modules
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (system) (if installed)
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (simulator) (if installed)
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (I/O) (if installed)
System specific I/O modules
System specific network switch
Thruster specific I/O modules

Figure 9 shows examples of the location of the main components of the alternative large
DP2 control cabinet.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-13 of 34

System Description

DP-A

DP-C

DP-B

1
2
3

4
5

4
10

Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

3.6

Examples of the alternative large DP2 Control Cabinets Layout

Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory


CAN modules
Network switches
I/O modules
DP-A Main AC/DC power supply
DP-A Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
DP-C Main AC/DC power supply
DP-C Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
DP-B Main AC/DC power supply
DP-B Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)

UPS
The uninterruptable power supply, UPS, delivers filtered and stabilized uninterrupted
power for the Icon system. In case of loss of main supply, the UPS can provide power
for the system for at least 30 minutes. The status of the UPS is monitored by the Icon
system.
The connectors for power supply and interfaces are located at the rear of the UPS.
See Figure 10 for the location of the main components of the UPS.

Page 3-14 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

3
4

Figure 10 Example of an Uninterruptable Power Supply Layout, Front and Rear View
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

3.7
Note:

Circuit breakers
UPS Marine filter
UPS Power module
UPS Battery module
Main switch

Thrust Devices
The Icon system is controlling the thrust devices via a corresponding
remote control system.

3.7.1 Status and Settings


Rudders
The operator can set the maximum permitted rudder angle for manoeuvre operations.
In addition, it is possible to fix a rudder in neutral position (zero angle) such that the
rudder is not actively used.
Azimuth Thrusters
To achieve the optimal system performance, the Icon system will normally actively use
the steering of azimuth thrusters (auto direction) to obtain the best overall utilisation of
the thrust devices. However, it is possible to fix a single azimuth thruster to a set of predefined, fixed directions (typically towards port, starboard, aft, forward). Similarly, a
group of azimuth thrusters will be defined to take a set of fixed directions (typically two
azimuth thrusters aft).
Pitch/Rpm Combinator
The Icon system is configured for combinator run in cases where the thrust device can
actively control both rpm and pitch of the propeller. The combinator curves are
optimised for each propeller with respect to:
Fast thruster force generation
Noise and vibration
Fuel consumption.
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-15 of 34

System Description
Transfer to Lever Control
During operation, the operator can transfer a thrust device to manual lever control. This
functionality depends on the type of remote control system for the specific thrust device.
The command transfer to lever control is by the give-then-take principle. First, the thrust
device is disabled from the Icon system. Secondly the operator must take command on
the lever unit and then control the thrust device manually.
From the Icon system the operator can re-enable the thrust device for Icon operation at
any time.
Some examples where such functionality might be useful are:
Transfer of main propellers (and rudders) to lever control and use the remaining
thrusters for heading control only
Transfer of a swing-up thruster to lever control and keep the remaining thrust devices
for positioning and heading control by the Icon system.

3.7.2 Failure Detection and Failure Handling


Communication and Signal Monitoring
The Icon system continuously monitors and compares the thrust device feedback and
order signals by the setpoint-feedback monitoring function. Any significant steady-state
deviations will result in an alarm.
When thrust device signals are hardwired between the Icon system and the thrust device,
the signals out of range (typically an effect of a broken wire) will issue an alarm.
Communication errors between the Icon system and the thrust device will automatically
be detected.

Insufficient Thrust Configuration


The Icon monitors the system's ability to perform the requested operation based on the
present thrust configuration. The thrust configuration depends on:
Number of active thrust devices
Fixed or automatic direction on azimuth thrusters and rudders
Power system configuration and loads.
When the system is no longer able to generate force in surge or sway or moment in yaw,
insufficient thrust configuration alarms will be issued.
Example 1
If the system is operating with active sway control and a thruster is lost such that sway
force no longer can be generated without also introducing a large moment, the system
will not be able to keep a safe operation. An insufficient sway configuration alarm is
then issued and also clearly indicated on the graphical display.
Example 2
A vessel with two azimuth thrusters aft in a fixed direction configuration. If one of the
thrusters is lost and the other remains fixed in a certain direction, the Icon system cannot
necessarily generate thrust in all three axes. An insufficient configuration alarm is then
issued and also clearly indicated on the graphical display.

Page 3-16 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

Note:

If azimuth thrusters or rudders are set to fixed direction and insufficient


thrust configuration occurs, the system will, if necessary, automatically
disable fixed directions and set the direction control to auto.

3
Note:

If the operator (on purpose) would like to reduce the number of active
thrust devices such that an insufficient thrust configuration situation will
occur, it is recommended to disable surge and/or sway from active control
in order to avoid the alarm situation.

3.8 Sensors and Position Reference System


Note:

For detailed information about sensors that are part of the Icon delivery,
see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
Information about sensors that are not part of the Icon delivery, see
sensor system suppliers manuals.

A number of sensors provide the interfaces for various operator devices monitored by
the Icon system via the control cabinet. In addition to gyro compass, such devices can
be hydro acoustic, laser based, radar based, VRUs, wind sensors, GNSS etc.
Class rules regulate minimum system requirement. The Icon system requires interface
to accurate position measurement systems (typically differential GNSS reference
system). The Icon system also will have interface to at least a wind sensor (relative wind
speed and direction) and a vertical reference unit (VRU) for measurement of roll and
pitch angle of the vessel.

3.8.1

Multi Sensor System Handling


The Icon system can be connected to more than one sensor of the same type. When
multiple sensors are used the system will do a weighting between the signals based on
the signal quality, see section 4.4 Signal Processing Functions.
The Icon system will automatically detect unacceptable deviations between sensors of
same type and an alarm will be issued. If an error is detected in a sensor, the weighting
function automatically decrease the weight factor of that sensor to a minimum. Instead,
the factor from the other sensors of the same type is increased. The operator can also
disable a sensor and thereby stop it from being used.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-17 of 34

System Description

4 Function
4.1 Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartships) and yaw (rotation about the centre of selected
rotation), see figure 11.

surge

sway

yaw

Figure 11 Fundamental Axes of Horizontal Motion

By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway and
thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.

Page 3-18 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

4.2
4.2.1

Graphical User Interface


GUI Philosophy and Interaction
The Icon system operations are performed via the operator devices and the graphical
user interface (GUI). The most common operations can be performed by using dedicated
push-buttons on the operator devices. For details, please refer to the User Manual
chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
The graphical user interface is designed to be a tool for monitoring and actively
controlling the system through intuitive presentation and touch-screen principles. The
amount of information presented on the display is restricted to the basics necessary for
the operation of the system. This helps the operator to focus on the most vital
information.
To achieve the best visibility of the graphical interface, the system can be set to different
colour schemes:
Day-colour scheme with light background colour
Night-colour scheme with the darkest background colour.
A change of the colour scheme will have effect on all operator stations simultaneously.

Status Indications and Colour Codes


In the GUI, different colours are used for the visualisation of:
Selected and active status of thruster device, sensor or position reference system
Online standby state
Alarm status
Feedback signals
Setpoints, orders and other operator inputs
Negative measurements.

Figure 12 GUI Main View (example)

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-19 of 34

System Description

4.2.2

Main Layout and Components


The GUI is specially designed for Icon system operations and touch-screen based user
interaction. The display unit is divided into areas, each representing the different
operational aspects of the Icon system. Depending on the system configuration, the
logical areas can be placed on two different screens. It is also possible to some extent to
control which logical areas to display in each screen.
Figure 13, 14 and 15 show the GUI layout for, respectively:
Splitscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and most functions and
settings available in the system, including two stack of panels (1) for main operations
and user defined settings.
Remote control display displays the statusbar (7), toolbar (5) and two stack of
panels (1) for main operations and user defined settings.
Fullscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and mostly view only
information.
For detailed information about the different areas and system modes, please refer to the
User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.

3
4
1

6
7

Figure 13 GUI Splitscreen Mode


Pos

Designation

Function

Stack of panels

The stack of panels contains operational functions and user


defined settings.

User HUD

User head-up display, the information presented in these two


areas contain speed indicator, position coordinates indicator,
DP Class monitor, thrust power indicator etc.

Main HUD

Main head-up display, presents vital information about the


vessel movement (i.e. heading, position and order).

World

Area for the visualisation of the vessel position, heading and


motion, and the thruster and rudder usage.

Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons to alter the appearance of the


GUI, change the operational settings of the system and shortcuts to some vital system functions.

Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.

Statusbar

Page 3-20 of 34

Information area, displaying current system mode and status.


Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

Figure 14 GUI Remote Control Display

3
4
5
2

6
7
Figure 15 GUI Fullscreen Mode

Note:

For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.

Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-21 of 34

System Description
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.

4.3

System Operation
The Icon operator stations have a high resolution colour display with a touch-screen
interface. Any operation of the system can be performed through the graphical interface.
In addition, the most common operations can be performed by means of dedicated pushbuttons on the operator devices.
For details, please refer to the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.

4.3.1 Basic Operational Modes


The Icon system comprise the following basic operational modes:
Standby
Joystick
Positioning.

Standby
Standby is a monitoring mode where the Icon system will not generate any control
outputs (such as thruster action). If sensors and position reference systems are available,
all signals can be monitored on the operator station(s). Feedback and status signals from
thrust devices and power system can be monitored as well. Entering standby from any
other Icon function will immediately stop any thruster action on thrusters actively used
for Icon operations.
Start-up Function
When the system is activated (out of standby), the default start-up function is the
Joystick function with manual position and manual heading control modes. However, it
is possible to define other start-up functions such as yaw control fore.
Start-up heading control function (Manual/Auto) can also be preset in such way that the
Icon system automatically enters fixed heading function when activated. The selected
start-up function will activate only thrust devices needed for the selected function, e.g.
yaw control fore will activate only thrust devices located fore of midship.

Page 3-22 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

Joystick Functions
The Joystick mode comprises all operational functions in surge, sway and yaw for
operating the vessel by means of the joystick device and manual/automatic heading
control. The following operational functions are available as standard for the Joystick
mode:
Manual position and manual heading
In manual position and manual heading, the operator manoeuvres the vessel by using
the three-axes lever. The lever is used for direct generation of surge and sway forces
and yawing moment demands by the thrust devices.
Auto heading (fixed or change heading)
Reliable and accurate heading measurement (usually a gyrocompass) is required for
activating this function. In auto heading, the heading of the vessel is kept automatically
at the present heading setpoint value (fixed heading). Heading deviation is monitored
and an alarm will be issued when moving outside the boundaries.
In auto heading, the heading of the vessel can be automatically controlled from the
present heading towards a new heading setpoint by a change heading operation. A
reference heading signal is generated to ensure a smooth and controlled heading
change operation. In change heading, the system takes into account the maximum
rotation speed setting.
Yaw control (fore/aft)
If surge and sway axes are disabled (no control), the system will control the yawing
moment of the vessel only. This function can be used in cases where few thrust devices
are enabled for active use, e.g. only one tunnel thruster fore and the other thrust devices
are operated by manual levers. The heading function can then be either in manual
heading or auto heading (fixed or change).
Rotation point
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.
The operator can generate a new heading setpoint in many ways, such as:
Position device Heading wheel
A new heading setpoint is easily generated by rotating the heading wheel in the desired
direction, in increments relative to the present heading setpoint.
Joystick device Push-buttons
Dedicated push-buttons are available for the increment or decrement of the heading
setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint
GUI
When using the graphical user interface, a new heading setpoint can be generated by:
Numeric input of a new heading setpoint
Increment/decrement of the heading setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint.
Whenever a new heading setpoint is defined, the new proposed heading is clearly
displayed on the graphical user interface together with a numeric presentation. The
change heading operation starts when the new heading setpoint is acknowledged by the
operator (by the Accept soft-button on the graphical user interface, or by the Accept
push-button on the joystick or positioning device).

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-23 of 34

System Description
Joystick Settings
The following settings are available for the Joystick mode:
Joystick sensitivity
Heading control gain
Maximum rotational speed (used in change heading operations)
Heading deviation warning and alarm limits
Thrust allocation settings, depending on the thrust configuration of the vessel (e.g. bias
settings, thrust device combinator settings, maximum rudder angle, fixed direction on
azimuthing thrusters).

Positioning Functions
The positioning mode comprises all joystick functions. In addition, the following
operational functions are available:
Auto position (fixed or change position)
The surge and sway axes are controlled automatically. Reliable and accurate position
measurements (e.g. satellite-based systems, laser-based systems, radar-based systems,
hydro-acoustic systems) are required for these operations. The environmental
conditions, the system control gain settings and the number of thrusters active,
determine the performance of the automatic positioning.
In fixed position, the vessel is kept automatically on the operator selected position
setpoint. Position deviation is monitored and an alarm will be issued when moving
outside the boundaries. A change position operation can be initiated for automatic
moving of the vessel from present position towards the new position setpoint.
Reference position signals are generated to ensure a smooth and controlled position
change operation. The surge and sway speed settings determine the response and time
to achieve the new vessel position. Change position operations requires the auto
heading control to be active. A change position operation can be combined with a
change heading operation at any time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
Mixed surge and sway control
The operator can select combinations of surge and sway axes control (No control,
Manual or Auto).
Manual/auto heading control
Automatic heading control (fixed or change heading) is in most cases required in
combination with any auto position mode.
Rotation point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point. The actual vessel position, the
position setpoint and the position deviation monitoring, are always related to the
selected rotation point.
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.

Page 3-24 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description
Additional Positioning Functions
When in positioning mode, the following additional functions are available:
Wind compensation
If wind speed and direction measurements are available, the resulting wind loads acting
on the vessel can be automatically compensated by the Icon system. This function is
for rapid compensation of variations in wind loads acting on the vessel. In most cases,
the wind compensation feature will enhance the positioning performance.
Positioning Settings

The following settings are available for the Positioning function:


Position control gain (low/medium/high)
Maximum surge and sway speed (used in change position operations)
Position deviation warning and alarm limits

4.3.2 Basic System Functions


Command Transfer
The Icon system provides means for transfer of command control between the different
operator stations. Only one logical operator station (operator devices with
corresponding operator station display(s)) can be in command at a given time.
Command transfer between Icon operator stations can be set-up to require a Give-thantake functionality.

Class Monitoring
In the Icon system, the operator can select the IMO DP class, which the system is
supposed to be in compliance with. Based on this input, the class monitoring function
will provide a complete overview of the system configuration regarding:
Sufficient sensors systems active
Sufficient position reference systems active
The power system and its configuration
Sufficient thrust devices active
DP system hardware components and data network status
Result of the online consequence monitoring function.

Online Consequence Monitoring


The DP online consequence monitoring is a class requirement for IMO DP2 and DP3
operations. Based on the prevailing conditions, this function evaluates online the DP
systems ability to keep the vessel on the desired position, heading or track in a worstcase failure scenario, typically loss of one of the main power bus bars or equivalent.
The DP consequence monitoring function status is presented on the graphical user
interface, and an alarm will be issued when appropriate. For DP class 1 operations, this
function can be disabled.

Power Limitation
The Icon system includes power limitation. When activated, the power limitation
function computes the available power for Icon operation and limits the thrust device
action to avoid power system overload.
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-25 of 34

System Description
Power system measurements, thrust device feedback and internal power models are used
to estimate available power on each power bus for thrust devices controlled by the Icon
system. In cases with power limitation, i.e. insufficient available power to satisfy the
commanded thrust, the thrust orders are equally reduced.
Hence, the thrust reduction ratio is equal for all thrusters on the bus(es) with insufficient
power. Power limitation alarms are submitted for the limited thrust devices, and
limitation status is clearly indicated on the Icon graphical display.

Note:

If desired, the Icon system can be configured not to utilise all the available
power, to avoid an automatic start of the generators by the power
management system.

Power Interface Failure Detection and Failure Handling


The Icon system performs error checks on the power interface. Alarms are issued when
failures on the power system interface are detected. These are I/O link failures, I/O unit
failures or other communication failures.
The value of estimated available power for Icon thrust devices will not be updated
(freeze) when a power interface failure is detected, and the power limitation function
will continue in a non-feedback manner.

Thrust Configuration
When the Icon system is activated (from standby), all available thrust devices are
enabled for active use. During operation, a thrust device can be set to idle state. This
means that the system keeps command of the thrust device, but the thrust order is neutral
(e.g. zero pitch).
When a thrust device is in idle state, the operator have the ability to take command of
the thrust device on the dedicated lever, and operate it in combination with the remaining
thrust devices actively used by the Icon system.
The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active thrust devices.
If the requested mode of operation cannot be fulfilled due to reduced number of thrust
devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if an axis is set to No control, this alarm
will not be issued.

Note:

When the start-up function is defined to be other than default (Joystick


mode with manual position and manual heading), the system will activate
only the thrust devices required for the selected start-up mode.
Example: If the start-up function is defined to be yaw control fore, only fore
thrust devices are activated.

Built-in Trainer
The purpose of the built-in trainer is to provide operator training and system
familiarisation as an integral part of the Icon system. The built-in trainer comprises a
vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated
operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic dynamic behavior of
environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and resulting vessel motion.
Page 3-26 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description
The simulator sends artificial measurements and feedback signals to the Icon system that
in real operations are received from the sensor systems, position reference systems,
power systems and thrust devices. Based on these inputs, the Icon system computes
thrust device order signals. In training, these signals are sent back to the vessel
simulator, not the real thrust devices.

3
Note:

4.3.3

The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.

Optional Functions
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional operational functions:
Waypoint tracking
Target tracking
Towing.
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional system functions:
Capability analysis.

Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint Tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints. During the
tracking operation, all three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
Latitude/longitude
Radius about the waypoint that defines when to change to the next waypoint
Vessel speed on the leg towards the waypoint.
During a Waypoint Tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed
in several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation)
During waypoint tracking, the cross-track deviation is monitored. An alarm is issued if
the vessel moves outside the boundaries. The waypoint tracking function can be paused
and resumed at any time by the operator (by the Pause soft-button on the graphical user
interface, or by the Pause push-button on the positioning device).
Waypoints can be transferred from electronic chart systems to the Icon system (if such
an interface exist and is available on the electronic chart system).
Waypoint Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in waypoint tracking:
Cross-track deviation warning and alarm limits
Heading setpoint option (operator set/track course/from waypoint list)
Side-slip angle (offset to tangential heading setpoint)
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-27 of 34

System Description

Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the Icon vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
Accurate and reliable measurements of distance and direction between the DP vessel
and the target are required for target tracking. During the target tracking operation, all
three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
A reaction radius about the tracked object is defined whenever target tracking is entered.
Similarly, the present distance and bearing are taken to be the setpoints for distance and
bearing. When the object moves outside the reaction radius, the reaction radius is moved
correspondingly, and thus the vessel starts to track the object.
During target tracking operations, the heading control is governed by operator defined
heading setpoints (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
Target Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in Target Tracking:
Target identification (which target to track)
Reaction radius

Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. A constant bias force can only be added when the surge
axis control mode is set to Joystick. The bias force will automatically be set to zero by
the system if the Joystick mode is exited.
The joystick lever can be used in combination with the constant bias force to adjust the
total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can be neutralized by moving the
joystick in negative surge position.
Towing Settings
The bias surge force can be entered numerically or incrementally up and down from the
GUI.

4.4

Signal Processing Functions


All measurements to the Icon system have to pass several levels of testing and
processing before being utilised in the control of the vessel, see following table. Alarms
will be issued if the Icon system detects any errors in the input signals at any level.

Function\Device

Power
System

Propulsion
System

Interface check

Wind
Sensors

VRUs

Gyro
Compasses

Posrefs

Device specific checks Consistency SP/FB


checks
monitoring

Wind speed
scaling

Output
smoothing

Info quality
evaluation

Range check

Frozen signal check

Wildpoint check

Step check

Signal Processing Functions per Device (X = Applied, = Not Applied)


Page 3-28 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description
Function\Device

Power
System

Propulsion
System

High variance check

High dynamics

Position
standardisation

Wind
Sensors

VRUs

Gyro
Compasses

Posrefs

Position alignment

Differ and voting reject

Weighting

Manual scaling

Signal Processing Functions per Device (X = Applied, = Not Applied)

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-29 of 34

System Description
The signal processing functions available is described in more detail in the following
table:
Function

Desciption

Interface check

This function checks that the interface to all sub-systems and devices are working
correctly.
Loop and range checks on signals are performed, as well as hardware and protocol
checks for serial lines and network communication. Possible interface errors will
result in Unavailable status for the specific device in the GUI.

Device specific checks

This function device specific checks on sub-systems and devices.

Range check

t
Out of range

Frozen signal

This function checks if all input signals to the system are within the system specified
range.
Out of range status will result in auto disabling of sensors and position reference
systems.
Out of range status on power signals will cause the signal to be limited on max/min
limit.
Frozen signal check

This function checks that the signals from sensors and position reference devices
are not frozen.
If a signal is unchanged or changes very slowly for an abnormal long period of time,
a signal freeze alarm is issued.

Wildpoint check

t
Wild point &
replacement

Step

High dynamics High variance

This function checks the signals for wildpoints, i.e. single values that are
unexpected and does not follow the curve for the other values.
Signal wild points are replaced, and alarms issued in the GUI.
Step check

Page 3-30 of 34

This function checks the signals from the devices for unacceptable steps.
If unacceptable steps are found, the device will be disapproved until the signal
becomes normal again. For large signal steps the device will be automatically
disabled.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description
Function

Desciption

High variance check

This function checks if there are high variances in the output values from sensors
and position reference devices. If there are high variances, the device will be
disapproved until the signal becomes normal again.

High dynamics

This function checks the signals for high dynamics.


For abnormal signal dynamics the device will be disapproved until the signal
becomes normal again. For extreme signal dynamics the device will be
automatically disabled.

Position standardisation This function performs checks on raw measurements, standardized measurements
and aligned measurements for position reference systems.
Out of range and Frozen signal checks are performed on the raw measurements.
The raw measurements are mapped to the standardized vessel position.
The Wildpoint, Step, High variance and High dynamics checks are performed
on standardized positions.
Position alignment

t
Aligning dashed line with continuous
This function is used for alignment of the position reference systems to provide
position measurements that are referred to a common zero frame.
Basically, each GNSS define their own zero point, and the local position references
are aligned with the GNSS zero frame. A GNSS can also be aligned if the position
deviates from another more reliable GNSS.
The position references can be re-aligned from the GUI when required.
If there are no GNSS available one of the local position reference systems will
define the zero frame.

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-31 of 34

System Description
Function

Desciption

Differ and voting reject

Voting rejected

Weighted

Differ rejected

These functions performs divergence checks.


Differ check is performed when two devices of the same type are enabled. If the
difference between the signals of the two devices exceed a predefined limit, a
Differ alarm is issued. If one of the signals clearly moves away from the other, that
device will be Differ Rejected.
Voting Reject is performed when three or more devices of the same type are
enabled. If the difference between the signals of one device compared with the
others exceed a predefined limit, the device is rejected / disapproved until the
signals becomes normal again.
Divergence checks are also performed on disabled devices. The disabled devices
are compared with the enabled devices.
Weighting

This function automatically makes the output values from functional and enabled
sensors and position reference devices affect the system in relation to the quality of
the output signal.
Weighted signals will only be calculated for multiple devices of the same type.

Manual scaling

Page 3-32 of 34

This functions is used to manually control how much specific sensors and position
reference devices affects the system

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

System Description

5 Location of Manufacturing Number


5.1 Marking Locations
Electrical cabinets and junction boxes are physically marked with a unique tag, and also
on all applicable drawings. The I/O cabinets are marked with the Rolls-Royce logotype
in the upper left corner.
The Rolls-Royce logotype is imprinted in remote control panels, alarm panels and cabin
panels.
Cables are marked with a cable tag at both ends.

5.1.1 Product Identification


Each unit of the Icon system is marked with a unique product identification label, stating
system name and type, unit name and function, and tag number, see example in Figure
16.

Rolls-Royce IconTM
DP System Class 2
MAIN CONTROL CABINET A
+C101
Figure 16 Product Identification Label

5.1.2

Company Identification
The Rolls-Royce Company Identification sticker shows where the product has been
produced and is found on discrete places on all delivered items, e.g. on the inside of the
cabinet doors.

TYPE NO

INST.NO

SERIAL NO

Q.A.- DATE

3
4

MADE IN NORWAY

Rolls-Royce Marine AS
dep.: Automation - Longva
N-6293 Longva,Norway

Figure 17 Company Identification Sticker


Pos

Denomination

Meaning

TYPE NO

Corresponding drawing number with the revision letter


in closed brackets

SERIAL NO

Production order number

INST. NO

MPS number (part number)

Q.A. DATE

Date and signature by test responsible

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 3-33 of 34

System Description

Page 3-34 of 34

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX


Revision: C

Delivery Specification
1

General ......................................................................................................4-3

Main Item List ............................................................................................4-3

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-04MX


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-04MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Delivery Specification

1 General
This chapter contains a delivery specification of all separately packaged items in the
Rolls-Royce delivery.

Note:

Upon reception of the Rolls-Royce equipment, the receiver must compare


the shipping documents with the physical items received. If any
discrepancy is found, Rolls-Royce must be informed immediately.

2 Main Item List


If the delivery comprise a complete system (Poscon or Icon), the delivery specification
is found in the Main Item List (01LI), see chapter 12 Design Drawings.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-04MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 4-3 of 4

Delivery Specification

Page 4-4 of 4

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-04MX


Revision: B

Technical Data
1

General ......................................................................................................5-3

Environmental Data ..................................................................................5-3

Electrical Data ...........................................................................................5-3

4
Hardware Data ..........................................................................................5-4
4.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................5-4
4.1.1 Main Display ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.2 Display Controller ............................................................................5-4
4.1.3 Input Device ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.4 AC/DC Power Supply ......................................................................5-5
4.1.5 Diode Bridge ....................................................................................5-5
4.1.6 Printers ............................................................................................5-5
4.1.7 Remote Control Display (Operators Chair Only) ............................5-5
4.2 Control Cabinet(s) ......................................................................................5-5
4.2.1 Main Components in the Control Cabinet(s) ...................................5-5
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ..........................................................5-7
4.3.1 Main Components in the UPS .........................................................5-7
5
Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-8
5.1 Manoeuvering Mode Selector Switch .........................................................5-8
5.2 Thruster System .........................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Signals ...........................................5-10
5.2.2 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Sequence .......................................5-11
5.3 Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems ...............................................5-12
5.4 Power System ..........................................................................................5-12
6

Additional Interfaces ..............................................................................5-12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Technical Data

1 General
This section provides the technical data of the Icon system, with focus on the main
hardware components. Detailed drawings and interface descriptions are found in the
delivery specific drawings, see chapter 12 Design Drawings.
The Icon system is designed to meet the type approval requirements stated by EU
standards and the following classification societies:
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
China Classification Society (CCS)
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Germanischer Lloyds (GL)
Korean Register of Shipping (KR)

Lloyds Register (LR)


Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)
Registro Italiano Navale (RINA)
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping (RS)
Croatian Register of Shipping (Hrvatski Register Brodova) (CRS)
Indian Register of Shipping (IRS).

2 Environmental Data
Temperature:

055 C

(Engine room)
055 C (Control room, Accomodation and Bridge)

Humidity:

97 %

Vibration:

Restrictions in the 3100 Hz frequency range


313.2 Hz, displacement limited to 1.0

mm

13.2100 Hz, acceleration limited to 0.7 g


EMC:

According to the rules of the Classification Societies, and the


IEC945 standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility

Enclosure:

IP22 (Control room, Accomodation and Bridge)


IP44 (Engine room)

3 Electrical Data
DC power supply

24 VDC

AC power supply

220230 VAC, 5060 Hz*)

*) See chapter 12 Design Drawings for required power details.


All sub-components of the system are powered via the main control cabinets, or directly
from a system UPS (Uninterruptiple Power Supply).

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 5-3 of 12

Technical Data

4 Hardware Data
This section describes each of the Icon system unit types. Some units in this description
may not be a part of the specific delivery. See the Main Item List (01LI) in chapter
12 Design Drawings, for a detailed listing of the specific system delivery.
Details about the hardware can be subject to change without further notice.

4.1

Operator Stations
The operator stations provide the operator interaction units. The system may be
equipped with several operator stations. The operator station can be divided into several
units. Hence, the sub-panel units can be arranged according to the user requirements and
the requirements to ergonomics at the different bridge arrangement (desk, chair,
integrated bridge system etc.).
Each operator station is interfaced to the control cabinet(s) by means of Ethernet and
CAN bus communication links.
All operations can be performed and monitored either from any main operator station,
integrated in the operators chair or from a desk mounted operator station.
The vessel can also be equipeed with additional, limited operator stations that will have
a smaller display and will not be able to present information to the same extent as a fully
equipped operator station.
In general, the operator stations consists of the following main items:
Display unit (including display controller)
Operator devices
- Joystick device (including a 3-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators)
- Positioning device (including a 2-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators).

4.1.1

Main Display
High-resolution colour LCD with resistive touch-screen interface
24 VDC power supply.

4.1.2

Display Controller
CPU with VGA and 10/100Base-Tx Ethernet
Serial channels (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422)
Compact flash reader
24 VDC power supply.

4.1.3

Input Device
CAN bus interface
24 VDC power supply.

Page 5-4 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Technical Data

4.1.4

AC/DC Power Supply


Input voltage range: 85264 VAC (4565 Hz)
Nominal output voltage tolerance: 24 VDC 1 %
Setting range for the output voltage: 22.528.5 VDC
Max. output current (continuous): 1020 A @ 24 VDC.

4.1.5

Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A.

4.1.6

Printers
Line printer (no graphics, only alarms)
- Impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand.
- 230 VAC power supply
Hardcopy printer
- High resolution color printer
- 230 VAC power supply.

4.1.7

Remote Control Display (Operators Chair Only)


High-resolution colour LCD with resistive touch-screen
Integrated display controller.

4.2

Control Cabinet(s)
The control cabinet(s) provide the interfaces necessary for the interconnection between
the operator stations, thrust devices, switchboard, sensors and position reference
systems. The number of control cabinets depends on the DP class and customer
requirements of the delivered system.
Each cabinet contains controllers, both for DP calculations (DPC) and I/O calculations
(IOC) such as communicating with thrust devices, switchboard, sensors, position
reference systems and auxiliary systems.

4.2.1

Main Components in the Control Cabinet(s)


I/O modules (digital input/output, analogue input/output and serial line interfaces)
Fused distribution to the control system units (24 VDC to sensors and position
reference systems)
Marine Controllers
AC/DC Power Supply
Diode Bridge
Ethernet Switch
Interface Modules

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 5-5 of 12

Technical Data

Marine Controllers (DPC and IOC)


CPU (with VGA/DVI) and dual 100Base-Tx Ethernet
5 serial channels (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422)
4 CAN bus channels
Digital outputs.

AC/DC Power Supply


Input voltage range: 85264 VAC (4565 Hz)
Nominal output voltage tolerance: 24 VDC 1 %
Setting range for the output voltage: 22.528.5 VDC
Max. output current (continuous): 10 A20 A @ 24 VDC

Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A

Ethernet Switch
Managed switch
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports
Fibre-optic ports
Ring network support.

Interface Modules
A control cabinet may be equipped in different ways, dependant of which subsystem to
be interfaced with. In case thrusters or other devices are already equipped with Ethernet
interfaces, there will be less need for digital/analogue I/O. In such case, the cabinet may
be equipped with a separate Ethernet switch connected to the I/O Controller (IOC) in
addition to the CAN I/O modules.
CAN I/O modules
- RRAIO for analogue and digital I/O signals
- RRDIO for digital I/O signals
Signal Isolation Amplifier
- Output current: 0(4)20 mA
- Maximum input current: 25 mA
- Load impedance, current: <= 600 ohm
- Galvanic isolation: 3-way disconnector
Ethernet Switch
- Managed switch
- 10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports.

Page 5-6 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Technical Data

4.3

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)


The UPS delivers filtered and stabilized uninterrupted power for the Icon system. In case
of loss of main supply, the UPS can provide power for the system for at least 30 minutes.
The status of the UPS is monitored by the Icon system.

4.3.1

Main Components in the UPS


Power module
Battery module
EMC filter
Fuses for AC power distribution.

Power Module
On-line double conversion with PFC (Power Factor Correction) system
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports (10/100Base-Tx, RJ45 connectors)
Single phase input

Battery Module
Maintenance-free sealed lead acid
20 pcs 12 V/7 Ah batteries in series per module.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 5-7 of 12

Technical Data

5 Interfaces
The Icon system can acquire measurements from the power system, the truster system,
sensors and position reference systems, and applies thrust setpoints to the thruster
system. This section provides an overview of the different types of interfaces.
For detailed description of interfaces, refer to the delivery specific interface list. See
chapter 12 Design Drawings.

5.1

Manoeuvering Mode Selector Switch


The control cabinet(s) comprises an interface to the manouvering mode switch system
to be enabled for the Icon system operation. The manoeuvring mode selector switch has
the following states:
Manual (manual manoeuvring, Icon system disabled)
Joystick (Icon system enabled) closed contact when active.
DP control (Icon system enabled) closed contact when active.

5.2

Thruster System
The thruster systems are interface by means of a set of signals. The signals are
communicated to the different other thruster systems in one of two ways:
Ethernet (i.e. Helicon X3)
The interface to the thruster control system is based on network communication. The
thruster system interface is a dedicated network channel from an I/O controller, located
in a control cabinet.
Discrete signals
Each signal has its dedicated pair of wires. They are galvanically isolated at the
transmitting end.

Page 5-8 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Technical Data
The signals are set/received with I/O:s located in the thrusters controller cabinet of the
thruster control system, which again are interfaced towards switchboard, steering gear,
variable speed drive and auxiliaries. For each thruster system, the interface may consist
of the signals listed in the following table.
Signal 1)

Type 2)

Direction

Description

Order Pitch

420 mA or 10 V

THR < Icon

Setpoint pitch: -100 % 100 %

Feedback Pitch

420 mA or 10 V

THR > Icon

Feedback pitch: -100 % 100 %

Order Direction

420 mA or 10 V

THR < Icon

Setpoint azimuth angle:


-180 +180

Feedback Direction

420 mA or 10 V

THR > Icon

Feedback azimuth angle:


-180 +180

Signal is only relevant for azimuth thrusters

Signal is only relevant for azimuth thrusters


Order RPM

420 mA or 10 V

THR < Icon

Feedback RPM

420 mA or 10 V

THR > Icon

Feedback RPM:0 100%

Order Rudder

420 mA or 10 V

THR < Icon

Setpoint angle:35, 45 70

Feedback Rudder

420 mA or 10 V

THR > Icon

Feedback angle:35, 45 70

Thruster Avaliable

Pot. free

THR > Icon

Thruster ready for Icon


system

Thruster Request

Pot. free

THR < Icon

Thruster call from Icon


system

Thruster
Acknowledge

Pot. free

THR > Icon

Thruster has accepted DP


control

Pitch Reduced

Pot. free

THR > Icon

Pitch is reduced due to protection or PMS


power limitation

Setpoint RPM:0 100%

1)

Other status signals may apply, e.g. clutches signal (closed = clutch engaged).
For Ethernet interfaces (outstations omitted), ignore the Type column.
For analogue signals 10 V is available if required, 4-20 mA is preferred.
Calibration: 6 mA = -180 (CCW), 12 mA = 0, 18 mA = +180 (CW).
For a detailed description of each thruster interface, refer to the delivery specific system
drawings. See chapter 12 Design Drawings.

2)

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 5-9 of 12

Technical Data

5.2.1

Manoeuvring Mode Selection Signals

Joystick

Request

RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2

Rudder 1 (2 similar)

Request

Rudder request (Separate contacts


operate simultaneously)
Not recommended to select only
one rudder (in or out).
Select both or none!

Acknowledge

DP Mode

Joystick Mode

Enable request

Enable request

DP
Enable request

Manual

Enable request

Enable request

Enable request

Joystick Mode

Joystick

Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch

DP

RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Acknowledge

Propulsion / Thruster
Request

Request

Available

Available

Acknowledge

Request
INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.

Acknowledge

Propulsion / Thruster

Request

Available

Available
Acknowledge

Acknowledge

INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.

Enable Request

Request signal enabled for DP/Joystick operation.

Available

The thruster system is available for DP/Joystick operation and will accept
a request signal.

Request

The DP/Joystick request to take control.

Acknowledge

The thruster/steering gear system is operated from DP/Joystick.

RUN PUMP 1

Pump 1 running (steering gear).

RUN PUMP 2

Pump 2 running (steering gear).

Joystick Mode

Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch.

Manual Mode

Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch

DP Mode

Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch

Page 5-10 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Technical Data

5.2.2

Manoeuvring Mode Selection Sequence


Joystick / DP - Thruster

Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch

Joystick / DP - Steering Gear Interface

No

Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch

Yes

Available
activated from
thruster

Yes

No

RUN PUMP 1
(and/or) RUN PUMP 2 (from)

Yes

Request
from Joystick / DP

Request
from Joystick / DP

No

Acknowledge
activated from
Steering Gear

Yes
Thruster operated
from Joystick / DP

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

No

Steering Gear

Yes

Acknowledge
activated from
thruster

No

No

Yes
Steering gear operated
from Joystick / DP

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 5-11 of 12

Technical Data

5.3

Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems


The Icon system may be interfaced to various sensors and positioning reference systems.
This can be done by means of serial or Ethernet connections.
If nothing else is specified in the delivery specific drawings, the sensors and position
reference systems interface protocol is NMEA 0183 on a serial line RS422 9600/8/N/1.
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for delivery specific drawings.
See chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals for details on delivered sensors and position
reference systems.
The Icon system can be connected (point-to-point) to all types of sensors and positioning
reference systems with a standard type of interface.
Types of sensors and position reference systems can be:
GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System)
Radar based sensor
Laser based sensor
Hydroacoustic based sensor
Taut wire.
Types of external sensors can be:
Gyrocompass
Wind sensor
VRU sensor
Draft sensor
Winch interface

5.4

Power System
The power system interface monitors the status of the applicable circuit breakers, bus tie
and generator load. Interface signal specifications are found in the Wiring Diagram, see
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Signal

Type

Direction

Description

Generator load

420 mA

SB > Icon

Generator power load measurement

Generator breaker

Pot. free

SB > Icon

Closed/open = Generator available/


unavailable

Bus tie

Pot. free

SB > Icon

Closed = buses are connected


Open = separate buses

Thruster breaker

Pot. free

SB > Icon

Closed/open = Thruster available/


unavailable

6 Additional Interfaces
Possible additional interfaces may be implemented with the Icon system. In such cases,
details will be found in chapter 12 Design Drawings.

Page 5-12 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-05MX


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
1
General ......................................................................................................6-3
1.1 Operation Principles ...................................................................................6-3
1.2 Basic Operational Modes ...........................................................................6-3
2
Operation ...................................................................................................6-4
2.1 Joystick Device ...........................................................................................6-4
2.1.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-4
2.2 Positioning Device ......................................................................................6-6
2.2.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-6
2.3 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................6-7
2.3.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction .......................................................6-7
2.3.2 Main Layout and Components ........................................................6-8
2.4 Activating the Icon System .......................................................................6-10
2.5 Deactivating the Icon System ...................................................................6-10
2.6 Standby ....................................................................................................6-11
2.7 Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations ..................................6-11
2.8 Joystick Operations ..................................................................................6-12
2.8.1 Manual Heading ............................................................................6-12
2.8.2 Auto Heading .................................................................................6-12
2.8.3 Heading Control Settings ..............................................................6-14
2.8.4 Control Presets ..............................................................................6-15
2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot) ....................................................................6-15
2.9 Positioning Functions ...............................................................................6-17
2.9.1 Automatic Positioning ....................................................................6-17
2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control .....................................................6-19
2.9.3 Position Control Settings ...............................................................6-19
2.9.4 Wind Compensation ......................................................................6-20
2.10 Basic System Functions ...........................................................................6-21
2.10.1 Class Monitoring ............................................................................6-21
2.10.2 Online Consequence Monitoring ...................................................6-21
2.10.3 Power Limitation ............................................................................6-21
2.10.4 Thrust Configuration ......................................................................6-21
2.10.5 Built-in Trainer ...............................................................................6-22
2.11 Optional Functions ....................................................................................6-23
2.11.1 Waypoint Tracking .........................................................................6-23
2.11.2 Target Tracking .............................................................................6-24
2.11.3 Towing ...........................................................................................6-24
3
GUI ...........................................................................................................6-25
3.1 Main View .................................................................................................6-25

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

3.2 Indicators ................................................................................................. 6-26


3.2.1 Heading Indicator .......................................................................... 6-26
3.2.2 Order Indicator .............................................................................. 6-27
3.2.3 Position Indicator .......................................................................... 6-29
3.2.4 Class Monitor Indicator ................................................................. 6-30
3.2.5 Power ........................................................................................... 6-30
3.2.6 Speed Indicator ............................................................................ 6-31
3.2.7 Vessel Position Indicator .............................................................. 6-32
3.2.8 Wind/Resulting Force Indicator ..................................................... 6-32
3.3 Statusbar ................................................................................................. 6-33
3.3.1 System Status ............................................................................... 6-33
3.3.2 In Command/Give Command ....................................................... 6-33
3.3.3 Axes Control ................................................................................. 6-34
3.3.4 Position Reference System .......................................................... 6-34
3.3.5 Wind Compensation ..................................................................... 6-35
3.3.6 Current Camera View ................................................................... 6-35
3.4 Stack of Panels ........................................................................................ 6-36
3.4.1 Working with Panels ..................................................................... 6-36
3.4.2 The Change Panel ........................................................................ 6-37
3.4.3 The PosRef Panel ......................................................................... 6-38
3.4.4 The Sensor Panel ......................................................................... 6-40
3.4.5 The Thrust Panel .......................................................................... 6-41
3.4.6 The Control Panel ......................................................................... 6-43
3.4.7 The Settings Panel ....................................................................... 6-45
3.4.8 The Operation Panel ..................................................................... 6-48
3.4.9 The Performace Panel (Remote Control Display) ........................ 6-52
3.5 Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 6-53
3.5.1 Views ............................................................................................ 6-54
3.5.2 Zoom ............................................................................................ 6-54
3.5.3 Camera Control ............................................................................ 6-54
3.5.4 Alarms ........................................................................................... 6-54
3.5.5 DP System .................................................................................... 6-55
3.5.6 Monitoring ..................................................................................... 6-56
3.5.7 Operation ...................................................................................... 6-56
3.5.8 Print .............................................................................................. 6-57
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5

Status Symbols and Alarm Handling ................................................... 6-58


Basic Status Symbols .............................................................................. 6-58
Align Status Symbols ............................................................................... 6-58
Additional Status Symbols ....................................................................... 6-59
Alarm Status Symbols ............................................................................. 6-60
Alarm Handling ........................................................................................ 6-61

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Operating Instructions

1 General
This chapter gives a brief overview on how to operate the Icon system. For practical
reasons, it is not possible to go into particulars about all available functions. Instead, the
graphical user interface (GUI) is designed to be as self-explanatory as possible. In the
following sections, the most common functions are described in detail.

1.1

Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartship) and yaw (rotation around the selected rotation
point), see figure 1.

surge

sway

yaw

Figure 1

Fundamental Axes of Horizontal Motion

By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway as well
as thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.

1.2

Basic Operational Modes


The main operational modes in the system are:
Standby
The Standby is a monitoring function where the Icon system will not generate any
control outputs (such as thruster action). If sensors and position reference systems are
available, all signals can be monitored on the operator station(s).
Joystick
The Joystick comprises all operational modes in surge, sway and yaw for operating
the vessel by means of the joystick lever and manual/automatic heading control.
Positioning
The Positioning comprises all joystick functionality. In addition, the vessel can be
kept in a fixed position utilising inputs from one or more positioning reference systems.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-3 of 62

Operating Instructions

2 Operation
2.1 Joystick Device
2.1.1

Push-buttons and Indicators


Push-buttons
Some push-buttons have two dots on them, indicating that they need to be pressed twice
(double press) to activate the designated function.

Lamp Control
The Lamp control push-button with indicators, used to adjust the light of the indicators
in steps. One long push (2 s.) activates the Lamp Test function.

LED Indication
The LED indicator on the Alarm button (5) flashes red together with the alarm buzzer.
When the Alarm button is pressed to mute the alarm, the LED is lit constantly as long
as there are active alarms.
When the LED below the Give command symbol (right hand symbol) on the
Command transfer button (2) flashes on an operator station, this indicates that the
operator station is ready to take the command.

10

5
4

2
Figure 2

Page 6-4 of 62

Joystick Device

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Pos.

Symbol

Function

System activation: Push-button with System On lamp.

Command transfer: Push-button with indicators, used for the transfer


of command between different operator stations. The Give command
(right hand) must normally be activated on the operator station in
command, before command can be obtained by another station.

Manual heading: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the


Manual heading function.

Auto heading: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto


heading function.

Alarm silence: Push-button with indicators, used to mute the alarm


buzzer. The indicators show when an alarm is active.

Decrement: Push-button with indicator, used to decrease the heading


setpoint in pre-defined incremental steps (0.1 or 1 degree).

Increment: Push-button with indicator, used to increase the heading


setpoint in pre-defined incremental steps (0.1 or 1 degree).

Apply: Push-button on top of the joystick lever, used to confirm a new


heading and position setpoint.

Lamp control: Push-button with indicators, used to adjust the light of


the indicators in steps.

10

Joystick lever: 3-axes lever for manual heading and positioning


control.
The lever position generates a force order in surge and sway.
The rotation of the lever generates a yawing moment.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-5 of 62

Operating Instructions

2.2
2.2.1

Positioning Device
Push-buttons and Indicators
Some push-buttons have two dots on them, indicating that they need to be pressed twice
(double press) to activate the designated function.

1
8

9
4

3
Figure 3
Pos.

Page 6-6 of 62

2
Positioning Device
Symbol

Function

Auto position: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the


Auto position function.

Manual position: Push-button used to enter the Manual


position function. Indicators for manual surge (left) and manual
sway (right).

Auto surge: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto


surge function.

Auto sway: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto


sway function.

Pause/Restore: Push-button with indicator, used to pause an


operation. With another press on the push-button, the
operation will continue from where it was paused.

Decrement: Push-button with indicator, used to decrease a


value of a setting (optional).

Position lever: 2-axes lever for position setpoint changes with


integrated heading wheel for heading setpoint changes.

Increment: Push-button with indicator, used to increase a


value of a setting (optional).

Apply: Push-button with indicator, used to confirm a new


heading and position setpoint.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

2.3
2.3.1

Graphical User Interface


GUI Philosophy and Interaction
The Icon system operations are performed via the operator devices and the graphical
user interface (GUI). The most common operations can be performed by using dedicated
push-buttons on the operator devices. For details, please refer to section 3 GUI.
The graphical user interface is designed to be a tool for monitoring and actively
controlling the system through intuitive presentation and touch-screen principles. The
amount of information presented on the display is restricted to the basics necessary for
the operation of the system. This helps the operator to focus on the most vital
information.
To achieve the best visibility of the graphical interface, the system can be set to different
colour schemes:
Day-colour scheme with light background colour
Night-colour scheme with the darkest background colour.
A change of the colour scheme will have effect on all operator stations simultaneously.

Status Indications and Colour Codes


In the GUI, different colours are used for the visualisation of:
Selected and active status of thruster device, sensor or position reference system
Online standby state
Alarm status
Feedback signals
Setpoints, orders and other operator inputs
Negative measurements.

Figure 4

GUI Main View (example)

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-7 of 62

Operating Instructions

2.3.2

Main Layout and Components


The GUI is specially designed for Icon system operations and touch-screen based user
interaction. The display unit is divided into areas, each representing the different
operational aspects of the Icon system. Depending on the system configuration, the
logical areas can be placed on two different screens. It is also possible to some extent to
control which logical areas to display in each screen.
Figure 5, 6 and 7 show the GUI layout for:
Splitscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and most functions and
settings available in the system, including two stack of panels (1) for main operations
and user defined settings.
Remote control display displays the statusbar (7), toolbar (5) and two stack of
panels (1) for main operations and user defined settings.
Fullscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and mostly view only
information.
For detailed information about the different areas and system modes, please refer to
section 3 GUI.

3
4
1

6
7

Figure 5

Page 6-8 of 62

GUI Splitscreen Mode

Pos

Designation

Function

Stack of panels

The stack of panels contains operational functions and user


defined settings.

User HUD

User head-up display, the information presented in these two


areas contain speed indicator, position coordinates indicator,
DP Class monitor, thrust power indicator etc.

Main HUD

Main head-up display, presents vital information about the


vessel movement (i.e. heading, position and order).

World

Area for the visualisation of the vessel position and motion,


and the thruster and rudder usage.

Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons to alter the appearance of the


GUI, change the operational settings of the system and shortcuts to some vital system functions.

Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.

Statusbar

Information area, displaying current system mode and status.


Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

1
Figure 6

GUI Remote Control Display

3
4
5
2

6
7
Figure 7

Note:

GUI Fullscreen Mode

For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
section 3 GUI.

Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-9 of 62

Operating Instructions
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.

2.4
Note:

Activating the Icon System


The manoeuvring mode selector switch must be set to DP Control in
order to be able to activate the Icon system, see chapter 3 System
Description for details.

1.

Press the System activation push-button on the joystick device twice.


The System active indicator is lit.
Manual heading mode is automatically set and its indicator is lit.

2.5
Note:

Deactivating the Icon System


A serious error in the Icon system will automatically deactivate the
system.
In such cases, set the manoeuvring mode selector switch to Manual
mode and transfer control of the thrusters and rudders to corresponding
remote control system.

On the operator station that is in command:


1.

Note:

Press the System activation push-button on the joystick device twice.

The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast transfer
of thrust devices to manual lever control.

Page 6-10 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

2.6

Standby
In standby (not active) mode, the Icon system is continuously running and processing
input data. However, the system has no control of the thrusters, main propellers or
rudders. The operator can monitor input signals, alarms and system status on the
operator station. The system remains in standby mode until it is activated, see section 2.4
Activating the Icon System.

Note:

2.7
Note:

When the Icon system is in standby mode, audible alarms are


automatically muted.

Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations


The operator station defined as master (e.g. the operator station mounted
in the operators chair) does not require the Give command to acquire
command. Command is obtained by pressing the Command transfer
button twice.

The Icon system has a Give-then-Take command transfer functionality.


1.

Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device on the
operator station that currently is in command.
The Give command indicator is lit on all operator stations.

2.

Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device for the
operator station to be in command.
The Give command indicator is turned off.

The In command indicator is lit, indicating that the operator station is now in
command.
If no other operator station has taken command within a certain time, the Give
command will time-out.

Note:

It is not necessary for the system to be activated in order to transfer


commands between operator stations.
It is also possible to change system settings on the operator stations
when it is not activated.

Note:

If a failure occurs in the operator station that is in command, the Give


command indicator will automatically be lit on all operator stations.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-11 of 62

Operating Instructions

2.8
2.8.1

Note:

Joystick Operations
Manual Heading

Whenever the Icon system is activated the manual heading is the default
operating mode.

1.

Press the Manual heading push-button on the joystick device twice to activate the
manual heading operation function.
In manual heading operation mode, the rotation of the joystick generates a yawing
moment.
The manual heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display.

Rotation Point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).

2.8.2

Auto Heading
There are three states of automatic heading control:
Fixed heading the vessel is kept at the present heading setpoint automatically.
Change heading the vessel rotates from the present heading towards the new heading
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
heading setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.
The auto heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display and in the heading indicator.

Note:

In fixed heading operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm if the
heading deviation exceeds the operator defined alarm limit.
In normal operation, the warning limit must be less than the alarm limit.
A warning limit can, however, be set to avoid warnings and only issue
alarms, by setting the warning limit equal to the alarm limit.
See section 2.8.3 Heading Control Settings on how to change the alarm
and warning limits.

Page 6-12 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Fixed Heading
Fixed heading is activated in one of the following ways:
By pressing the Auto heading push-button on the joystick device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
These methods can also be used to update the heading setpoint.
When fixed heading is entered, the heading setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
heading.
1.

Select the Control panel.

2. Press the Preset mode button, select Normal in the sub-menu.


The fixed heading state can be terminated in two ways:
By selecting Manual heading, see section 2.8.1 Manual Heading.
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.

Change Heading

Note:

Change heading can only be initiated when the system already is


operating in auto heading.

A change heading operation can be initiated in the following ways:


By turning the heading wheel on the positioning device, followed by a press on the
Apply push-button.
By using the Increment/Decrement push-buttons on the joystick device.
Tap the Apply button on screen or push the Apply button on top of the joystick lever
to set the new heading setpoint.
By entering the new heading setpoint in the Change panel:
1.

Select the Change panel, sub-view Standard.

2.

Select the row: Hdg.

3.

Press the calculator button.

4. Enter the new heading setpoint followed by Apply.


Example:
Present setpoint

Input on the calculator

New setpoint

30 degrees

8 and Apply

22 degrees

10 degrees

+ 12 and Apply

22 degrees

10 degrees

22 and Apply

22 degrees

The new heading setpoint is clearly indicated together with the heading measurements
in the heading display area on the graphical display.
The change heading operation can be paused by pressing the Pause push-button, this
makes the vessel stay at heading until pause is released. When it is released the vessel
will continue to the original setpoint.
The change heading operation can be terminated in three ways:
By selecting Manual heading mode, see section 2.8.1 Manual Heading.
By selecting Auto heading mode, see section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU
Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-13 of 62

Operating Instructions
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.

Rotation Point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).

Failure Handling
If heading measurements are lost or disabled during auto heading operations, the internal
vessel model will predict the rotation of the vessel (dead reckoning).
In dead reckoning, an auto heading operation will continue where the command action
is based on the predicted heading and rotational speed signals from the internal vessel
model.
Should this failure situation occur during change heading operations, the internal
reference model will automatically slow down towards zero speed in a controlled
manner to stop the vessel motion.
If the gyro is lost, but the measurements are availbable again, the gyro must be reenabled. This is done from the Measurements panel on the display.
Recovery Handling
If the actual heading differ with more than 3 degrees from the set point, a pop-up menu
appears on the display, and the operator must make one of the following decisions:
Stay - Remain fixed in the present heading (setpoint will then be updated to present
heading)
To setpoint - Move back to the original heading setpoint (or continue the change
heading operation to the new heading setpoint).
Tap Stay or To setpoint followed by Apply in the pop-up menu.

2.8.3

Heading Control Settings


The operator can influence the time needed for the automatic heading change operation
by the maximum turn rate value, defined in degrees per minute. In addition, the system
takes into account the present capacity of the thrusters, main propellers and rudders
when starting and stopping the automatic rotation.
In the Settings panel, sub-view Heading, the following settings are available for the
heading mode operations:
Heading gain (low/medium/high).
Wind compensation (block/unblock).
Maximum acceleration factor (used in change heading operations).
Maximum rotational speed (used in change heading operations).
Heading deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
To change a heading setting:
1.

Select the Settings panel, sub-view Heading.

2.

Select a row where a value shall be changed.

3.

Press the Menu button.

4.

Enter the new value followed by Apply.

Page 6-14 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Note:

In manoeuvring operations, the Icon system always turns the vessel in the
direction that makes the shortest turn.

Note:

The Joystick sensitivity and Thrust bias can be changed in the Allocation
sub-view of the Settings panel.

2.8.4

Control Presets
The control preset is clearly indicated by a symbol in the status area on the graphical
display.
In Normal mode, the joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and sway.
There are different ways of managing the control functions:
By pressing the Manual position push-button on the positioning device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
1.

Select the Control panel.

2.

Select a axis row, followed by pressing the Menu button.

3.

Select Joystick from the sub-menu.

Auto Heading Fore (HDG)


If surge and sway axes are disabled (no control), the system will control the yawing
moment of the vessel only. This function can be used in cases where few thrust devices
are enabled for active use, e.g. only one tunnel thruster fore and the other thrust devices
are operated by manual levers.
The heading function can then be either in manual heading, see section 2.8.1 Manual
Heading, or in auto heading (fixed or change), see section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
To disable the surge and sway axes:

2.8.5

1.

Select the Control panel.

2.

Select the Surge row and press the Menu button to open the axis control submenu.

3.

Press the No control button.

4.

Repeat step 2 and 3 for the sway axis.

5.

Select Normal to terminate Auto Heading Fore, or set the system in Standby.

Rotation Point (Pivot)


The operator can set the rotation point, either by choosing from a list of predefined
rotation points or by entering a user-defined rotation point.
To set the vessel rotation point:
1.

Select the Settings panel on the graphical display, sub-view Pivot.

2.

Select the rotation point (Free select, Fore, Midship, Aft) from the drop-down

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-15 of 62

Operating Instructions
menu.

Note:

3.

For rotation point Free select there is two extra drop-down calculator menus for
setting Fwd/aft Rotpoint [m] and Stb/Port Rotpoint [m].

4.

For the changes to take place press the Apply button.

Rotation point can not be changed in change heading state.

Page 6-16 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

2.9
2.9.1

Positioning Functions
Automatic Positioning
There are three functions for automatic control of positioning:
Fixed position the vessel is kept at the present position setpoint automatically.
Change position the vessel rotates from the present position towards the new position
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
position setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.

Note:

Fixed position can only be activated when heading is controlled


automatically.

In fixed position, surge and sway axes are controlled automatically.


The fixed position function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the status area on the
graphical display.

Note:

In fixed position operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm when
moving outside of the operator defined boundaries.
See section 2.9.3 Position Control Settings on how to change the alarm
limit.

Fixed Position
Fixed position can be activated in different ways:
By pressing the Auto position push-button on the position device twice.
By pressing the Auto surge and Auto sway push-buttons on the position device
twice.
From the Control panel (see the following step-by-step description).
1.

Select the Control panel.

2.

Press the Preset mode button, followed by Normal in the sub-menu. The same
effect can be achieved by directly in the list set surge and sway control to auto.
When auto position is entered, the position setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
position.
These methods can also be used to update the position setpoint.
The auto position mode can be terminated in two ways:
By selecting Manual position mode, see section 2.8.4 Control Presets.
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-17 of 62

Operating Instructions

Change Position

Note:

A change position operation can only be initiated when the system already
is operating in auto position.

A change position operation can be combined with a change heading operation at any
time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
There are two ways to initiate a change position operation:
By moving the position lever on the positioning device in the desired direction,
followed by a press on the Apply push-button. The new position is always generated
relative to the vessel alongship (forward/aft) and athwartship (port/starboard) axes.
By entering a new position setpoint in the Change panel. When using the graphical
user interface, a new position setpoint can be defined as:
- Relative position change; North/South and East/West directions.
- Relative position change; alongship (Fwd/Aft) and athwartship (Port/Stbd)
directions.
- Relative position change; distance and course.
- Absolute position in Latitude/Longitude.
- Absolute position in UTM-coordinates (Northing/Easting/UTM zone).
Whenever a new position setpoint is defined, the new proposed position is clearly
visualised in the graphical user interface together with numeric position coordinates
(relative and absolute).
The change position operation starts when the new position setpoint is acknowledged by
the operator (by the Apply button in the graphical user interface, or by the Apply
push-button on the positioning device).
To enter a new position setpoint:
1.

Select the Change panel, sub-view Standard.

2.

Select the row corresponding to the definition to be used.

3.

Press the Menu button.

4.

Enter the new position setpoint followed by Apply.

The system automatically calculates the other position setpoint definitions.


The change position operation can be paused by pressing the Pause push-button on the
position device, this makes the vessel stay at heading until pause is released. When
released the vessel will continue to original position setpoint.
The change position operation can be terminated in three ways:
By selecting Manual position mode, see section 2.8.4 Control Presets.
By pressing the Auto position push-button on the positioning device twice, see
section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.

Page 6-18 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

2.9.2

Mixed Surge and Sway Control


The operator can select different combinations of surge and sway axes control (No cntrl/
Joystick/Auto). This is done from the Control panel, or by pressing the Auto surge
and/or Auto sway push-buttons on the positioning device. To change the axes control
from the GUI:
1.

Select the Control panel.

2.

Select the axis where the control shall be changed.

3.

Press the Menu button to open the axis control .

4. Select mode for the axis.


The operator can also chose from different predefined modes (Normal/HDG/HDG &
Sway). This i done in the Control panel.
1.

Press the Preset mode button.

2.

Select mode from the sub-menu, the following selections are available:

Normal - This is the default selection, where all three horizontal axes are controlled
by the joystick lever. The joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and
sway.
HDG - With this selection, manual position of the vessel is disabled in the Icon
system, only the yawing moment (heading) can be controlled.
HDG and Sway - This selection activates manual position in sway, but not in surge.
The yawing moment is also controlled.

2.9.3

Position Control Settings


In the Settings panel, sub-view Position, the following settings are available for the
positioning mode operations:
Position control gain (low/medium/high).
Wind compensation (block/unblock)
Maximum surge and sway acceleration factor (used in change position operations).
Maximum surge and sway speed (used in change position operations).
Position deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
The operator can influence the time needed for the automatic position change operation
by the maximum surge and sway speed settings.
To change a position setting:
1.

Select the Settings panel, sub-view Position.

2.

Select a row where a value shall be changed.

3.

Press the Menu button.

4. Enter the new value followed by Apply.


Some settings are displayed in the GUI main view:
Position gain indicator, see section 3.2.3 Position Indicator.
Wind compensation is indicated in the status bar, see section 3.3 Statusbar.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-19 of 62

Operating Instructions

2.9.4

Wind Compensation
The wind compensation can be individually enabled for the three axes of horizontal
motion (surge, sway and yaw).
To activate the wind compensation feature:
1.

Select the Control panel.

2.

Select an axis to enable the wind compensation for.

3.

Press the Windcomp button.

4. Press the Windcomp On (or Windcomp Off) in the sub-menu.


It is also possible to block (and unblock) the wind compensation for Heading and
Positioning from the Settings panel:
1.

Select the Settings panel.

2.

Select Position or Heading in the drop-down menu.

3.

Select the Wind comp row.

4.

Press the Menu button and select block (or unblock) from the sub-menu.

Page 6-20 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

2.10 Basic System Functions


2.10.1 Class Monitoring
The class monitor indicator is displayed in the main view.
The class monitoring function comprise the possibility to select which DP class the
system is assumed to comply with. This is accessed from the Settings panel:

Note:

1.

Select the Settings panel, sub-view System.

2.

Select the DP Class row.

3.

Press the Menu button.

4.

Select DP-class in the sub-menu.

If the system does not comply with the selected class, an alarm will be
issued.

2.10.2 Online Consequence Monitoring


The online consequence monitoring status is presented on the graphical user interface,
and an alarm will be issued when appropriate.
The online consequence monitoring function is viewed in the class monitor indicator
area in the main display area.
This functions is mandatory for DP class 2 and 3 systems, but can be disabled in DP class
1 operations.

2.10.3 Power Limitation


When the power limitation function is activated , it computes the available power for DP
operation and limits the thrust device action to avoid power system overload.
The power limitation function is accessed from the Settings panel:

2.10.4

1.

Select the Settings panel.

2.

Select System in the drop-down menu.

3.

Select the Power Lim row and press the Menu button.

4.

Select enabled (or disabled) in the sub-menu

Thrust Configuration
It is possible to enable or disable any specific thrust device in the system.
1.

Select the Thrust panel, sub-view List

2.

Select the preferred truster row and press the Menu button.

3.

Select Enable (or Disable) in the sub-menu.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-21 of 62

Operating Instructions

Note:

2.10.5

The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active
thrust devices. If the requested mode of operations cannot be fulfilled due
to reduced number of thrust devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if
an axis is set to No control, this alarm will not be issued.

Built-in Trainer
The built-in trainer comprises a vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface
for set-up of the simulated operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic
dynamic behavior of environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and
resulting vessel motion.

Note:

The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.

The built-in trainer can be set up to simulate a specific environment or fault.


The trainer is accessed from a sub-view in the Operation page on the toolbar.

Operation
From this tab it is possible to start and stop the trainer function and monitor the function
availability.

Note:

When the trainer function is on, it is clearly indicated with the


in the statusbar.

symbol

Settings
From this tab system input signals are set according to the following sub-views:
Environment (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target (speed, direction, acceleration, turn rate etc.)
Position reference systems (standard deviation, signal noise, differential limits etc.)

Reflectors
From this tab it is possible to set up laser reflectors used by the vessel. For each reflector,
the following parameters can be set:
Which laser it is being used by
Fixed or mobile (i.e. if it is placed on a vessel or not)
Position (north, east, height)
Active or inactive.
Page 6-22 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Trends
From this tab it is possible to monitor graphs for:
Simulated environment conditions (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target object values (speed and direction).

2.11 Optional Functions


2.11.1

Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints.
During a waypoint tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed in
several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course.
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation, see
section 2.8 Joystick Operations for details).
Waypoint tracking is enabled from the Control panel:
1.

Select the Control panel, sub-view Waypoint.

2.

Press the Run button, followed by Apply.

Managing Waypoints
The waypoint list is managed from the Change panel, sub-view Waypoint. From
here, the operator can add/delete waypoints or change the settings of a specific
waypoint. Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
The waypoint position, relative and absolute.
A radius about the waypoint, defining when to change to the next waypoint.
Vessel speed and heading on the leg towards the waypoint.
To change the definitions of a waypoint:
1.

Select the Change panel, sub-view Waypoint.

2.

Select a waypoint in the waypoint list (scroll up/down in the list by means of the
scroll bar to the right).

3.

Press the WP Details button to open the waypoint details window.

4.

Select a parameter to change and press the Menu.

5.

Enter the new value, followed by Apply.

Waypoint Tracking Settings


In the Settings panel, Waypoint sub-view, the following additional settings are
available for the waypoint tracking operation:
Heading setpoint option (operator set/track course/from waypoint list).
Maximum heading setpoint offset (side-slip angle, offset to tangential heading
setpoint).

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-23 of 62

Operating Instructions
Cross-track deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
To change a waypoint tracking setting:

2.11.2

1.

Select the Settings panel, sub-view Waypoint.

2.

Select a row where a value shall be changed.

3.

Press the calculator button.

4.

Enter the new value followed by Apply.

Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the DP vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
During target tracking operations, the heading control can be governed by:
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
1.

Select the Change panel, sub-view Target Tracking.

2.

Select the row where the value shall be changed.

3.

Press the Menu button.

4. Enter the new value followed by Enter.


The following additional settings are available in Target Tracking:
Target identification (which target to track)
Reaction radius

2.11.3

Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. The joystick lever can be used in combination with the
constant bias force to adjust the total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can
then be neutralized by moving the joystick in negative surge position.
In the 'Settings' panel, 'Towing' sub-view, the settings available for towing operations
are:
A bias force can be entered either numerically (reached from the 'Menu' button), or
incrementally up and down from the GUI.

Note:

It is only possible to set a bias surge force when the surge control mode
is set to 'Joystick', see section 2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control. The
bias force will automatically be set to zero by the system if the 'Joystick'
mode is exited.

Page 6-24 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3 GUI
From the graphical user interface, most of the settings and operating procedures for the
Icon system can be initiated.

3.1

Main View
5

6
7

6
3

10
11

12

1
Figure 8

GUI Main View, Split-Screen View

Pos.

Description

Wind direction and resulting force

Current position

Stack of Panels

Current speed

Order indicator

Heading indicator

Position indicator

Class monitoring visualisation

Power visualisation

10

Toolbar

11

Alarm message area

12

Statusbar

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-25 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.2

Indicators

3.2.1

Heading Indicator
The heading indicator presents:
Actual vessel heading and heading setpoint (numerically and visualised)
Heading deviation and heading deviation alarm limit
Setting symbols
Figure 9 shows the heading indicator area.

Figure 9

Heading Indicator

Pos

Indication

Actual vessel heading (symbol)

Vessel is turning towards a new heading setpoint

Heading setpoint (degrees)

Heading control gain indication (symbol) (low/medium/high)

Heading deviation

Page 6-26 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
Pos

Indication

Actual vessel heading (degrees)

Heading deviation alarm limit

Heading setpoint (symbol)

The colours of the heading indicator (see figure 9) symbolizes the heading deviation as
follows:
Grey

New heading setpoint. Vessel is


turning automatically towards a
new heading setpoint.

Green

Vessel heading is within alarm


and warning limits.

Yellow

Vessel heading is within alarm


limit, but is exceeding warning
limit.

Red

Vessel is out of heading.

By selecting the Setting panel from the Stack of panels, a sub-menu will open where the
operator can change settings and options for the heading operation.

3.2.2

Order Indicator
The order indicator presents:
Visualisation of thruster force order and feedback (magnitude and direction relative to
midship)
Visualisation of thruster moment order and feedback (magnitude relative to midship)
Settings symbols.
Figure 10 shows the order indicator.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-27 of 62

Operating Instructions

6
5

1
Figure 10 Order Indicator
Pos

Indication

Joystick lever order (in %)

Force order (outlined) and feedback (solid) visualisation

Surge force in ton/kN (user defined)

Sway force in ton/kN (user defined)

Joystick lever sensitivity indication (low, medium, high)

Moment order (outlined) and feedback (solid) visualisation

Page 6-28 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.2.3

Position Indicator
The position indicator shows the vessel position in relation to position setpoints,
estimated time of arrival to setpoint, and some setting status regarding positioning.

6
6
1
7
Figure 11 Position Indicator(during change position)
Pos

Indication

Direction of vessels bow

Pivot centre, position relative to setpoint.

Deviation distance between actual position and position setpoint.

CTE, Cross Track Error, closest distance to the calculated bearing to


the new position setpoint.

Position deviation alarm limit

Position gain indicator (low, medium, high)

ETA, Estimated Time of Arrival, time left until new position setpoint is
reached. (Visible only in automatic change position operations.)

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-29 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.2.4

Class Monitor Indicator


The class monitor shows how the system complies with selected DP class. Status symbol
are shown for:
Thrusters
Power
Capability (A result of the online consequence monitoring function.)
Position reference systems
Sensors
System.

Note:

If any sub-system does not comply with the class, DP operations for the
selected class may not be carried out. Demands on different class types
vary, depending on the classification society.

Figure 12 Class Monitor (example)

3.2.5

Selected DP class.

List of sub-system compliance with the selected class. See section 4.1
Basic Status Symbols for symbol descriptions.

Power
This indicator shows the used thrust power, divided on starboard and port power buses.
For further information on power distribution, see section 3.5.5 DP System.

Page 6-30 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Figure 13 Power Indicator

3.2.6

Power output (numerical value)

Power output visualisation

Speed Indicator
This indicator shows the vessel speed in all horizontal axes. The speed is also visualised
by the size of the symbol.

2
3

Figure 14 Speed Indicator


1

Surge speed forward (positive values, green colour) and


aft (negative values, orange colour).

Sway speed towards starboard (positive values, green colour) and


towards port (negative values, orange colour).

Rotational speed CW (positive values, green colour) and


CCW (negative values, orange colour).

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-31 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.2.7

Vessel Position Indicator


This indicator shows the midship position of the vessel in latitudes and longitudes.

1
2

Figure 15 Current Pos

3.2.8

Vessel latitude position

Vessel longitude position

Wind/Resulting Force Indicator


This indicator shows the wind speed and direction and the resulting force and its
direction needed to compensate the wind and current forces that affects the vessels
position.

Figure 16 Wind/Resulting Force Indicator


1

Wind speed and visualisation of direction.

Wind direction.

Resulting force direction (in degrees).

Resulting force and visualisation of direction.

Page 6-32 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.3

Statusbar
The statusbar displays some vital information about current settings and status of the
Icon system. It also contains a couple of buttons.

FIX

1 2

7 8

10

LOW

11 12 13 14 15

Figure 17 The GUI Statusbar (example)

3.3.1

Pos.

Description

System Active/Inactive status

In command/Give command status

Axes control visualisation surge, sway and yaw.

Position reference systems and sensor status visualisation.

Rotation point indication.

Wind compensation visualisation surge, sway and yaw.

Current camera view

Current operational function active

Vessel draft (draught).

10

Manual weighting of sensors and positioning reference systems enabled,


otherwise blank.

11

Power limitation is off, otherwise blank.

12

Fixed thruster direction on azimuthing thrusters enabled, otherwise blank.

13

Low rpm setting, otherwise blank.

14

Number of active alarms.

15

Alarm indicator short-cut to access the alarm page.

System Status
The statusbar displays the Icon system status (1). The following table shows the possible
system states.
Symbol

Meaning
System active

System inactive

3.3.2

In Command/Give Command
The Icon system provides means for transfer of command control between the different
operator stations. Only one operator station can be in command at a given time.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-33 of 62

Operating Instructions
Indicator (2) shows the operator station status.
Symbol

Meaning
Operator station In command

Operator station not in command/give command

3.3.3

Axes Control
Indicator (3) shows the way the axes of horizontal movement of the vessel are
controlled, see 2.9 Positioning Functions for details about how to change the settings.
The following table shows control symbols. In general, manual control applies when the
arrows point outwards, automatic control when the arrows point inwards and no control
when arrowheads are missing.
Symbol

Note:

3.3.4

Meaning (control mode)


Surge

Sway

Yaw

Joystick

Joystick

Joystick

Joystick

Joystick

Auto

Auto

Joystick

Auto

Joystick

Auto

Auto

Auto

Auto

Auto

No ctrl

No ctrl

Auto

The table shows just one of the possible control mode combinations
including No cntrl, but No cntrl can occur in various combinations with
Joystick and Auto.

Position Reference System


Indicators (4) shows the status of the sensors in the position reference system, they are

Page 6-34 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
displayed as groups:
GPS, one symbol for each sensor.
Rel, relative position reference system status, i.e. radar and laser based.
Gyro compass status, one symbol for each gyro.
For more details about the sensors status symbols see 4.1 Basic Status Symbols.

3.3.5

Wind Compensation
Indicator (6) shows for which axes wind compensation is activated, see 3.3.5 Wind
Compensation for more details.
Symbol

Meaning (Wind compensation)


blocked/off

in all axes

in Yaw and Surge axes

in Yaw and Sway axes

in Surge and Sway axes

in Yaw axis only

3.3.6

Current Camera View


Indicator (7) shows the settings of how the vessel orientation in the grid net is visualised
in the main view. See 3.5.3 Camera Control for details about changing the settings.
Below are different examples of camera settings.
Symbol

Setting
Hdg:Vessel
Pos:Vessel

Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to the vessel's heading. The bow or stern is
up, depending on the physical operator station orientation on
the bridge.

Hdg: North
Pos: Vessel

Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to earth (North up).

Hdg: Vessel
Pos: Setpoint

Centre of view is fixed to the position setpoint and the


orientation is fixed to the vessel's heading. The bow or stern is
up, depending on the physical operator station orientation on
the bridge.

Hdg: North
Pos: Setpoint

Centre of view is fixed to the position setpoint and the


orientation is fixed to earth (North up).

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-35 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.4

Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are, together with the joystick device and the positioning device, the
main tools for the operation of the Icon system. They are displayed, two at the time, on
the remote control display and on the main DP operator station display when set to splitscreen view.
All panels are built-up in the same way, with access to different sub-views. The subviews are tailored to the operational mode by enabling buttons for the most common/
important operations for the specific mode.

3.4.1

Working with Panels


The procedure for changing an operational function is logically the same in all panels.
The interface is intuitive, straight-forward, and easy to understand.
Two examples of panels (Sensor and Settings) are shown in Figure 18.

5
4

Figure 18 Sensor and Settings Panel, Overview Presentation


Pos.

Description

Weight button, applicable for the Sensor and PosRef panels. Adjusts manual weight
for selected row incrementally.

List of available selections, different for each sub-view. Double-tap on a row or


command to change the parameter for that row. By tapping once and sliding finger
over a number of rows, it is possible to select multiple rows.

Name list.

Drop-down menu, for the selection of another sub-view.

Drop-down menu, for the selection of another panel.

Scrollbar

Button, in most cases a short-cut to a sub-menu. If the current setting requires a


numerical input, this button will open a calculator instead. Effects selected row(s)

By double tapping on a row in the list, the operator gets access to a sub-menu (specific
for each panels) where a specific value or setting can be changed. Multiple row
selections for changes can be done by a tap-and-slide with the finger over the desired
rows.

Page 6-36 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.4.2

The Change Panel


The Change panel is used for changing of position/heading and tracking operations.

3
2

6
4

Figure 19 Change Panel (example)


Pos

Function

Position setpoint values

Heading setpoint value

List for change between standard and optional operational functions (e.g.target
tracking)

Button for editing setpoint(s) for selected value(s)

Sub-view

Parameter

Description

Standard

Hdg

New heading setpoint.

North/East

New position (North/East).

Target
Tracking

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Fwd/Stbd

New position (Forward/Starboard).

Dist/Crse

New position (Distance/Course).

Lat/Long

New position (Latitude/Longitude).

Nrts/Ests

New position (Norths/Easts).

Hdg

New heading setpoint.

North/East

New position (North/East)

Fwd/Stbd

New position (Forward/Starboard).

Dist/Crse

New position (Distance/Course).

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-37 of 62

Operating Instructions
Sub-view

Waypoint

3.4.3

Parameter

Description

Range

Range to tracked object

Bearing

Bearing to tracked object

Add/Delete/Change

Any waypoint

The PosRef Panel


The PosRef panel is used for monitoring, enabling/disabling, blocking/unblocking,
aligning and zeroing of sensors and positioning reference systems. The list shows Status,
Sensor (name), Weight and Manual weight for each sensor. The graphic output in the
panel are the signals from the sensors, the scales on the axes in the graph can be changed
by double-tapping on the graph.

1
Figure 20 PosRef Panel (example)
Pos

Function

Button for manual weighting of selected position reference system.

Graph displaying the trended measurements of the different position reference


systems.

List of installed and connected position reference systems.

Button with submenu for handling of selected position reference system.

Page 6-38 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Sensors

Parameter

Description

All Position
Reference
Systems

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables the selected position


reference system.

Block/Unblock

Block/Unblock the signal from the selected


position reference system.

Align

Aligns the signal values to the weighted


signal of all position reference systems, see
section 4.2 Align Status Symbols.

Weight

Adjusts manual weight for selected row


incrementally

Zero

Resets the signal of the selected signal to its


default state.

Absolute
Position (e.g.
DGPS)

Fixed
Relative
Position (e.g.
Cyscan/Radar)
Mobile

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Sets the selected position reference system


to be fixed, i.e. its absolute position does not
differ.
Sets the selected position reference system
to be mobile, i.e. placed on a vessel.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-39 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.4.4

The Sensor Panel


The Sensor panel is used for monitoring, enabling/disabling and blocking/unblocking
of sensors. The list shows Status, Sensor (name), Weight and Manual weight for each
sensor.

Figure 21 Sensor Panel (example)


Pos

Function

Button for manual weighting of selected sensor.

Button for enabling/disabling or blocking/unblocking of selected sensor

The following parameters are possible to adjust for each sensor.


Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables the selected position


reference system.

Block/Unblock

Block/Unblock the signal from the selected


position reference system.

Weight

Adjusts manual weight for selected row


incrementally

Page 6-40 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.4.5

The Thrust Panel


The Thrust panel is used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
There are two types of visualisation, list and graphical view.

2
1

6
Figure 22 Trust Panel (example List View)
Pos

Indication

Thrust device

Toggle between List and graphical view

Toggle between Overview/Pitch/Rpm/View

Thrust feedback visualisation (green bar)

Direction order (degrees)

Button for enabling/disabling selected thrust device

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-41 of 62

Operating Instructions

5
4

1
2

Figure 23 Thrust Panel (example)


Pos

Function

Thrust feedback (calculated) (in ton or kN)

Thrust force order visualisation (blue line)

Thrust feedback visualisation (green bar)

Direction order (blue triangle) visualisation

Toggle between List and graphical view

By selecting List view on the screen, a sub-menu will open where the operator can
change settings and options for each thrust device..
Sub-view

Parameter

Description

Overview

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables selected thruster device.


Shows the numerical thrust power and
direction, and also a visualisation of it.

Pitch

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables selected thruster device.


Shows percentage values for pitch order and
feedback.

Rpm

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables selected thruster device.


Shows percentage values of thruster rpm
(both order and feedback).

Dir

Enable/Disable

Enables/disables selected thruster device.


Shows numerical values of the thruster power
direction (both order and feedback).

List

Page 6-42 of 62

Any thrust device.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
Sub-view

Parameter

View

3.4.6

Description
A graphical visualisation of all thrust devices
showing Order, Direction and Feedback for
each device.

The Control Panel


The Control panel is used for changing of operational functions and modes. The list
shows control mode for horizontal axis, and also if wind compensation is enabled.

1
5

Figure 24 Control Panel (example)


Pos

Function

Button for wind compensation function.

Button for preset control modes.

List of control modes for the three horizontal axes.

Menu button for display of options for selected list item.

Pause button.

The following table shows the parameter descriptions for the Control panel.
Axis

Parameter

Description

Surge

No cntrl/Joystick/Auto

Control in surge axis.

Sway

No cntrl/Joystick/Auto

Control in sway axis.

Yaw

No cntrl/Joystick/Auto

Control in yaw axis.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-43 of 62

Operating Instructions
Axis

Parameter

Description

Preset mode

Normal/HDG/HDG & Sway

Predefined control combinations.


Normal: Means that control (Joystick or
Auto) is enabled for all three axes.
HDG: Means that control (Joystick or Auto)
is enabled only for the yaw axis.
HDG & Sway: Means that control (Joystick
or Auto) is enabled for the yaw and sway
axes.

Wind comp

Windcomp On/Windcomp Off Enables/Disables wind compensation for the


selected axis.

Pause

Pause Off/Pause On

Page 6-44 of 62

Pause wind compensation

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.4.7

The Settings Panel


The Settings panel is used for changing of different system (operational) settings. The
list shows Symbol, Name, Value and Unit when applicable.
The example below shows the settings panel with the drop-down sub-menu open.

1
2

Figure 25 Settings Panel (example)


Pos

Function

Drop-down sub menu

Function/Setting names and values

Menu button with the options/values for the selected function/setting

The following table shows parameter descriptions for each sub-view.


Sub-view

Parameter

Description

Position

Pos gain

Position control gain.

Wind comp

Enable wind compensation.

Surge Acc Factor

Surge Acceleration Factor.

Sway Acc Factor

Sway Acceleration Factor.

Heading

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Surge spd

Maximum surge speed of the vessel.

Sway spd

Maximum sway speed of the vessel.

Warn limit

Position deviation warning limit.

Alarm limit

Position deviation alarm limit.

Hdg gain

Heading control gain.

Wind comp

Enable wind compensation.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-45 of 62

Operating Instructions
Sub-view

Allocation

Target
(optional)

Waypoint
(optional)

System

Display

Units &
Formats

Pivot

Page 6-46 of 62

Parameter

Description

Acc Factor

Acceleration factor.

Max rot spd

Maximum rotational speed of the vessel.

Warn limit

Heading deviation warning limit.

Alarm limit

Heading deviation alarm limit.

Joystick (High/Medium/Low)

Joystick sensitivity.

Rudder usage (when applicable)

High/Medium/Low

Max Rudder (when applicable)

Maximum rudder angle.

Thrust bias (when applicable)

High/Medium/Low

Bow Az angle (when applicable)

Auto /

Aft Az angle (when applicable)

Auto /

Max vessel spd

Maximum vessel speed.

Hdg SP opt

Heading setpoint option.

Hdg SP offset

Heading setpoint offset.

Reaction radius

Reaction radius.

Meas timeout lim

Measurement timeout limit.

Max vessel spd

Maximum vessel speed.

Wp Radius

Minimum turning radius

Hdg SP opt

Heading setpoint option.

Hdg SP offset

Heading setpoint offset.

XTE warning lim

Cross-track deviation warning limit.

XTE alarm lim

Cross-track deviation alarm limit.

Manual Draft

Vessel draught.

Power Lim

Power limitation

DP Class

DP system class.

Theme

Display theme options.

Show trackplot

If the vessel track shall be plotted in the


grid

Trackplot freq

Plot density

Trackplot duration

How long the plotting function is enabled

Show flag - posrefs

View flags in the grid

Show flag - TP/REF

View flags in the grid

Autozoom, new SP

Autozoom when panning for a new pos.


setpoint

Default speed unit

Knots (kt) or meters per second (m/s)

Default force unit

ton or kilo newton (kN)

Default lat/long format

DDDMMSS,S or DDDMM,MMM
D=Degree, M=Minute, S=Seconds

Free select/Fore/Midship/Aft

Rotation centre point

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
Sub-view

Parameter

Description

Fwd/aft Rotpoint [m]

Range to rotation point

Stbd/Port Rotpoint [m]

Range to rotation point

Change Display Theme


By default, the display theme settings are set to day, which means that light colors will
be used in the GUI. But when operating in darkness, this setting can be too bright. To
change display theme, proceed as follows:
1.

Select the Settings panel.

2.

Select the sub-menu Display and then double-tap on the Theme row.
A pop-up dialogue appears.

3.

Select Day or Night depending on the time of day.


A change in display theme applies to all operator stations of the system.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-47 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.4.8

The Operation Panel


The Operation panel is used for changing settings for operational functions. There can
be several views of operation panels:
Sub-view

Parameter

Description

Target

Windcomp On/Off

Enable wind compensation

Target Start/Exit

Start/Exit target operation

Pause off/on

Pause target operation

Waypoint

Towing

Page 6-48 of 62

Radius

Radius to target

Range

Range to target

Target

External target

Windcomp On/Off

Enable wind compensation

Track Start/Exit

Start/Exit track operation

Pause off/on

Pause target operation

Windcomp On/Off

Enable wind compensation

Alongforce On/Off

Towing operation On/Off

Pause off/on

Pause towing operation

Alongforce

Bias force

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Target Tracking Operation

6
1

Figure 26 Operation Panel, Target tracking view (example)


Pos

Function

List of available targets

Range to target.

Target range radius tolerance.

Wind compensation for selected operational function.

Operational function

Start/Stop target operation

Pause target operation

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-49 of 62

Operating Instructions

Waypoint Tracking Operation

3
2
4

Figure 27 Operation Panel, Waypoint tracking view (example)


Pos

Function

Wind compensation for selected operational function.

Operational function

Start/Stop waypoint operation

Pause waypoint operation

Page 6-50 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

Towing Operation

Figure 28 Operation Panel, Towing view (example)


Pos

Function

Alongforce, adjustable constant bias force.

Wind compensation for selected operational function.

Operational function

Start/Stop towing operation

Pause towing operation

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-51 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.4.9

The Performace Panel (Remote Control Display)


The Performance panel shows information related to heading control, speed and rateof-turn, thruster force and moment order.

3
Figure 29 Performance Panel (example)
Pos.

Description

Heading indicator

Speed indicator

Order indicator

Page 6-52 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.5

Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for the operator to alter the look of the GUI, choose which
sub-menus to be shown and change the operational settings of the system.
From the toolbar it is possible to reach all Icon functions and settings. The toolbar also
consists of buttons for short-cuts to frequently used functions of the Icon system.

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 30 Toolbar (example)
Pos

Function

System active / inactive status

In command / Give command status

Toggles between splitscreen and fullscreen

Camera zoom out

Camera zoom in

Opens the Cam cntrl page, from where it is possible to control the
camera view of the vessel relative to the surroundings. It is possible to
pan, rotate and zoom the vessel in the grid. It is also possible to tilt the
grid to achieve a 3D visualisation effect.

Opens the Alarms tab of the Monitoring page

Opens the DP System page

Opens the Monitoring page

10

Opens the Operation page

11

Prints a screenshot of the current display screen

12

Current system time

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-53 of 62

Operating Instructions

3.5.1

Views
The Split button, toggles between the following views:
Splitscreen view all main areas of the GUI is displayed on the same screen.
Fullscreen view the panels are not displayed in the main view. (But on a remote
display.)

3.5.2

Zoom
With the zoom (4,5) buttons, the operator can zoom the visualisation in the main area of
the screen in or out respectively.

3.5.3

Camera Control
By means of the Cam cntrl (6) setting, the operator have full control on how the vessel
position in the grid net is visualised in the main area of the display.
There are two main ways to manage the camera control, Auto and Manual control.
Auto: Hdg the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a north
view.
Auto: Pos the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a setpoint
view.
Auto: Top, Tilt1, 2, 3,4 the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in predefined
3D-views.
Manual: the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in a 3D-view, it is also
possible to pan the vessel on the grid, as well as to rotate it. See Figure 31 Camera
Control.

om
Zo

Pan

Tilt

Rotate

Figure 31 Camera Control

3.5.4

Alarms
In the alarms page (7), all active alarms are listed chronologically with the latest alarm
on top. The operator has the ability to acknowledge one alarm at the time, or all alarms
on the page simultaneously. There is also a separate Alarm history page, containing all
(old) alarms, see 4.4 Alarm Status Symbols and 4.5 Alarm Handling.

Page 6-54 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

3.5.5

DP System
The DP System pages presents an overview of the status of:
The Icon system itself
Sensors The operator has the ability to enable/disable any sensor. (This can also be
done from the Sensor panel.)
Position reference systems The operator has the ability to enable/disable any position
reference system. (This can also be done from the PosRef panel.)
Thruster devices The operator has the ability to enable/disable any thruster device.
(This can also be done from the Thrust panel.)
Power system The operator can view the available and consumed power as well as
the bus tie.
By tapping the DPSystem (8) button in the toolbar on the screen, the DP System
display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the system status
View the machine power distribution status
View measurements values for sensors, position reference systems and thrusters
Enable/Disable sensors, position reference systems and thrusters.

4
5
6

Figure 32 DP System Page (example, DP2 system)


Pos

Part of system

DP system B

DP system C

DP system A

Icon operator stations

Controllers

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-55 of 62

Operating Instructions
Pos

Part of system

Sensors and positioning reference systems

Thrust devices

For more information about DP system configuration, see chapter 3 System Description.

3.5.6

Monitoring
The monitoring pages presents an overview of all monitored items with respect to the
chosen DP class.
By tapping the Monitoring (9) button in the toolbar on the screen, the system
monitoring display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the alarm list and the event log
Acknowledge alarms
View trends for sensors, position reference systems, thrust devices and available/
consumed power
Download system log files to a USB memory for further analysis, see chapter
8 Trouble Shooting.

Figure 33 Monitoring Display, Trends page

3.5.7

Operation
The operation pages present detailed information about the current settings of the Icon
system.
By tapping the Operation (10)
button in the toolbar on the screen, the Operation display appears. From this page, the
operator can perform the exact same operation as from the Control, Change and

Page 6-56 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions
Settings panels.
In addition to this, the operator can also use the built-in trainer, which comprises a vessel
simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated operational
conditions.

Figure 34 Operation Page

3.5.8

Print
The Icon system is equipped with two printers:
One impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand, for printing of alarms. This printer
continuously prints all alarms as they get active, are being acknowledged and reset.
One high-resolution hardcopy color printer, for printing of trendings and screen-shots
of the GUI. The operator can configure the look of the GUI and then press the
Print (11) button.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-57 of 62

Operating Instructions

4 Status Symbols and Alarm Handling


4.1 Basic Status Symbols
The following common status symbols (for thrust devices, sensors, position reference
systems, etc.) are used by the Icon system.
Symbol

!
?

Colour

Meaning

White

Not available by system.

Grey

Available, but disabled by operator.

Green

Available and enabled.

Yellow

Warning

Red

Error

Red

No data connection lost.

Grey

Blocked

4.2 Align Status Symbols


The following symbols are used by the Icon system when aligning any position
reference system.
Symbol

Page 6-58 of 62

Colour

Meaning

Red

Not valid data

Yellow

Not aligned.

Yellow

Aligning.

Yellow

Aligning to estimate.

Green

Zero reference

Green

Aligned.

Red

Cannot align.

Yellow

Aligned to estimate.

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

4.3

Additional Status Symbols


Symbol

Color

Meaning

Grey

No posrefs and sensors are manual


weighted

Yellow

One or more posrefs or sensors is


manual weighted

Yellow

Towing is enabled

Yellow

Thrusters are in fixed angles mode

Yellow

Low RPM is enabled

Yellow

Power limitation is off

White

Trainer is on

FIX

LOW

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-59 of 62

Operating Instructions

4.4

Alarm Status Symbols


Any failures detected on operator stations, or loss of communication between the control
cabinets and the operator stations, will result in an alarm. In addition, a special status
menu will appear on the display informing the operator on the type of failure (loss of
communication or internal operator station failure).

Note:

If a failure occurs in the operator station that is in command, the system


will automatically set the command transfer to Give Command (cf.
section 2.7 Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations).
If there is no other operator station ready to take command, the Icon
system will automatically terminate its operation (standby) and command
of the thrust devices are released to manual lever command.

The following alarm status symbols are used by the Icon system.
Symbol

Colour

Meaning

Red

Unacknowledged alarm (UA) is in alarm state but has not


been acknowledged by the operator.

Red

Acknowledged alarm (AA) is in alarm state and has been


acknowledged by the operator.

Blue

Cleared alarm (CA) an alarm was present but is no longer in


alarm state, was not acknowledged by the operator.

Yellow

Unacknowledged warning is in warning state but has not


been acknowledged by the operator.

Yellow

Acknowledged warning is in warning state and has been


acknowledged by the operator.

Blue

Cleared warning a warning was present but is no longer in


warning state, was not acknowledged by the operator.

Alarms:

Warnings:

Page 6-60 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Operating Instructions

4.5

Alarm Handling
When an alarm appears, the alarm indicator is flashing and an alarm text is clearly
displayed on the screen.
The alarms page is accessed from the statusbar in the main display area:

Note:

Note:

1.

Tap the Alarm button or the Menu button in the statusbar to open the alarms
page. If using the Menu button, the Alarm button in the appearing Monitoring
window may be needed to tap.

2.

Select an alarm in the alarms list and press the Ack button to acknowledge the
alarm (or the Ack all button to acknowledge all alarms on the page
simultaneously).

Alarms can only be acknowledged from the operator station in command.

3.

Refer to chapter 8 Trouble Shooting for a detailed description of the alarm text.

4.

If possible, refer to chapter 7 Maintenance Instructions and fix the problem.

It is also possible to view an alarm and warning history, by selecting the


Alarm history tab in the Monitoring window.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 6-61 of 62

Operating Instructions

Page 6-62 of 62

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU


Revision: B

Maintenance Instructions
1

Safety and Precautions ............................................................................7-3

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) .................................................................7-3

3
Routine Maintenance ...............................................................................7-4
3.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................7-4
3.1.1 Lamp Test .......................................................................................7-4
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Periodic Maintenance ...............................................................................7-4


General .......................................................................................................7-4
Cabinets .....................................................................................................7-4
Operator Stations .......................................................................................7-4
Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems .................................................7-5

Troubleshooting .......................................................................................7-5

6
6.1
6.2
6.3

Corrective Maintenance ...........................................................................7-5


General .......................................................................................................7-5
Operator Devices ........................................................................................7-5
10,4 Display ...............................................................................................7-6
6.3.1 Fan Filter .........................................................................................7-6
19 Display ..................................................................................................7-7
DC Power Supply .......................................................................................7-8
Fuses ..........................................................................................................7-8
Printer .........................................................................................................7-9
UPS ............................................................................................................7-9
Switch .........................................................................................................7-9
Marine Controller ........................................................................................7-9
Operator Station Computer ......................................................................7-10
CAN I/O Module .......................................................................................7-11
Signal Isolation Amplifier ..........................................................................7-12
Sensors ....................................................................................................7-12

6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Maintenance Instructions

1 Safety and Precautions


Warning: Risk of personal injury.
Changes or modifications to the system not expressly approved by the
Rolls-Royce department responsible for compliance, could void the
warranty or the user's ability to operate the equipment.

The following warnings and cautions are for your safety, for the prevention of injury
from electric shock and for a safe operation of the equipment. Also see chapter 2 Safety.
While performing maintenance tasks, always position the equipment (and yourself) on
a stable and safe surface.
Ensure that all accessible cables cannot be walked on, tripped over or damaged by
transportable items.
If a device is damaged or fails to function correctly, disconnect it from the power
source. Refer to the system drawings to locate the nearest fuse/circuit breaker, see
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Do not attempt to repair any sub-component yourself consult a qualified Rolls-Royce
service technician.
A serious electrical shock hazard exists within the covers of some components (i.e.
displays) and on marked locations inside the cabinets (marked with 220 VAC or
24 VDC).

2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)


Caution: It is very important that you are connected to ground before touching any
electronic components or printed circuit boards.

The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching a grounded point
before the printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally
important to discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 7-3 of 12

Maintenance Instructions

3 Routine Maintenance
3.1
3.1.1

Note:

Operator Stations
Lamp Test

The lamp test function is not available when the operator station is in
command.

1.

Press the Lamp control


2 seconds.

push-button on the joystick device for approximately

All indicators on the joystick device should lit and the alarm buzzer should sound
for 10 seconds.

4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1

General
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.
Check for any loose terminals due to vibration, fasten as necessary.

4.2

Cabinets
Ensure that the cabinet is properly fastened.
Keep the exterior of the cabinet clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft anti static
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
Keep the interior of the cabinet clean.
If needed, carefully clean the inside the cabinet using a soft anti static cloth and a nonabrasive cleaning agent.
When necessary, carefully vacuum-clean the inside of the cabinet avoiding to touch
any components.
Cabinets can be equipped with a fan. When necesary, carefully vacum-clean the fan
filter.
Ensure that the cabinet doors are closed.

4.3

Operator Stations
Ensure that the operator station is properly fastened.
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.

Page 7-4 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Maintenance Instructions
Keep the exterior of the operator station clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.

4.4

Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems


Please refer to the corresponding subsuppliers manual for details, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals.

5 Troubleshooting
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed error tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm list and
description. For details, see chapter 8 Trouble Shooting.

6 Corrective Maintenance
6.1

General
The main tasks of corrective maintenance to be covered in this manual, are replacing
parts/units inside cabinets or on operator stations and, if applicable, tuning and set-up of
a new unit.

6.2

Operator Devices

4
Figure 1

Operator Device

To change an operator device, proceed as follows:


1.

Remove the rubber protection plugs (1) that cover the screw heads on the top side

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 7-5 of 12

Maintenance Instructions
of the operator device.

6.3

2.

Loosen the screws.

3.

Carefully pull the operator device straight up from the top of where it is mounted.

4.

Unplug the CAN and power connector (2) from the bottom of the operator device.

5.

Set the addresses on the node address switches (4) on the new operator device
identical to the device, being replaced.

6.

Verify that the terminal resistors (3) are identical on the device being replaced.

7.

Mount the new operator device in reverse order.

8.

Calibrate all operator devices on the operator station where the operator device has
been changed, see chapter 6 Operating Instructions for details.

10,4 Display
4
1

2
Figure 2

10,4 Display

To change display, proceed as follows:


1.

Disconnect the power supply to the display, by removing the fuse for the operator
station.

2.

Remove the CompactFlash memory from the display. It is hidden behind a


cover (1) on the left side of the display.

3.

Unplug the following:


Ethernet cable(s) (2)
24 VDC power supply connector (3)

6.3.1

4.

Loosen the 4 screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.

5.

Insert the CompactFlash memory in the new display.

6.

Fit and connect the new display in reverse order.

Fan Filter
When necessary, clean display fan filter (4) with vacuum cleaner.

Page 7-6 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Maintenance Instructions
If necessary, change fan filter for 10,4 display by ripping the old filter off. It is fitted
with velcro. Fit a new fan filter in place.

6.4

19 Display

Back side

Bottom side

Figure 3

19 Display

To change display, proceed as follows:


1.

Disconnect the power supply to the display by removing the fuse on the operator
station.

2.

Disconnect the following:


24 VDC power supply (2)
serial cable (9-pins D-SUB) (1)
DVI (3) or VGA (4) cable

3.

Loosen the screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.

4.

Fit and connect the new display in reverse order.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 7-7 of 12

Maintenance Instructions

6.5

DC Power Supply

DC
OK

Output DC

Adjust
DC OK

powerb

ox

Figure 4

DC Power Supply

To change a DC Power Supply, proceed as follows:

6.6

1.

Release the fuse for the DC Power Supply, see chapter 12 Design Drawings for
details.

2.

Unplug the power connections to the unit. 220 VAC (bottom) 24 VDC (top).

3.

Remove the unit from the rail. It is locked with a clip at the bottom of the unit

4.

Fit a new unit in reverse order.

5.

Adjust the output voltage to 26 VDC for the primary unit and to 25 VDC for the
secondary unit (if installed).

Fuses
There are two general types of fuses, automatic and glass cartridge fuses.
Automatic fuses are reset by pulling the fuse switch to open (lower) position, and then
pulling it up to closed (upper) position again. A red LED is lit on the blown automatic
fuse.
Glass cartridge fuses are changed by means of a plier or the protective cover around
the fuse. A lit green LED indicates that the glass cartridge fuse is OK. An extinguished
LED indicates that the fuse is blown.
Study the appropriate design drawings to find the fuse to reset or change, see chapter
12 Design Drawings for details.
Replaceable fuses are according to the fuse list (see inside door on corresponding
cabinet).

Page 7-8 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Maintenance Instructions

6.7

Printer
To change toner, ink cartridges, toner tapes, or a complete printer, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals for instructions.

6.8

UPS
The fan filter on the UPS must be changed periodically. For instructions on when and
how to change UPS fan filters, see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.

6.9
Note:

Switch
The new switch must be readily configured.

To change the switch, proceed as follows:


1.

Disconnect the power by removing the corresponding fuse.

2.

Remove the power supply connector (top).

3.

Remove the Ethernet cables and optical fiber cables (if applicable).

4.

Remove the switch from the rail.

5.

Fit and connect a new switch in reverse order.

6.10 Marine Controller


6

4
Figure 5

Marine Controller

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 7-9 of 12

Maintenance Instructions
To replace the controller (Rolls-Royce Marine Controller), proceed as follows:
1.

Disconnect the power supply cable (1).

2.

Remove the CompactFlash memory (2).

3.

Disconnect the alarm connector (3).

4.

Disconnect the following connectors:


CAN (4)
Ethernet (5)
RS 422 (6)

5.

Loosen the 6 screws that hold the controller in place, and remove the controller.

6.

Insert the CompactFlash memory in the new controller unit.

7.

Fit and connect the new controller in reverse order.

6.11 Operator Station Computer

1
Front side

3
4

Back side

6
Figure 6

Operator Station Computer

To change the operator station, proceed as follows:


1.

Turn off the power on the computer (switch at the front).

2.

Disconnect the power supply to the computer by removing the fuse on the operator
station.

Page 7-10 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Maintenance Instructions
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for details.
3.

Remove the 24 VDC power supply connector (2).

4.

Remove connectors to:


display (VGA) (5) or DVI (6)
touch control (7)
mouse (1)
keyboard (3)
Ethernet (4).
Possible other serial port connected devices (7)

5.

Loosen the 4 screws that hold the computer in place and remove the unit.

6.

Fit and connect the new computer in reverse order.

6.12 CAN I/O Module


1

Front

1
2

Circuit Board

5
Figure 7

CAN I/O Module

The CAN I/O module is located in the Control Cabinet. To change the internal circuit
board, proceed as follows:
1.

Disconnect the power and CAN connector (2), which is located in the front.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 7-11 of 12

Maintenance Instructions
2.

Disconnect the I/O connector (3).

3.

Loosen the 3 screws (1) that hold the top cover of the CAN I/O module in place
and remove the top cover.

4.

Remove the circuit board from the CAN I/O module by pulling it staight out from
the housing.

5.

Set the address (4) and jumpers (5) on the new CAN I/O module circuit board
identical to the one being replaced.

6.

Fit and connect the CAN I/O module in reverse order.

6.13 Signal Isolation Amplifier


When replacing a galvanic insulated amplifier, the DIP-switch must be correctly set.
Compare with the DIP-switch on the replaced amplifier and adjust as necessary.
All other I/O-modules can be replaced as is and do not need further measures.

6.14 Sensors
Please refer to the corresponding subsuppliers manual for details, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals.

Page 7-12 of 12

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-07MU


Revision: C

Trouble Shooting
1

General ......................................................................................................8-3

System Log Download .............................................................................8-3

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9

Alarms .......................................................................................................8-5
General .......................................................................................................8-5
Cabinet Alarms ...........................................................................................8-5
Consequence Analysis Alarms ...................................................................8-6
Control System Alarms ...............................................................................8-6
Operator Station Alarms .............................................................................8-8
Power System Alarms ..............................................................................8-10
Sensor and Position Reference System Alarms .......................................8-11
Thruster System Alarms ...........................................................................8-15
UPS Alarms ..............................................................................................8-18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Trouble Shooting

1 General
The aim for the troubleshooting chapter is to be of assistance to the operator during fault
tracing of the Icon system. The main parts of the chapter are:
System Log Download - this section describes how the operator can, after fault tracing
using the the alarm list, download the system log to a USB memory, and send it for
further analysis to Rolls-Royce.
Alarms - this section contains a list with all typical alarms of the Icon system,
including alarm text, and possible cause, effect and proposed action for each alarm.

2 System Log Download


When regular trouble shooting (managing issued alarms and taking appropriate
measures, phone support etc.) does not fix the problem, it is possible transfer system
health log files to a USB memory. These files can then be sent to Rolls-Royce for further
analysis.
This section consists of an instruction on how to download the system health log files to
a USB memory.
1.

Insert the USB memory to the USB port of the operator station computer or the
remote control display.

2.

Tap the Monitoring button on the toolbar in the main view to open the
Monitoring page.

3.

To download a complete set of system health log files:


3.1. Select Util in the Monitoring page.

Figure 1

Monitoring Page (Health View)

3.2. Tap on the Health tab.


3.3. Tap on the Download log button.
Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU
Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-3 of 18

Trouble Shooting
The complete system health log consists of the following files:
One health log file for each main operator station. (This information is used
for the GUI software. Contains data for the last 24 hours or since the last
reboot.)
One status log file for each controller in the control cabinet(s). (Contains
data for the last 24 hours or since the last reboot.)
An alarm log file from the display where the log is being downloaded.
A playback log file for the last hour.

Note:

There is a maximum file size for the log files. If there has been a substantial
activity/many alarms, the history may be shortened.

4.

To download a playback log for a specific single hour during the last four weeks:
4.1. Select Util in the Monitoring page.
4.2. Tap on the HourLog tab.

Figure 2

Monitoring Page (HourLog View)

4.3. Select a specific hour from the list.


4.4. Tap on the Download button.

Page 8-4 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting

3 Alarms
3.1 General
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed fault tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm descriptions.
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for wiring diagrams for the Icon system and applicable
cabinets.

3.2 Cabinet Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for control cabinet related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following
complete and specific alarm text examples:
Cabinet: Failure in IO module A
IO controller B1: Lost connection
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

Cabinet: Failure in IO bus


<I/O bus name>

Cause:
A failure has occurred on the I/O bus.
Effect:
Connected equipment to the I/O bus will not be available to the system.
Action:
Check the I/O bus cables/wiring. Ensure that all connectors are in place
for each connected module. Verify that the CAN-bus termination (60
Ohm between the data signals).

Cabinet: Failure in IO module


<I/O module name>

Cause:
An failure or malfunction is detected on the I/O module.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the system may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check module, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.

Cabinet: HW failure in
<Equipment name>

Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power supply.

<I/O controller name>: Lost


connection

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-5 of 18

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

Cabinet: Lost connection to


<I/O module>

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

3.3 Consequence Analysis Alarms


No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

CQA: Insufficient capabillity for


worst failure

Cause:
There are not enough capability for the system to perform safely in
case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
The system performance may not be sufficient with respect to the
operational requirement. In case of a single worst case failure,
e.g. blackout on one side, the vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider to enable more power (thrust or effect) into
the system. Otherwise the system is operating outside the normal
limits and must be watched carefully.

CQA:Too few thrusters available


for worst failure

Cause:
There are not enough thrusters available for the system to perform
safely in case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
In case of a single worst case failure (e.g. blackout of one side) the
vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider enabling more thrusters. If not, the system is
operating outside the normal limits and must be watched carefully.

3.4 Control System Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for control system related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item or movement, see the
following complete and specific alarm text examples:
DP controller A Timed out
Insufficient thruster configuration in Yaw
No.

Alarm Text

Different readings from DP switch Cause:


The Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch status signals is different
on system A and B.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.

Page 8-6 of 18

Cause, Effect and Action

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

DP controller <Name> Timed out

Cause:
The controller (DPC) has stopped or lost its network
communication with the other controllers (DPC).
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable all controllers , Check network
connection.

10

DP controller <Name> Voted out

Cause:
The controller (DPC) is out of synchronisation with respect to the
other controllers.
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable synchronisation of all controllers.

11

Insufficient thruster configuration Cause:


in <Axis of horizontal movement> There are not enough thrusters available for the system to perform
the desired action.
Effect:
The desired action will be terminated.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
systems. Change parameters for the desired action. If possible,
enable more thrusters.

12

Large cross track error

Cause:
In waypoint tracking function, the vessel has a large deviation from
the desired track.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the cross track
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.

13

Lost target

Cause:
In target tracking function, measurement giving the relative
position of the target is lost (e.g. HPR, laser).
Effect:
Tracking of the target will no longer be possible, and the vessel will
calm down.
Action:
Dependant of operating or weather conditions. Establish contact
with the target (e.g. reflectors/transponders).

14

Out of heading

Cause:
Heading deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference
between actual heading and set point heading is larger than the
operator defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the heading
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits and adjust the operation parameters.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-7 of 18

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

15

Out of position

Cause:
Position deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference between
actual position and set point position is larger than the operator
defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the position
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.

16

System was disabled while active Cause:


The system has detected a OFF signal from the Manoeuvring
Mode Selector Switch during operation.
Effect:
If the readings are correct, all thrusters will be lost for DP and the
vessel will drift off. Thruster control will be transferred to the levers.
Action:
If the operation was not desired, check the I/O modules in the
Outstations (if Outstations are used).

17

System: Buzzer disabled

Cause:
The alarm buzzer is disabled by the operator.
Effect:
No audible alarm will be presented to the operator in case of a
system alarm.
Action:
Enable the Buzzer in the system settings menu.

18

Warning: Close to deviation limit

Cause:
The measurements indicates that the status is close to the
deviation limit.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

3.5 Operator Station Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for operator station related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following
complete and specific alarm text examples:
OS 2: HW failure in Main Power Supply
OS 1: Lost connection to Joystick Device
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

19

<Station name>: Alarm printer is


not connected

Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Verify power to printer. Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select") ,
Check cable to printer.

Page 8-8 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

20

<Station name>: Alarm printer is


not ready

Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select").

21

<Station name>: Alarm printer out Cause:


of paper
The printer reports out of paper.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Check printer status, refill paper if empty.

22

<Station name>: HW failure in


<Power supply name>

Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of the failure the unit may be disabled for operation
until the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and main power supply.

23

<Station name>: Lost connection

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

24

<Station name>: Lost connection


to <Device name>

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

25

<Station name>: <Device name>


order out of range

Cause:
The received order is outside the expected range.
Effect:
The device will not available for operation.
Action:
Check device, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.

26

Failure on all OS

Cause:
All of the Operator Stations reports one or several failures.
Effect:
Proper operator interaction with the system may be difficult.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and communication I/O.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-9 of 18

Trouble Shooting

3.6 Power System Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for power system related faults. The term inside the
angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following complete
and specific alarm text examples:
MainBus2Stbd: Power out of range
Generator3Stbd: Inconsistent measurements
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

27

<Equipment name>: Inconsistent


measurements

Cause:
The received measurements are not consistent with respect to the
vessels capabilities.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

28

<Equipment name>: Limitation


frozen due to signal errors

Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

29

<Equipment name>: Load out of


range

Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

30

<Equipment name>: Power out of Cause:


range
Unexpected high load measurement measured by the power
management system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on one of the remote
control systems or the power management system. Check the I/O
modules in the Outstations (if Outstations are used).

Page 8-10 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

31

Power limitation: frozen due to


signal errors

Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

32

Power signals error: consider


disabling power limitation

Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
Erronous signals will be estimated. The power limitation function
might be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

3.7 Sensor and Position Reference System Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for sensor and position reference system related
faults. The terms inside the angle brackets < > are replaced by the name of the actual
item or the signal type, see the following complete and specific alarm text examples:
Gyro 1: Wild point in Rotation measurement
Wind sensor 2: Wind speed measurement voting rejected
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

33

<Sensor name>: Disabled


automatically

Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates a malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.

34

<Sensor name>: High dynamics


in <Signal type> measurement

Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected range.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-11 of 18

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

35

<Sensor name>: High HDOP

Cause:
The horizontal dilution of precision is high, which indicates a poor
satellite configuration for the GNSS system.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.

36

<Sensor name>: High variation in Cause:


<Signal type> measurement
The measurements from the unit shows a higher standard
deviation than expected. It might be a unit malfunction.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.

37

<Sensor name>: Invalid data


received in NMEA telegram

Cause:
Failure detected in the received NMEA telegram. Indicates a
malfunction in connected equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Data will not be used
by the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.

38

<Sensor name>: Large <Signal


type> measurement differ

Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is critically
high.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit. Verify appplicable settings.

39

<Sensor name>: Large step in


<Signal type> measurement

Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a large step,
and then been stabilized. This indicates that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

40

<Sensor name>: Lost connection

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

Page 8-12 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

41

<Sensor name>: Measurement


<Signal type> differ

Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is higher than
expected.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Check unit.

42

<Sensor name>: Measurement


<Signal type> frozen

Cause:
The measurements indicates that the sensor has frozen (i.e.
measurements is frozen for a period of time). Readings from
sensor / position reference system have not changed for a period
of time.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Measurement from the
affected sensor / position reference system will be weighted down.
Action:
Check unit.

43

<Sensor name>: Measurement


<Signal type> out of range

Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment. Indicates a malfunction in the connected
equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Unit will be auto
disabled.
Action:
Check unit.

44

<Sensor name>: Measurement


<Signal type> voting pre-warning

Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is high.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The unit will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Check unit.

45

<Sensor name>: Measurement


<Signal type> voting rejected

Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is too high.
Effect:
Followed by Auto Disabled - and the unit is not available to the
system.
Action:
Check unit.

46

<Sensor name>: No Differential


signal available

Cause:
The GNSS system has no correction signals.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. DPGS system will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-13 of 18

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

47

<Sensor name>: No fix available

Cause:
The GNSS system does not have enough satellites to give position
measurement.
Effect:
No positon measurement will be available from the affected unit.
Action:
If problem persists, check unit, cabling, antenna.

48

<Sensor name>: Old Differential


signal

Cause:
The differential signal available to the GNSS system is old.
Effect:
The accuracy of affected unit might be degraded. Unit will
gradually be weighted down by system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.

49

<Sensor name>: Step in <Signal


type> measurement

Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a step, and
then been stabilized. This may indicate that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal. Unit will be weighted down by
the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

50

<Sensor name>: Very high


dynamics in <Signal type>
measurement

Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected values. This alarm is followed by "Auto
Disable".
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

51

<Sensor name>: Wild point in


<Signal type> measurement

Cause:
Some wild points in the measurements are detected.
Effect:
A quality error on the unit signal is detected. The wild points will
not be used.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

52

No <Signal type> measurement Dead reckoning

Cause:
There are no valid measurements and these signals are lost
during automatic control.
Effect:
The system will use the internal vessel model and thrust estimates
to predict the actual value.
Action:
If possible, enable more position reference systems to the system.

Page 8-14 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

53

No time signal available from any


GPS

Cause:
No time signal is available from and GNSS system.
Effect:
If problem persists, system time will drift away from correct time.
Action:
Check GNSS units.

3.8 Thruster System Alarms


The following alarms will be issued for thruster system related faults. The terms inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item or the signal type, see
the following complete and specific alarm text examples:
Port rudder: Broken wire or overflow in Direction order
PortAz: Pitch setpoint / feedback deviation
No.

Alarm Text

54

<Thruster device name>: Became Cause:


unavailable
An unexpected release of the Available signal from the remote
control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be available for control.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).

55

<Thruster device name>: Broken


wire or overflow in <Signal type>

Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.

56

<Thruster device name>:


Disabled automatically

Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates an malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.

57

<Thruster device name>: <Signal


type> feedback out of range

Cause:
The reported feedback value is out of range (i.e. the received
value is not possible according to the system setup).
Effect:
The measurement will not be used, the system will use the order
signals vessel model and estimates to predict the actual value.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O. If applicable, check if
there are any failures reported on the remote control system.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Cause, Effect and Action

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-15 of 18

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

58

<Thruster device name>: Got


ACK without request

Cause:
Status signal is received in a wrong sequence (i.e. an error is
detected in signal from remote control system).
Effect:
The remote control system is not be available for control.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).

59

<Thruster device name>:


Inconsistent breaker status

Cause:
The reported breaker status is inconsistent with respect to the
system setup.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check connections and possible open circuits.

60

<Thruster device name>: IO


module Failure

Cause:
The I/O Module reports a malfunction.
Effect:
The I/O Module status will not be available to the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.

61

<Generator>: Load out of range

Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.

62

<Thruster device name>: Lost


connection

Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

63

<Thruster device name>: Lost for


DP

Cause:
The thruster is no longer available for the system (Acknowledge
signal is lost).
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced and will not consider the
actual thruster.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
systems. Change parameters for the desired action.

Page 8-16 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Trouble Shooting
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

64

<Thruster device name>: Power


limitation

Cause:
The commanded thrust cannot be obtained due to insufficient
available power on the power bus that the thruster is connected to.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Start more generators or reduce other loads.

65

<Thruster device name>: <Signal


type> setpoint / feedback
deviation

Cause:
The feedback signal does not follow the commanded set point.
Effect:
The thruster will not give force as commanded. Performance might
be degraded.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used). Consider disabling thruster.

66

<Thruster device name>: System


internal logic error

Cause:
Logical signals from the remote thruster control have behaved in
an unexpected way.
Effect:
The thruster could be lost for DP. The system will continue as
normal.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on one of the remote
control systems or the power management system. Check the I/O
modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are used).

67

<Thruster device name>: Timed


out waiting for ACK

Cause:
The system has not received an expected activation of the
Acknowledge signal from the remote control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be available for control.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).

68

<Thruster device name>: Timed


out waiting for ACK to drop

Cause:
A release of the Acknowledge signal is missing from the remote
control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be controlled by DP System.
Status is set to Idle.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).

69

<Thruster device name>: Broken


Wire or overflow in <Signal type>

Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 8-17 of 18

Trouble Shooting

3.9 UPS Alarms


The following alarm will be issued for UPS related faults. The term inside the angle
brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual power supply.
No.

Alarm Text

Cause, Effect and Action

70

HW failure in <Power supply


name>

Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until
the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power
supply.

Page 8-18 of 18

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-08MU


Revision: B

Contact Information
1
Contact Information .................................................................................9-3
1.1 Rolls-Royce Marine, Control Aalesund ....................................................9-3
1.2 World-Wide Support Organisation ..............................................................9-3

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Contact List

1 Contact Information
1.1

Rolls-Royce Marine, Control Aalesund


For technical support or questions regarding the Rolls-Royce system, please contact:

1.2

E-mail:

dpsupport@rolls-royce.com

Postal address:

Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Control Aalesund
Service Box 22
N-6025 lesund
Norway

Visiting address:

Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Control Aalesund
Parkgata 3
3rd floor
lesund, Norway

Tel:

+47 81 52 00 70

Fax:

+47 70 10 37 01

After market service support:

+47 81 52 00 75

24 hrs service phone:

+47 90 01 09 97

World-Wide Support Organisation


NORTHERN EUROPE
DENMARK
Aalborg (Service)

Tel: +45 99 30 36 00

Fax: +45 99 30 36 01

Tel: +35 82 83 791

Fax: +35 82 83 79 48 04

Tel: +33 14 68 62 811

Fax: +33 14 68 79 398

Tel: +49 40 52 87 360

Fax: +49 40 52 31 580

Tel: +31 10 40 90 920

Fax: +31 10 40 90 921

Aalesund (Ship design)

Tel: +47 81 52 00 70

Fax: +47 70 10 37 01

Longva (Automation)

Tel: +47 81 52 00 70

Fax: +47 70 20 83 51

FINLAND
Rauma (Propulsion/Deck
machinery)
FRANCE
Rungis (Service)
GERMANY
Norderstedt (Service)
THE NETHERLANDS
Rotterdam, Pernis
NORWAY

Oslo (Repr. office)

Tel: +47 81 52 00 70

Fax: +47 23 31 04 99

Ulsteinvik (Ship design)

Tel: +47 81 52 00 70

Fax: +47 70 01 40 13

Ulsteinvik (Propulsion)

Tel: +47 81 52 00 70

Fax: +47 70 01 40 14

Tel: +46 55 08 40 00

Fax: +46 55 01 81 90

Tel: +44 13 83 82 31 88

Fax: +44 13 83 82 40 38

SWEDEN
Kristinehamn (Propulsion)
UNITED KINGDOM
Dunfermline (Motion Control)

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 9-3 of 6

Contact List
NORTHERN EUROPE
Portsmouth (Marine Electrical
Systems)

Tel: +44 23 92 31 00 00

Fax: +44 23 92 31 00 01

Tel: +39 01 05 72 191

Fax: +39 01 05 72 19 50

Tel: +38 55 15 00 100

Fax: +38 55 15 00 101

Tel: +30 21 04 59 96 88

Fax: +30 21 04 59 96 87

Madrid

Tel: +34 91 73 50 010

Fax: +34 91 73 50 728

Tarragona

Tel: +34 97 72 96 444

Fax: +34 97 72 96 450

Tel: +67 14 88 33 881

Fax: +67 14 88 33 882

Melbourne

Tel: +61 39 87 30 988

Fax: +61 39 87 30 866

Perth

Tel: +61 89 33 67 910

Fax: +61 89 33 67 920

Beijing (Merchant)

Tel: +86 41 18 23 05 198

Fax: +86 41 18 23 08 448

Shanghai

Tel: +86 21 63 87 88 08

Fax: +86 21 53 82 57 93

Tel: +91 22 56 40 38 38

Fax: +91 22 56 40 38 18

Tel: +65 68 62 19 01

Fax: +65 68 63 21 65

Tel: +64 39 62 12 30

Fax: +64 39 62 12 31

SOUTHERN EUROPE
ITALY
Genova
CROATIA
Rijeka
GREECE
Piraeus
SPAIN

MIDDLE EAST
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Dubai

ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA

CHINA

INDIA
Mumbai
SINGAPORE
Singapore
NEW ZEALAND
Christchurch

NORTHEAST ASIA
JAPAN
Tokyo

Tel: +81 33 23 76 861

Fax: +81 33 23 76 846

Tel: +82 51 83 14 100

Fax: +82 51 83 14 101

Tel: +55 21 38 60 87 87

Fax: +55 21 38 60 44 10

REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Busan

AMERICAS
BRAZIL
Rio de Janeiro
CANADA

Page 9-4 of 6

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Contact List
AMERICAS
Halifax

Tel: +1 90 24 68 28 83

Fax: +1 90 24 68 27 59

Vancouver (Propulsion)

Tel: +1 60 49 42 11 00

Fax: +1 60 49 42 11 25

Houston

Tel: +1 71 32 73 77 00

Fax: +1 71 32 73 77 76

Miramar

Tel: +1 95 44 36 71 00

Fax: +1 95 44 36 71 01

New Orleans

Tel: +1 50 44 64 45 61

Fax: +1 50 44 64 45 65

Seattle

Tel: +1 20 67 82 91 90

Fax: +1 20 67 82 01 76

USA

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 9-5 of 6

Contact List

Page 9-6 of 6

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-09MX


Revision: B

Spare Parts
1
Ordering Spare Parts .............................................................................10-3
1.1 Ordering Spare Parts Separately .............................................................10-3
1.2 Ordering Spare Parts Kit ..........................................................................10-4
1.2.1 Parts Included in Spare Parts Kit ..................................................10-4
2

Supplied Spare Parts .............................................................................10-4

3
Preservation and Handling ....................................................................10-5
3.1 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................10-5
3.2 Delivery Check .........................................................................................10-5

10

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Spare Parts

1 Ordering Spare Parts


For ordering of spare parts, please contact:
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Dept. Propulsion, Ulsteinvik
After Market Offshore
E-mail:

spares.ulstein@rolls-royce.com

Phone:

+47 81 52 00 75

Fax:

+47 70 01 40 12

24 hrs service phone:

+47 90 01 09 97

There are two ways of ordering spare parts for the Icon system:
components ordered separately
spare parts kits put together to match the various system configuration.

1.1

Ordering Spare Parts Separately


To ensure that correct components are shipped, it is essential that each part is correctly
specified in the order. For part identification, please refer to the parts ID in the design
drawing documentation in chapter 12 of this manual.
The part ID is identified as follows:
<CAA Project ID><Unit No><Item No>
The CAA Project ID is found on the front page of the manual.
Example: CAA-110xxx (i.e. CAA-110xxx-MU is the User Manual).
To identify the Unit No. refer to the cable diagram for the specific project.
Example: +T001 (Main Control Cabinet).
To identify the Item No. refer to the internal wiring diagram for the corresponding unit.
Example: CAA-321xxx-01DW is the wiring diagram for the Main Control Cabinet.
Item No: -U11 is the CPU Controller.
Following the example above, the part number for the CPU Controller unit of this
specific project should read: CAA-110xxx +T001 -U11.
For parts in sensors and positioning reference systems, please check the corresponding
manual in chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 10-3 of 6

10

Spare Parts

1.2

Ordering Spare Parts Kit


Apart from some types of reference systems, the Icon system does not have any parts
that are subject to wear due to normal operation. The spare parts kit comprises essential
parts, that in case of a failure may put the system out of operation until the faulty part is
replaced.
The Icon spare parts kit is recommended to be carried onboard vessels that are offshore
for long periods of time.

1.2.1

Parts Included in Spare Parts Kit


Spare part

Qty

Marine Controller

AC/DC power supply

Fibre-optic Network switch

Fuse kit

Joystick device

Positioning device

Serial line converter RS232/422

I/O Module RRAIO16

I/O Module RRDIO15

Isolation amplifier, programmable

Relay

For operator stations integrated in Operators Chair or for additional operator station of
limited equipped type:
10.4 Remote control display

Note:

Some of the listed parts may need a special configuration/set-up


procedure, depending on where the part is beeing used. This must be
taken care of by a certified maintenance engineer (AMS).

2 Supplied Spare Parts


A fuse kit, with 10 pcs of 5x20 mm 6.3 A fuses is included an a standard Icon delivery.

Page 10-4 of 6

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Spare Parts

3 Preservation and Handling


3.1

Electrostatic Discharge
The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching ground before the
printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally important to
discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.

Note:

3.2

It is very important that you are connected to ground before touching any
electronic components or printed circuit boards.

Delivery Check
Upon arrival of spare parts at the destination, all items must be inspected. The following
steps are to be taken:
Compare the shipment to the list of contents attached to the shipment and/or the
packing list. If there is any discrepancy, Rolls-Royce must be informed immediately.
Inspect for damage caused during transportation.
A visual check must be performed on all parts of the shipment; pallets, cardboard boxes
and wooden boxes. If there is any damage (i.e. signs of water immersion, dropping or
other mishandling), the crates must be opened for inspection.

Note:

A representative for the vessel should be present during the inspection. If


any damage is found the vessel representative must, if not present at the
inspection, be informed.

A damage report, listing damages found and possibly including pictures of the damaged
parts, should be produced. The report must then be sent to Rolls-Royce immediately.

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 10-5 of 6

10

Spare Parts

Page 10-6 of 6

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-10MU


Revision: B

Tools
1

General ....................................................................................................11-3

2
Tools ........................................................................................................11-3
2.1 Recommended Tools ...............................................................................11-3
2.2 Special Tools ............................................................................................11-3

11

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-11MX


Revision: C

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-11MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Tools

1 General
This chapter lists required and recommended tools for installation and maintenance
purposes.

Note:

Tools required for maintaining subsuppliers equipment are not listed in


this chapter. Please refer to chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals for details.

For maintenance and/or replacement of the sensors and position reference systems, the
separate manual from each manufacturer must be used.

Note:

For maintenance on electronic equipment, the use of electrostatic


discharge protection such as a wrist-band connected to a grounding point
is mandatory. A grounded surface is also recommended for such tasks.

2 Tools
2.1 Recommended Tools
The following tools are recommended for the installation and maintenance of a Poscon
or an Icon system:
Standard network technician tools
Standard electrician tools
Optic fibre termination tools (if applicable).

Caution: Always use appropriate tools for all maintenance tasks. Use of
inappropriate tools can lead to system malfunction.

2.2 Special Tools


No special tools are required for the installation and maintenance of a Poscon or an Icon
system.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-11MX


Revision: C

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 11-3 of 4

11

Tools

Page 11-4 of 4

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-11MX


Revision: C

Design Drawings
1

General ....................................................................................................12-3

12

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc


The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-12MX


Revision: B

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-12MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Design Drawings

1 General
This chapter comprises the following types of design drawings (see the Main Item List
for a complete listing):
Suffix

Name

Description

01LI

Main Item List

The part list consists of material used in the delivery.

01LC

Cable List

Cable list to be used as guidelines for connecting the


different parts of the delivered system, and to connect the
system to any external system.
All analogue signal cables are to be galvanically insulated
in the transmitting end, and all discrete signal cables are to
be of potentially-free contact types, if not otherwise stated
in the drawings.

01LN

Network List

List to be used as guidelines for connecting the different


parts of the delivered system to the internal Ethernet
network.

01DC

Cable Diagram

System drawing gives an overview of the specific system


installation.

0xDW

Wiring Diagram

Drawings consisting of wiring details and, if applicable, a


table of contents.

01DM

Mechanical Drawing

Drawing consists of mechanical details (usually not


attached as a part of this manual).

01DL

Layout Drawing

The drawing shows the physical size of the different


components in the delivery.

12

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-12MX


Revision: B

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 12-3 of 4

Design Drawings

Page 12-4 of 4

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-12MX


Revision: B

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

PDF-FILE GENERATED BY RRM-CAA (06/06/05)

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

Revision
1

Revision History .....................................................................................13-3

13
Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc
The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX


Revision: A

13
Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX
Revision: A

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Revision

1 Revision History
This chapter specifies the complete compilation of documents and their revision for this
manual. It also contains the document number and revision of the complete manual. This
information is also found on the first page of this manual.
An Installation Manual comprise the following type of documents:
Suffix

Title

01MI

Introduction

02MX

Safety

03MX

System Description

04MX

Delivery Specification

05MX

Technical Data

06MI

Handling and Preservation

07MI

Installation

08MI

Commissioning

09MX

Contact List

10MI

Final Inspection

11MX

Tools

12MX

Design Drawings

13MX

Revision

14MX

Subsuppliers Manuals

A User Manual comprise the following type of documents:


Suffix

Title

01MU

Introduction

02MX

Safety

03MX

System Description

04MX

Delivery Specification

05MX

Technical Data

06MU

Operating Instructions

07MU

Maintenance Instructions

08MU

Trouble Shooting

09MX

Contact List

10MU

Spare Parts

11MX

Tools

12MX

Design Drawings

13MX

Revision

14MX

Subsuppliers Manuals

For descriptions of this manuals contents, see chapter 1 Introduction.

13
Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX
Revision: A

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 13-3 of 4

Revision

13
Page 13-4 of 4

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX


Revision: A

Revisions

Document Revisions
User Manual
Chapter/Title

Document ID

01

Introduction

CAA-021001-01MU

Curr.Rev Prev.Rev Comments

02

Safety

CAA-000001-02MX

03

System Description

CAA-022001-03MX

04

Delivery Specification

CAA-000001-04MX

05

Technical Data

CAA-021001-05MX

06

Operating Instruction

CAA-021001-06MU

07

Maintenance Instructions

CAA-021001-07MU

08

Trouble Shooting

CAA-021001-08MU

09

Contact List

CAA-000001-09MX

10

Spare parts

CAA-021001-10MU

11

Tools

CAA-000001-11MX

12

Design drawings

CAA-000001-12MX

- System Drawings
Main Item List

CAA-110734-01LI

Cable Diagram

CAA-110734-01DC

07-05-11
B

Cable List

CAA-110734-01LC

07-05-11

Wiring Diagram

CAA-110734-00DW

07-04-17

Wiring Diagram

CAA-110734-01DW

Layout Drawing

CAA-110734-01DL

PartNo

Description

75683

DP2 CABINET, TRIPLE COMPUTER CAA-321007-01DL

- Equipment Drawings

CAA-321007-01DW
75992
74092

COMPUTER DP UNIT

CAA-324002-01DL

CAA-324002-01DW

CAA-492003-01DL

CAA-492003-01DW

74496

TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC

CAA-414006-01DL

75687

DP Console (2xIPD,TRB)

CAA-452012-01DL

75688

DP Swingframe (2xIPD,TRB)

CAA-452012-01DW

CAA-452013-01DL

CAA-452013-01DW

A
A

75218

DESKJET 2360

CAA-416003-01DL

61910

OKI ML280

CAA-416001-01DL

74483

12WDU25+4X12 WDK25

CAA-391003-01DL

75940

GIL, BOW UP

CAA-652003-01DL

75943

MRU-D COMPLETE

CAA-651002-01DL

75957

VERIPOS GNSS SUITE, L1/L12

CAA-610011-01DL

75094

CYSCAN

CAA-613001-01DL

74093

230VAC DISTR.

CAA-391004-01DL

74119

UPS, 7 KVA

74129
13

TRAINER, DUAL PMS/RSG

JS -MAN -DP SWITCH

Revision
Document Revision

Rolls Royce Marine AS


Control-Aalesund

CAA-381001-01DL

CAA-381001-01DW

CAA-482001-01DL

CAA-000001-13MX

CAA-110735-13MU

CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A

14

Subsuppliers manuals

CAA-000001-14MX

74496

TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC

CAA-414006-01MU

71462

TFT 15i/220VAC

CAA-414006-01MU

75218

DESKJET 2360

CAA-416003-01MU

61910

OKI ML280

CAA-416001-01MU

75940

GIL, BOW UP

CAA-652003-01MU

CAA-652003-01MU

75943

MRU-D COMPLETE

CAA-651002-01MU

75942

MRU-5 COMPLETE

CAA-651002-01MU

75957

VERIPOS GNSS SUITE, L1/L12

CAA-610011-01MU

72312

TFT 19i/220VAC

75094
74119

CYSCAN
UPS, 7 KVA

Rolls Royce Marine AS


Control-Aalesund

CAA-414006-01MU

CAA-414006-01MU

CAA-613001-01MU

CAA-414006-01MU

CAA-381001-01MU

CAA-381001-01MU

CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A

Subsuppliers Manuals
1

General ....................................................................................................14-3

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-14MX


Revision: A

14

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-14MX


Revision: A

14

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.

Subsuppliers Manuals

1 General
This chapter contains customer documentation for equipment that is part of the RollsRoyce system installation, but not covered by the Installation Manual or the User
Manual.
Each document consists of excerpts from the subsuppliers original documentation. This
has been made by Rolls-Royce with the expressed consent of each subsupplier.

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-14MX


Revision: A

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Page 14-3 of 4

14

Subsuppliers Manuals

Page 14-4 of 4

14

Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-000001-14MX


Revision: A

User Manual
for
JHD DISPLAYS

This document contains the complete manual:


INB100005-1 - JHD User Manual: Maritime Multi Displays / Industrial TFT Displays

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-414006-01MU

Unrestricted

2006 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

Blank page

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-414006-01MU

Unrestricted

2006 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

User Manual

Maritime Multi Display Models


JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH

10T06
15T05
19T02
20T03
20T06
23T02

MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD

10.4
15.0
19.0
20.1
20.1
23.1

inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch

Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime

Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi

Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display

Industrial TFT Display Models


JH 10T06 STD - 10.4 inch Industrial TFT Display
JH 15T05 STD - 15.0 inch Industrial TFT Display
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
msosen, N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
Phone: +47 5276 3700, Fax: +47 5276 5444

www.hatteland.com

User Manual MMD/TFT Series


Updated: 18 Nov 2005

Doc Id: INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

For models: (and some variations)


-A1, -A2, -C1, -C2, -C3, -C4

Copyright 2005 Jakob Hatteland Display AS


Aamsosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
Information in this manual are copyrighted to the respective owners. All rights are reserved by Jakob
Hatteland Display AS. This information may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced,
translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without the prior written consent
of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
The products described, or referenced, herein are copyrighted to the respective owners.
The products may not be copied or duplicated in any way. This documentation contains proprietary
information that is not to be disclosed to persons outside the users company without prior written consent
of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
The copyright notice appearing above is included to provide statutory protection in the event of
unauthorized or unintentional public disclosure.
All other product names or trademarks are properties of their respective owners !

Contents
Contents........................................................................................ 3
Contents of package

General .......................................................................................... 9
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display AS
About this manual
Basic Construction - Maritime Multi Display
Product Labels (Example)
Serial Number Label
Warranty Label
Capacitive Touchscreen
Resistive Touchscreen

9
10
11
12
12
12
13
14

General Installation Recommendations................................... 15


Installation and mounting
Brightness knob precaution
Ergonomics
Cables
Cable Entries & Connectors (Marked area) - Illustration only
Maximum Cable Length
Standard Bracket
Rotary Bracket
Physical Connections - MMD/STD Models
Pin Assignments - Common Connectors

15
15
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
21

User Controls ............................................................................. 24


Operation
OSD Menu Overview
OSD Menu Functions
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)
Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (DVI)

24
26
28
33
35
37
39

User Controls - STD ................................................................... 42


Operation
User Controls / OSD Menu
OSD Menu Functions
Preset Signal Timing XGA Displays

42
43
44
49

3
IND100130-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Contents
Specifications ............................................................................. 51
Specifications - JH 10T06 STD
Specifications - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 15T05 STD
Specifications - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Technical Drawings.................................................................... 61
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 STD
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 STD
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Technical Drawings - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version

4
IND100130-1

62
62
63
64
64
65
66
66
67
68
68
69
70
70
71
72
72
73
74
74
75
75
76

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Contents
Technical Drawings - Accessories ........................................... 77
10 Inch Sun Visor
17 >> 23 Rotary Bracket
17 Inch > 20 Inch Bracket
15 TFT to 19 TFT adapter
19 TFT to 21 CRT adapter
19 Inch Sun Visor
VESA Bracket
Water Cover

78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85

General - Appendix .................................................................... 87


Basic Trouble-shooting
Testing & Approvals Overview
Declaration of Conformity
Return Of Goods Information
Terms
Notes
Notes
Revision History

88
89
91
92
93
96
97
98

Contact Information ................................................................. 100

5
IND100130-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Contents of package
This product is shipped with:

Item

Description

4 pcs of PAN M6X25 black bolts with M6 plastic washer.


These should only be used to secure the display into a
console.

Illustration

Note: If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they are minimum
M6 and 25mm in length for security reasons.

1 pcs of Standard Signal Cable and/or DVI cable.


DSUB 15P Male to DSUB 15P Male - Length approx: 2m
DVI-D 24P Male to DVI-D 24P Male - Length approx: 2m

Note: DVI cable only included on products that supports DVI.


1 pcs of Standard Power Cable.
(European or US standard) - Length approx: 1.9m
Note: Power cable not included in the DC version.

1 pcs of User Manual

Optional Accessories:

Item

Description

4 pcs of M6X12 Unbraco bolts (Included with bracket)


These should only be used to secure the bracket on the
display.

Illustration

If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they do not exceed 12mm
in length. Use any longer will do serious damage to components
inside the product!

1 pcs of Standard Serial Cable


DSUB 9p Male to DSUB 9p Male - Length approx: 1.5m
This cable is only included if you purchased a product with
touchscreen or remote control serial interface installed.

6
IND100131-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

General

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Jakob Hatteland Display AS


KNOWLEDGE - QUALITY - ECONOMY
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display AS
Founded in 1987, Jakob Hatteland Display (JHD), based in Norway, offers the widest range of
type approved marine monitors, panel computers and type approved marine computers for the
worldwide commercial, naval, yacht and cruise market.
Today the group develops and manufactures a complete range of IEC 60945 tested marine
monitors, panel computers and IEC 60945 tested marine computers.
Approved Marine Displays (MMD/STD)
Hatteland Displays marine monitors are based on high quality and state-of-the-art components
with the highest specifications, and meet all requirements for harsh maritime use. The displays
are easily integrated into your system, due to standardized products and features.
The MMD (Maritime Multi Display) series consists of sizes ranging from 10in to 23in.
Specifically designed for navigation and automation systems on ships, these certified LCD
monitors comply to IP66 described in IEC 60925, are tested according to IEC 60945 and are
approved by major classification societies such as ABS, BV, ClassNK, DNV, GL and LR.
Further to this marine standard, the 19in MMD, the 20in MMD and the 23in MMD
marine monitors are also available as ECDIS and ARPA radar-compliant units.
Approved Marine Panel Computers (MMC)
The combination of the reliable design of the marine TFT-LCD modules, together with industrial
computer boards, allows Hatteland Display to offer a product range for customer applications
where space is critical and full function is desired in a single unit. In particular, the standardized
ETX-board form factor allows full flexibility when it comes to processor choice. Because of
multiple useful standard components we can offer a highly attractive commercial package
The MMC (Maritime Multi Computer) series consist of sizes ranging from 10in to 23in.
These products have also been designed for typical marine applications in navigation,
automation and other systems. Following Hattelands philosophy, these marine panel computers
are fully tested according to IEC 60945 and are designed for type approval.
Approved stand-alone and rack-mounted marine computers
Two concepts are followed to offer variation in size, function and expansion slots for customers:
approved black-box computers for limited space and approved computers for standard
19in racks, which offer a high degree of expansion. Configurations according to customer
wishes are implicit, such as the operating system, CD-burner, RAM, graphic card, HD, add-on
cards, factory installed software and many, many more.

General
IND100077-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Jakob Hatteland Display AS


The approved computers are tested according to IEC 60945 and IACS E10 and meet the
requirements for IEC 61174 (ECDIS). Several approvals by major classification societies such as
ABS, BV, ClassNK, DNV, GL and LR are available or pending.
Flexible display solutions and night vision facilities
All the type-approved displays, panel computers and marine computers offer maximum flexibility
for customers applications. Hatteland Display offers all products with AC or DC power supply,
and marine displays and marine panel computers have a fully linear dimmable function for night
vision.
Upon the customers request, specific colour, mechanical or electrical function designs are
possible. Many more options are also available, including factory mounted touch screens, sun
visors for marine monitors, different Windows or Linux operating systems and brackets
Design and Production
All products are designed and controlled by Hatteland Display in Nedre Vats, Norway.
The production and configuration of all products is taking place within Hattelands production
plant#1 (opened in September 2003) in Nedre Vats, Norway. Here an extensive manufacturing
capacity is available for all products, and can be expanded in the future.
The chosen materials for the production of the products are specifically industrial components
and can fulfill form-fit-and-function requests.
About this manual
The manual contains electrical, mechanical and input/output signal specifications. All specifications
in this manual, due to manufacturing, new revisions and approvals, are subject to change without
notice. However, the last update and revision of this manual are shown both on the frontpage
and also in the Revision History chapter. Please use that as a reference.
Furthermore, for third party datasheet and user manuals, please see dedicated interactive CD
delivered with the product or contact our sales personnel for support.

General
IND100077-1

10

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Basic Construction - Maritime Multi Display

Basic Construction,
Hatteland Display Concept

Backcover/cabinet

Touchscreen option

Bracket

Rotation bracket
LCD Panel
Sun Visor
Controller Hatch
Front frame w/glass
General Display Variations/Models Overview:
A1
A2
A3
A4
C1/C3
C2/C4
E1
E2
Hx
MMD
MMC
MIL
MEX
STD/VGA

= AC Power 115-230 VAC


= DC Power 12-24 VDC (Some have 10-36 VDC)
= AC Power 115-230 VAC including videobuffer
= DC Power 12-24 VDC including videobuffer
= Touchscreen + AC Power 115-230 VAC
= Touchscreen + DC Power 12-24 VDC
= ECDIS Compliant + AC Power 115-230 VAC
= ECDIS Compliant + DC Power 12-24 VDC
= Same as all above, but with handles on front frame.
= Dual Input (RGB + VIDEO) Display
= Complete Maritime Multi Computer + Display Solution
= Naval Military Dual Input (RGB + VIDEO) Display
= Multi Display - Explosion protection EEx nA II T5
= Single Input RGB Signal

General
IND100077-5

11

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Product Labels (Example)


Serial Number Label

Manufacturer & Country

Product & Serial Number

Product Information
Manufacture:
Jakob Hatteland Display
NORWAY

Description

Power rating

100W

Product:
19 Inch
TFT

Product type: #
JH 19T01MMD-A1-831
Serial Number

115VAC/60Hz
230VAC/50Hz

Input Voltage

Product Type and Serial Number


JH XXAXX AAA-AX-XXX
JH 19T01 MMD-A1-831

NOMENCLATURE
Example
Serial Number
Sub Version (AC-Odd / DC-Even number)
Version (Number & Product Name)
TFT (Thin Film Transistor)
Display Size (inch)
Jakob Hatteland (manufacturer)

Warranty Label
If you are to perform service on a unit still under warranty, any warranty will
be void if this label is damaged or removed. This label is usually located on the
back of the product and near the serial number label. This is to help our service
department to better determine if there has been any unauthorized service on a
product still under warranty.

General
IND100077-23

12

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Capacitive Touchscreen
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display products with touchscreen
JHD uses both Resistive and Capacitive touchscreen solutions for their products. Please visit our
website to verify what product and touchscreen solution your product have.
Capacitive Touchscreen
Capacitive touchscreens operate using oscillator circuits
that are located in each corner of the glass overlay and
measure the capacitance of the area to be touched.
Depending on where the user touches the overlay, the
oscillators will vary in frequency. A touchscreen controller
then measures the frequency variations to ascertain the
coordinates of the persons touch. This glass overlay has
a coating that stores the charge deposited over its surface
electrically. It will not operate with either a gloved hand
or with a mechanical stylus.

Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction

Positional Accurancy
Touch Contact
Requirements
Enduarance Tested
Cleaning
Liquid Resistance
Light Transmission

Details
Top: ClearTek protective overcoat protects the sensors and increase durability.
Inside: Electrode X/Y grid pattern and conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass and conductive coating.
Small amount of voltage is applied to the four corners for measuring X and Y
coordinates of the touch point.
Reported touch coordinates are within 1.0% of true position.
(Based on viewing area dimensions)
3 ms for finger input.
More than 225 million touches in one location without noticable degradation to
the surface.
Water, isopropyl, alcohol, and similar non-abrasive cleaners.
Liquids on screen does not impede touchscreen performance.
Up to 88% at 550 nm; dependant on specific surface finish chosen.

Updated touchscreen drivers and documentation for your operating system:


Please visit our website www.hatteland.com for 3rd party software, drivers and complete
documentation for touchscreens. In case of problems, please contact our sales department.
Before using the touchscreen, it may need to be calibrated for the operating system.
Please install the 3rd party software and use the Calibrate function from there.

Touchscreen
IND100110-1

13

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Resistive Touchscreen
Resistive Touchscreen
It generally uses a display overlay composed of layers,
each with a conductive coating on the interior surface.
Special separator dots are distributed evenly across the
active area and separate the conductive interior layers.
The pressure from using either a mechanical stylus or
finger produces an internal electrical contact at the
action point which supplies the controller with vertical
and horizontal analog voltages for data input. The resistive
touchscreens are anti-glare to reduce reflective shine
intensity, which will slightly diffuse the light output
throughout the screen. Resistive technology activation can
be initiated by; a gloved hand, fingernail, mechanical stylus
or an ungloved finger.

Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction

Details
Top: Polyester with outside hard-surface coating with clear or anti-glare finish.
Inside: Transparent conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass substrate with uniform conductive coating.
Top and bottom layers separated by separator dots.
Positional Accurancy
Standard deviation of error is less than +- 0.080-inch (2mm).
Touch Activation Force Typically 57 to 133 g
Expected Life
More than 35 million touches in one location without failure, using a stylus similar
Performance
to a finger.
Chemical Resistance
Acetone, Ammonia-based glass cleaners, Common food and beverages,
(Exposed for one hour) Hexane, Isopropyl alcohol, Methylene chloride, Methyl ethyl ketone,
Mineral spirits, Turpentine
Light Transmission
Typically 75% over visible light spectrum.

Updated touchscreen drivers and documentation for your operating system:


Please visit our website www.hatteland.com for 3rd party software, drivers and complete
documentation for touchscreens. In case of problems, please contact our sales department.
Before using the touchscreen, it may need to be calibrated for the operating system.
Please install the 3rd party software and use the Calibrate function from there.

Touchscreen
IND100110-1

14

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

General Installation Recommendations


Installation and mounting

1. Most of our products are intended for various methods of installation or mounting
(panel mounting, bracket mounting, ceiling/wall mounting etc.); for details, please see the relevant
mechanical drawings.
2. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the product. The air inlet and outlet
openings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
3. Do not install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), as this will cause heat to build up
inside the display which will damage the LCD Panel. To prevent this problem we recommend
installing the unit in a vertical position (30 degrees) to improve the airflow through the unit.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to overtemperature. This point should already be taken
into consideration when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the
windows, ventilation, etc.)
5. Space necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures and for
maintenance, must be provided.
6. To further improve the cooling of the unit we recommend installing Cooling Fans underneath
blowing upwards into the unit air inlet. This may be required in high temperature applications
and also when there is reason to expect temperature problems due to non-optimal way of
mounting(Ref.2-5).
7. If the push buttons of the product are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination
(IEC 60945, 6.5.c, e.g. Goose neck light is required for navigational use.
8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings.
Attention must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service
work.
Brightness knob precaution
Please be aware of the risk of breaking or bending the brightness knob. The brightness knob
should be free of any obstruction.

Installation
IND100078-1

15

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

General Installation Recommendations


Ergonomics

1. Adjust the unit height so that the top of the screen is at or below eye level. Your eyes should
look slightly downwards when viewing the middle of the screen.
2. Adjust screen inclination to remain gaze angle to the centre of the screen approximately
perpendicular to the line of gaze.
3. When products are to be operated both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a
screen inclination of about 30 to 40 (from a vertical plane) has turned out to be favourable.
4. The brightness of displays is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means
(negatively inclined window surfaces, Venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring
of the deckhead)
5. Units in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or
bulkhead/ deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the
display are not directed into the observers viewing direction.
6. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment
that require approval (by optical effects, aids of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).

General mounting instructions

- The useful life of the components of all Electronics Units generally decreases with increasing
ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there
are no such facilities these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a suitable
temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside the display unit.
- With most Electronic Units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing. The cooling must not
be impaired by partial covering of the unit or by installation of the unit in a confined cabinet.
- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic
protection distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the wing control console
protected against the weather. In order to avoid misting of the viewing screen, a 25 ... 50 W
console-heating (power depending on the volume) is recommended.
- When selecting the site of a display unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered.

Installation
IND100078-1

16

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

General Installation Recommendations


- The impairment of read-out from a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must be
avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or Venetian blinds.
- Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must
be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).
- When a product is being installed, the surface base or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it
is flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such
twisting would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by
means of spacing-washers.
- The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire
used should have a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm2.
- Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be
examined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment
is too late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.

Cables

Use only high quality shielded signal cables. For RGB/DVI cables use only cables with separate
coax for Red, Green and Blue. Jakob Hatteland Display can supply a varity of high quality RGB/
DVI, RS232, PARALLEL, LAN and USB cables intended for this use.
Cable Entries & Connectors (Marked area) - Illustration only

Bottom View

Back View

Installation
IND100078-1

17

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

General Installation Recommendations


Maximum Cable Length
The RGB/DVI cable should generally be kept as short as possible to provide a high quality output
on the display. The maximum cable length will depend on the signal resolution and frequency, but
also on the quality of the signal output from the computer. We recommend using 60Hz vertical
frequency for our displays.
Cables up to 10 meters generally provides good picture quality even with a 1600x1200 (UXGA)
60Hz signal. In most cases (especially with lower resolutions) even longer cables will provide a
satisfactory result. This should however be tested in advance before making the decision on how
far the unit can be placed from the signal source.
Standard Bracket
When mounting the bracket on the MMD/STD products, the length of the bolts should not exceed
12mm. Using any longer bolts will do serious damage to components inside the product, and will
void warranty!
Mount bolts on both sides of the bracket/display.
You make any adjustments before securing the bolts.

Adjust the tilting angle and secure the bolts.

Note: MMC bracket may vary in placement and design, but length of bolts should not
exceed 12mm.
Rotary Bracket
This can only be mounted if your product is equipped with a Standard Bracket.
Use the provided bolts to secure it. You may choose your own bolts to secure it to a table or
desktop, recommended size are: M10 and minimum 30mm in length. The rotary bracket can be
rotated 180

Installation
IND100078-1

18

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Physical Connections - MMD/STD Models


Connection area of display (illustration)

RGB Out or Touch


(Optional)
Composite In

Led Adjust (older models)

Power Input

RGB IN

Serial Interface(opt)

DVI-D IN (newer models)


S-Video In
NOTE: Available connectors/locations may vary depending on model !

TOUCHSCREEN / VGA OUT: (optional)

Connect the RS-232 cable to the D-SUB 9P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
Connect the other end to your COM port of your computer. Install the nesscessary software to operate it.
- Note that the connector is only installed upon customer request. VGA OUT connector is then removed.
- By factory standards the product have been mounted with a VGA OUT 15PIN DSUB connector, this signal
is a clone of the incoming signal.

COMPOSITE IN (PAL/NTSC/SECAM VIDEO):

Connect your composite video signal cable into the RCA jack plug. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that Composite Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.

S-VIDEO IN:

Connect your S-Video (SVHS) video signal cable into the mini 4-way din plug. It can only be inserted
one way and make sure you dont bend any of the pins inside your cable. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that S-Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.

RGB IN:

Connect the VGA cable to the D-SUB 15P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the VGA cable to the D-SUB connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the VGA cable connector. To reduce tension of the VGA cable, secure it to the base mounted cable
tie clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the VGA output of your computer, and fasten it there also.

19
IND100133-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Physical Connections - MMD/STD Models


DVI-D IN:

Connect the DVI cable to the DVI-D 24P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the DVI cable to the DVI-D connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the DVI cable connector. To reduce tension of the DVI cable, secure it to the base mounted cable tie
clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the DVI-D output of your computer, and fasten it there also.

POWER INPUT: (AC Version)

The internal AC power module supports both 115VAC/60Hz and 230VAC/50Hz power input. You may
secure the cable further by mounting it to the base mounted cable tie clamp.

POWER INPUT: (DC Version)

Secure the cables (check polarity!) to the screw terminal, you may secure the cable further by mounting it
to the base mounted cable tie clamp. The internal DC power module supports voltage from 12 to 24 VDC.

SERIAL INTERFACE: (optional)

The two serial remote control connectors are used for displays with the JHSCOM-A1 or JHSCOM-B1.
It features a RS232/RS422/RS485 interface for controlling all parameters, including brightness, for the
display. For further information, see the Control Interface under support - www.hatteland.com

LED ADJUST: (Only on older versions)

The led adjust is only present in displays described in the chapter automatic power light dimming. With the
led adjust knob, you can manually adjust the intensity of the power light indicator which is located in the
front of the display. The power light indicator is controlled by the Auto Power LED Dimming function which
automatically adjusts the intensity of the power light based on your environment lightning. You could also
turn it off if that is necessary.
Note:
If you have optional accessories beyond these standard connectors described here, please visit our
website at www.hatteland.com for separate documentation/specifications regarding accessories (when
made available).

20
IND100133-1

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Pin Assignments - Common Connectors


Note: Not all connectors may be available on your specific product. This depends on the amount of additional
hardware installed from factory, or customized solutions. These pin assignments are for the common connectors used.
Pin Assignments - RJ45 10/100 LAN

Pin Assignments - RJ45 10/100/1000 GBLAN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pin 01 - TDP
Pin 02 - TDN
Pin 03 - RDP
Pin 04 - NC
Pin 05 - NC
Pin 06 - RDN
Pin 07 - NC
Pin 08 - NC

Transmit Differential Pair (Positive)


Transmit Differential Pair (Negative)
Receive Differential Pair (Positive)
Not Connected
Not Connected
Receive Differential Pair (Negative)
Not Connected
Not Connected

Pin 01 - D0P
Pin 02 - D0N
Pin 03 - D1P
Pin 04 - D2P
Pin 05 - D2N
Pin 06 - D1N
Pin 07 - D3P
Pin 08 - D3N

Differential Pair 0 (Positive)


Differential Pair 0 (Negative)
Differential Pair 1 (Positive)
Differential Pair 2 (Positive)
Differential Pair 2 (Negative)
Differential Pair 1 (Negative)
Differential Pair 3 (Positive)
Differential Pair 3 (Negative)

Use category 5 - twisted pair cable

Pin Assignments - 9P Serial COM RS232


5

Pin Assignments - 15P HD RGB VGA


5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6

4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6
Pin 01 - DCD
Pin 02 - SIN
Pin 03 - SOUT
Pin 04 - DTR
Pin 05 - GND
Pin 06 - DSR
Pin 07 - RTS
Pin 08 - CTS
Pin 09 - RI

Data Carry Detect


Serial In or Receive Data
Serial Out or Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicate

Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15

Pin Assignments - USB


Pin 2: Negative Data

Pin 4: Ground

15 14 13 12 11

Red, analog
Green, analog
Blue, analog
Reserved for monitor ID bit 2 (grounded)
Digital ground
Analog ground red
Analog ground green
Analog ground blue
+5V power supply for DDC (optional)
Digital ground
Reserved for monitor ID bit 0 (grounded)
DDC serial data
Horizontal sync or composite sync, input
Vertical sync, input
DDC serial clock

Pin Assignments - 5P PS/2 MOUSE


Pin 1: VCC +5V

Pin 3: Positive Data

Pin 6: Not Connected

Pin Assignments - 5P PS/2 KEYBOARD


Pin 6: Not Connected

Pin 4: Vcc +5V

Pin 3: Ground

Pin 5: Keyboard Clock


Pin 2: Not Connected

Pin 4: Vcc +5V

Pin 5: Mouse Clock

Pin 1: Mouse Data

Pin 3: Ground

Pin Ass. - 5P PS/2 KEYBOARD+MOUSE Combined


Pin 2: Not Connected

Pin 1: Keyboard Data

Pin 6: Mouse Clock

Pin 4: Vcc +5V


Pin 2: Mouse Data

21
IND100241-2

Pin 5: Keyboard Clock

Pin 3: Ground

Pin 1: Keyboard Data

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Pin Assignments - Common Connectors


Pin Assignments - 25P Parallel
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin 01 - STROBE
Pin 02 - DATA0
Pin 03 - DATA1
Pin 04 - DATA2
Pin 05 - DATA3
Pin 06 - DATA4
Pin 07 - DATA5
Pin 08 - DATA6
Pin 09 - DATA7
Pin 10 - ACK
Pin 11 - BUSY
Pin 12 - PE
Pin 13 - SELECT
Pin 14 - AUTO FEED
Pin 15 - ERR#
Pin 16 - INIT#
Pin 17 - SLIN#
Pin 18 - GND
Pin 19 - GND
Pin 20 - GND
Pin 21 - GND
Pin 22 - GND
Pin 23 - GND
Pin 24 - GND
Pin 25 - GND

This signal indicates to the printer that data at PD7..0 are valid.
Parallel data bus from PC board to printer. The data line are able to operate in PS/2 compatible bi-directional mode.
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Signal from printer indicating that the printer has received the data and is ready to accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer cannot accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer is out of paper.
Signal from printer to indicate that the printer is selected.
This active low output causes the printer to add a line feed after each line printed.
Signal from printer indicating that an error has been detected.
This active low output initialises (resets) the printer.
Signal to select the printer sent from CPU board to printer.
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground

Pin Assignments - 24P DVI-D & DVI-I


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C1 C2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

C5

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 C3 C4
Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Pin 23
Pin 24
Pin C1
Pin C2
Pin C3
Pin C4
Pin C5

T.M.D.S. Data2 - (Digital - RED link 1)


T.M.D.S. Data2 + (Digital + RED link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data4 - (Digital - GREEN link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data4 + (Digital + GREEN link 2)
DDC Clock
DDC Data
Analog Vertical Sync (DVI-I only)
T.M.D.S. Data1 - (Digital - GREEN link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data1 + (Digital + GREEN link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data1/3 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data3 - (Digital - BLUE link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data3 + (Digital + BLUE link 2)
+5V Power (for standby mode)
Ground (for +5V and analog sync)
Hot Plug Detect
T.M.D.S. Data0 - (Digital - BLUE link 1) and digital sync.
T.M.D.S. Data0 + (Digital + BLUE link 1) and digital sync.
T.M.D.S. Data0/5 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data5 - (Digital - RED link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data5 + (Digital - RED link 2)
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock + (Digital clock + (Links 1 and 2)
T.M.D.S. Clock - (Digital clock - (Links 1 and 2)
Analog RED
Analog GREEN
Analog BLUE
Analog Horizontal Sync.
Analog Ground (return for RGB signals)

DDC = Display Data Channel /// T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal /// PIN C1,C2,C3,C4 = Only present on DVI-I connectors.

22
IND100241-2

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

User Controls
MMD Products

23

Operation
POWER SWITCH:

This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.

Power ON: To turn the display on, press down


the power switch. The power light
indicator will turn green.

Assignable Hot keys

Auto Power LED Dimmer


Indication Mark

(If no RGB signal sync is present, NO SYNC


message will appear in the display)

Power OFF: To turn the display off, press and


hold the power switch down for
3 seconds.

Power Switch
Brightness Knob

Power Light Indicator

DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS:

This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.
NOTE1: The design and placement of the user / osd controls may vary from product to product !
NOTE2: For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with
the indication mark located on the label. (See illustration above)

AUTOMATIC POWER LIGHT DIMMING:

This TFT display features a Power LED Dimmer function which control the light intensity of the power light
indicator. There are two different solutions for this feature.

Note:

1- Intelligent Auto Power LED Dimmer which control the light intensity based on your environment
lightning. This can also be manually adjusted using the Led Adjust knob on the rear side of the
display.
2- The light intensity is regulated according to the backlight, that is according to the brightness
knob. With the exception that when the backlight brightness is zero, the power led is just visible
in dark environment. This means that the power led is not visible in daylight when the brightness
knob is turned fully to the left.

If there is a led adjustment knob at the connection area of the display as described in INSTALLATION
AND RECOMMENDATIONS chapter, the manner of operation described in paragraph one applies. For
displays produced after the creation date of this manual, paragraph two applies. For displays produced
before year 2002, paragraph one applies.

ASSIGNABLE HOT KEYS:

The user can assign various display functions as hot keys (increase/decrease).
This will enable the user to quickly adjust the brightness, image size, contrast or other functions to
control the image. To assign these hot keys, enter the UTILITIES MENU/DIRECT ACCESS menu and
change them to the desired hot key function. Default hot keys are set to increase/decrease volume.

User Controls
IND100064-1

24

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Operation
MENU

USER CONTROLS:

UP / DOWN Buttons

Adjust Buttons -/+

The On Screen Display (OSD menu) controls are located under the metal hatch on the left side
of the display. To begin understanding the menu and its usage, just follow these steps for a quick start.
1: Press the MENU button. The OSD menu will show all the available functions you
can adjust or control.
2: You can move to the next icon by pressing MENU.
3: Select options within icon menu by pressing UP or DOWN buttons.
The selected option will turn yellow.
4: Use + or - buttons to increase/decrease values.
5: Move the selection left or right by using + or - buttons. The selected option will turn green.
6: To confirm the selection, press + button. To abort press - button.

OSD MENU:

The On Screen Display (OSD menu) contains several functions that will let the user to adjust
or setup the display to their preferred setting. The functions are shown as easy understandable icons.
Some of the menus have sub-menus, use + to access and MENU to go back to the previous menu.
The OSD menu consists of 4 modes: (Icon beside function indicates if its available in that mode)

1
2

3
4

Mode 1 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 2 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 3 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
Mode 4 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)

RGB/DVI MODE = When RGB/DVI signal (i.e OS or radar / charts) are displayed full screen.
VIDEO MODE = When video signal (i.e CAMERA / VCR / DVD) are displayed full screen.
To access the Advanced OSD Menu, you must press and hold the DOWN button while turning power on.
When picture appears, release the DOWN button and press MENU to access the Advanced functions.
If you have the Memorized state version of the OSD menu, use the same procedure to switch between Advanced
or Simplified modes. For more information about Memorized state, see the NOTES section in this manual.
WARNING !! ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE ENGINEER SHOULD ACCESS SERVICE MENU.
PERFORMANCE OF THE DISPLAY MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED.

User Controls
IND100064-1

25

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Overview


Mode 1 - Function layout in RGB / DVI MODE Simplified OSD Menu: (User menu)

Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.

Frequency and Phase

Frequency
Phase
Picture Type

Motion

Up/Down [select]

Still

0
15

+/- [modify]

Mode 2 - Function layout in RGB / DVI MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)

Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.

Brightness and Contrast

Brightness
Contrast

50
50

Up/Down [select]

User Controls
IND100064-1

+/- [modify]

26

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Overview


Mode 3 - Function layout in VIDEO MODE Simplified OSD Menu: (User menu)
Note that to be in VIDEO MODE, a video signal must be present in full screen, i.e from a camera,
VCR or DVD player.

Video Adjustment
Color
Tint
Sharpness
Picture Type
Video Type

Motion
DVD

Up/Down [select]

Still
VCR

0
0
3

+/- [modify]

Mode 4 - Function layout in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)

Note that to be in VIDEO MODE, a video signal must be present in full screen, i.e from a camera,
VCR or DVD player.

Brightness and Contrast


Brightness
Contrast

0
15

Up/Down [select]

User Controls
IND100064-1

+/- [modify]

27

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST: (No function in DVI mode)
Selecting this function will enable the user to adjust brightness and contrast
for the display.

BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:

Increase/decrease brightness level, total: 100 steps


Increase/decrease contrast level, total: 100 steps

COLOR TEMPERATURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the warmness of the picture.
Higher temperature = cooler picture. Lower temperature = warmer picture.

User can select between 9500K, 8000K, 6500K, and 5000K color temperature measured in
Kelvin degrees. Press + to access the sub-menu, where the RGB values can be adjusted.
Use + and - buttons to adjust these values, and MENU to exit. (Saving is done automatically)

FREQUENCY AND PHASE: (No function in DVI mode)


Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the image horizontal size and
fine tune the image quality.

1 2

FREQUENCY:
PHASE:

Increase/decrease the image horizontal size.


Fine tune the data sampling position (adjust image quality.)

PICTURE TYPE

: Motion / Still (Adjustment for best image quality)


If graphics on screen move a lot, select Motion
If graphics on screen are mostly still, select Still

VIDEO ADJUSTMENT:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the color saturation of the
picture, tint and sharpness.

3 4

COLOR:
TINT:
SHARPNESS:

Increase/decrease video color level.


Increase/decrease tint level.
Increase/decrease video image sharpness level.

PICTURE TYPE

: Motion / Still / Normal (Adjustment for best image quality)


If graphics on screen move a lot, select Motion
If graphics on screen are mostly still, select Still
General motion - non flicker mode, select Normal

VIDEO TYPE

: Change to best match the source signal. (DVD / VCR)

VIDEO SYSTEM:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select video system and input signals.

3 4

AUTO
NTSC / NTSC 4.43
PAL / PAL M
SECAM

User Controls
IND100064-1

: Automatic detection of NTSC or PAL system. (Not applicable in SECAM)


: Manual select NTSC system.
: Manual select PAL system.
: Manual select SECAM system.

28

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


1 2

STATUS:
Selecting this function will display graphic information such as resolution and
frequency.

1 2
3 4

POSITION: (No function in DVI mode)


Selecting this function will enable the user to position the image within the display
area.
IMAGE UP/DOWN
IMAGE LEFT/RIGHT

1 2

: Position the image vertically using UP or DOWN buttons.


: Position the image horizontally using + or - buttons.

PICTURE IN PICTURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to configure PIP window size, input signal
source, horizontal and vertical position and more.
PIP SIZE
PIP SOURCE

: Select PIP window size. Choose between OFF, SIZE1, SIZE2 or SIZE3.
: Select video source to be displayed in PIP window.
Choose between AUTO, COMP, SVID:
AUTO
COMP
SVID

HORIZONTAL POSITION:
VERTICAL POSITION:

= automatic detection of Composite, S-Video.


= manual select composite video signal only.
= manual select S-Video signal only.
Adjust the position of the PIP window horizontally.
Adjust the position of the PIP window vertically.

ADVANCED PIP SETTINGS: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
SHARPNESS:
TINT:
COLOR:

Increase/decrease the image brightness of the PIP window.


Increase/decrease the image contrast of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the image sharpness of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the tint of the image of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the color of the image of the PIP window.

ROTATION:
Selecting this function will enable the user to rotate the image to either
landscape or portrait format.

3 4

User Controls
IND100064-1

29

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


2

GRAPHIC SCALING MODES:


Selecting this function will enable the user to configure the graphic scaling of the
PC or VIDEO image.

Scaling methods in PC/DVI MODE:

ONE TO ONE, FILL SCREEN,


FILL TO ASPECT RATIO,
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES

Scaling methods in VIDEO MODE:

NORMAL, LETTERBOX,
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES,
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES

3 4

3 4
2

ONE TO ONE: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


HORIZONTAL PAN:
VERTICAL PAN:

Increase/decrease the horizontal pan.


Increase/decrease the vertical pan.

NORMAL: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

3 4

3 4
2

HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:

Increase/decrease the horizontal clipping.


Increase/decrease the horizontal offset.
Increase/decrease the horizontal stretch.
Increase/decrease the vertical clipping.
Increase/decrease the vertical offset.
Increase/decrease the vertical stretch.

FILL SCREEN
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image.
FILL TO ASPECT RATIO
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image
according to aspect ratio.
LETTERBOX
: Stretches a letterboxed picture to full screen.
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES : Stretches and pans a letterboxed picture to full screen, which enables
viewing of subtitles in bottom.
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

3 4

HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:

1 2
3 4

Increase/decrease the horizontal clipping.


Increase/decrease the horizontal offset.
Increase/decrease the horizontal stretch.
Increase/decrease the vertical clipping.
Increase/decrease the vertical offset.
Increase/decrease the vertical stretch.

LANGUAGE:
Available languages are: English, Danish and Simplified Chinese. This will affect all
text and messages in the OSD menus.

User Controls
IND100064-1

30

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


UTILITIES:
Selecting this function will enable the user to configure the OSD menu, define
hot keys, verify BIOS Firmware version and miscellaneous operations.

1 2
3 4
2

USER SETTING: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

DPMS
DISPLAY INPUT
AUTO SOURCE SELECT
GAMMA

1 2
3 4

OSD SETTING: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


OSD H-POSITION:
OSD V-POSITION:
OSD BACKGROUND
OSD MENU ROTATE
USER TIME OUT

: Disable / Enable the DPMS function.


: Disable / Enable input source name upon power up.
: Off = Disable auto source select function.
Low = Auto source select enabled ONLY in power up.
High = Auto source select ALWAYS enabled.
: 1.0 / 1.6 / 2.2 - Adjusts gamma on TFT display.

FREEZE

Position the OSD menu horizontally.


Position the OSD menu vertically.
: Choose between Translucent or Opaque.
: Choose between Normal / Rotate. Will position the menu
either horizontally or vertically.
: Adjust the OSD menu time out period in a step of 5 seconds.
: Press + to freeze the display area, including PIP view.

ZOOM: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


ZOOM LEVEL:
HORIZONTAL PAN:
VERTICAL PAN:

1 2
3 4

DIRECT ACCESS 1 & 2: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


Define the hot key function (+ or - front/under hatch buttons) to one of these OSD functions:
Brightness / Contrast / Volume / Freeze / Zoom / Video Source / PIP * / No Function / Test Pattern
NOTE:
NOTE:

Zooms in the display area from center.


Pan the display area horizontally.
Pan the display area vertically.

* By pressing the assigned hot key, the sequence of the selected input video source are:
Analog RGB / Component / Video / Composite Video / S-Video. (Note: Component Video is not implemented)
Direct Access 1 default setting is VOLUME
Direct Access 2 default setting is NO FUNCTION

DISPLAY ORIENTATION: (Press + to access the sub-menu)


Will flip/inverse the display area including PIP view. Press + to choose between:
Normal / Horizontal Inverse / Vertical Inverse / Inverse

1 2

CALIBRATE RGB GAIN

1 2
3 4

LOAD (FACTORY) DEFAULTS: (Press + to access the sub-menu. NOTE: Only on newer models)
LOAD USER DEFAULT
SAVE USER DEFAULT
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT

User Controls
IND100064-1

: Color Calibration. Press + to automatically adjust it.

: Load your own personal custom settings.


: Save your own personal custom settings.
: Will reset the VGA controller settings to the factory preset.
Use caution when using this function, as this will override
your current settings. (Does not affect USER DEFAULTS)

31

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


1 2
3 4

TEST PATTERN

: Shows a generic test pattern.


(Introduced in the VGA BIOS Firmware V1.3x and up)

1 2
3 4

VIDEO SOURCE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select the type of input signal to show
fullscreen. Available inputs are: Analog RGB, Component Video*, Composite Video,
S-Video and DVI. (*Component Video is not implemented in our products.)
Pressing + will activate the input, and pressing - will detect automatically.

1 2
3 4

VOLUME:
This function is not implemented in displays, and have no operational effect.

1 2
3 4

EXIT MENU:
Selecting this function will exit the OSD menu.
Press + to exit and save the current settings.
Note:
The OSD settings will also automatically be stored in memory when the OSD exit on user timeout.

User Controls
IND100064-1

32

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset
Signal
SXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Graphic/Video
Modes Timings
Supported
Mode

Resolution

Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175

Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469

Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70

E1_70
E1_70
E1_70

640x350
640x350
640x350

E1_85
E1_85
E1_85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

640x350
640x350
640x350

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70

640x400
640x400
640x400

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85

640x400
640x400
640x400

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_70
T_70
T_70

720x400
720x400
720x400

28.322
28.322
28.322

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_85
T_85
T_85

720x400
720x400
720x400

35.500
35.500
35.500

37.927
37.927
37.927

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_62
V_62
V_62

736x480
736x480
736x480

28.200
28.200
28.200

31.403
31.403
31.403

62
62
62

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_60
V_60
V_60

640x480
640x480
640x480

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_67
V_67
V_67

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

67
67
67

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_72
V_72
V_72

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_75
V_75
V_75

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_85
V_85
V_85

640x480
640x480
640x480

36.000
36.000
36.000

43.269
43.269
43.269

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56

800x600
800x600
800x600

36.000
36.000
36.000

35.156
35.156
35.156

56
56
56

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60

800x600
800x600
800x600

40.000
40.000
40.000

37.879
37.879
37.879

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72

800x600
800x600
800x600

50.000
50.000
50.000

48.077
48.077
48.077

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75

800x600
800x600
800x600

49.500
49.500
49.500

46.875
46.875
46.875

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85

800x600
800x600
800x600

56.250
56.250
56.250

53.674
53.674
53.674

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_60
X_60
X_60

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

65.000
65.000
65.000

48.363
48.363
48.363

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

21
33

IND100104-1

Sync Mode

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (NON-DVI)


X_70
X_70
X_70

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

56.476
56.476
56.476

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_72
X_72
X_72

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

57.515
57.515
57.515

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_75
X_75
X_75

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

78.750
78.750
78.750

60.023
60.023
60.023

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_87I

44.900

35.522

87

Digital Separate Sync

44.900

35.522

87

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)

44.900

35.522

87

Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_85
X_85
X_85

1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

94.500
94.500
94.500

68.677
68.677
68.677

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

108.000
108.000
108.000

63.981
63.981
63.981

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

78.125
78.125
78.125

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

79.976
79.976
79.976

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_85
SX_85
SX_85

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

149.844
149.844
149.844

91.146
91.146
91.146

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

X_87I
X_87I

34
IND100104-1
22

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

APPENDIX II SUPPORTED MODES TABLE

Preset
Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)
Graphic/Video Modes Supported
Mode

Resolution

Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175

Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469

Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70

E1_70
E1_70
E1_70

640x350
640x350
640x350

E1_85
E1_85
E1_85

Sync Mode
Digital Separate Sync
Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

640x350
640x350
640x350

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70

640x400
640x400
640x400

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85

640x400
640x400
640x400

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_70
T_70
T_70

720x400
720x400
720x400

28.322
28.322
28.322

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_85
T_85
T_85

720x400
720x400
720x400

35.500
35.500
35.500

37.927
37.927
37.927

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_62
V_62
V_62

736x480
736x480
736x480

28.200
28.200
28.200

31.403
31.403
31.403

62
62
62

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_60
V_60
V_60

640x480
640x480
640x480

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_67
V_67
V_67

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

67
67
67

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_72
V_72
V_72

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_75
V_75
V_75

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_85
V_85
V_85

640x480
640x480
640x480

36.000
36.000
36.000

43.269
43.269
43.269

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56

800x600
800x600
800x600

36.000
36.000
36.000

35.156
35.156
35.156

56
56
56

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60

800x600
800x600
800x600

40.000
40.000
40.000

37.879
37.879
37.879

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72

800x600
800x600
800x600

50.000
50.000
50.000

48.077
48.077
48.077

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75

800x600
800x600
800x600

49.500
49.500
49.500

46.875
46.875
46.875

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85

800x600
800x600
800x600

56.250
56.250
56.250

53.674
53.674
53.674

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_60

1024x768

65.000

48.363

60

Digital Separate Sync

31

35
IND100104-7

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)


X_60
X_60

1024x768
1024x768

65.000
65.000

48.363
48.363

60
60

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_70
X_70
X_70

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

56.476
56.476
56.476

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_72
X_72
X_72

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

57.515
57.515
57.515

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_75
X_75
X_75

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

78.750
78.750
78.750

60.023
60.023
60.023

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_87I

44.900

35.522

87

Digital Separate Sync

44.900

35.522

87

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)

44.900

35.522

87

Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_85
X_85
X_85

1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

94.500
94.500
94.500

68.677
68.677
68.677

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

108.000
108.000
108.000

63.981
63.981
63.981

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

78.125
78.125
78.125

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

79.976
79.976
79.976

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

X_87I
X_87I

36
IND100104-7
32

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

APPENDIX II SUPPORTED MODES TABLE

Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (NON-DVI)


Graphic/Video Modes Supported
Mode

Resolution

Clk [MHz]

Horizontal freq Vertical freq [Hz]


[KHz]
31.469
70
31.469
70
31.469
70

Sync Mode

E1_70
E1_70
E1_70

640x350
640x350
640x350

25.175
25.175
25.175

E1_85

640x350

31.500

37.861

85

Digital Separate Sync

E1_85
E1_85

640x350
640x350

31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861

85
85

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_70

640x400

25.175

31.469

70

Digital Separate Sync

E2_70
E2_70

640x400
640x400

25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469

70
70

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_85

640x400

31.500

37.861

85

Digital Separate Sync

E2_85
E2_85

640x400
640x400

31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861

85
85

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_70
T_70
T_70

720x400
720x400
720x400

28.322
28.322
28.322

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_85
T_85
T_85

720x400
720x400
720x400

35.500
35.500
35.500

37.927
37.927
37.927

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_62
V_62
V_62

736x480
736x480
736x480

28.200
28.200
28.200

31.403
31.403
31.403

62
62
62

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_60
V_60
V_60

640x480
640x480
640x480

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_67

640x480

31.500

37.500

67

Digital Separate Sync

V_67
V_67

640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500

67
67

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_72
V_72
V_72

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_75

640x480

31.500

37.500

75

Digital Separate Sync

V_75
V_75

640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500

75
75

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_85

640x480

36.000

43.269

85

Digital Separate Sync

V_85
V_85

640x480
640x480

36.000
36.000

43.269
43.269

85
85

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_56

800x600

36.000

35.156

56

Digital Separate Sync

SV_56
SV_56

800x600
800x600

36.000
36.000

35.156
35.156

56
56

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_60

800x600

40.000

37.879

60

Digital Separate Sync

SV_60
SV_60

800x600
800x600

40.000
40.000

37.879
37.879

60
60

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_72

800x600

50.000

48.077

72

Digital Separate Sync

SV_72
SV_72

800x600
800x600

50.000
50.000

48.077
48.077

72
72

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_75

800x600

49.500

46.875

75

Digital Separate Sync

SV_75
SV_75

800x600
800x600

49.500
49.500

46.875
46.875

75
75

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_85

800x600

56.250

53.674

85

Digital Separate Sync

SV_85
SV_85

800x600
800x600

56.250
56.250

53.674
53.674

85
85

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

30

37
IND100104-8

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (NON-DVI)


X_60
X_60
X_60

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

65.000
65.000
65.000

48.363
48.363
48.363

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_70
X_70
X_70

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

56.476
56.476
56.476

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_72
X_72
X_72

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

57.515
57.515
57.515

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_75
X_75
X_75

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

78.750
78.750
78.750

60.023
60.023
60.023

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_87I

44.900

35.522

87

Digital Separate Sync

44.900

35.522

87

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)

44.900

35.522

87

Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_85

1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768

94.500

68.677

85

Digital Separate Sync

X_85
X_85

1024x768
1024x768

94.500
94.500

68.677
68.677

85
85

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_60

1280x1024

108.000

63.981

60

Digital Separate Sync

SX_60
SX_60

1280x1024
1280x1024

108.000
108.000

63.981
63.981

60
60

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_72

1280x1024

135.000

78.125

72

Digital Separate Sync

SX_72
SX_72

1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000

78.125
78.125

72
72

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_75

1280x1024

135.000

79.976

75

Digital Separate Sync

SX_75
SX_75

1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000

79.976
79.976

75
75

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

UX_60
UX_60
UX_60

1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200

112.288
112.288
112.288

75.000
75.000
75.000

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

X_87I
X_87I

38
IND100104-8

31

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

APPENDIX II SUPPORTED MODES TABLE

Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (DVI)


Graphic/Video Modes Supported
Mode

Resolution

Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175

Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469

Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70

E1_70
E1_70
E1_70

640x350
640x350
640x350

E1_85
E1_85
E1_85

Sync Mode
Digital Separate Sync
Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

640x350
640x350
640x350

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70

640x400
640x400
640x400

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85

640x400
640x400
640x400

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_70
T_70
T_70

720x400
720x400
720x400

28.322
28.322
28.322

31.469
31.469
31.469

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

T_85
T_85
T_85

720x400
720x400
720x400

35.500
35.500
35.500

37.927
37.927
37.927

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_62
V_62
V_62

736x480
736x480
736x480

28.200
28.200
28.200

31.403
31.403
31.403

62
62
62

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_60
V_60
V_60

640x480
640x480
640x480

25.175
25.175
25.175

31.469
31.469
31.469

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_67
V_67
V_67

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

67
67
67

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_72
V_72
V_72

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.861
37.861
37.861

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_75
V_75
V_75

640x480
640x480
640x480

31.500
31.500
31.500

37.500
37.500
37.500

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

V_85
V_85
V_85

640x480
640x480
640x480

36.000
36.000
36.000

43.269
43.269
43.269

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56

800x600
800x600
800x600

36.000
36.000
36.000

35.156
35.156
35.156

56
56
56

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60

800x600
800x600
800x600

40.000
40.000
40.000

37.879
37.879
37.879

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72

800x600
800x600
800x600

50.000
50.000
50.000

48.077
48.077
48.077

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75

800x600
800x600
800x600

49.500
49.500
49.500

46.875
46.875
46.875

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85

800x600
800x600
800x600

56.250
56.250
56.250

53.674
53.674
53.674

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_60

1024x768

65.000

48.363

60

Digital Separate Sync

33

39
IND100104-2

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (DVI)


X_60
X_60

1024x768
1024x768

65.000
65.000

48.363
48.363

60
60

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)


Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_70
X_70
X_70

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

56.476
56.476
56.476

70
70
70

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_72
X_72
X_72

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

75.000
75.000
75.000

57.515
57.515
57.515

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_75
X_75
X_75

1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

78.750
78.750
78.750

60.023
60.023
60.023

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_87I

44.900

35.522

87

Digital Separate Sync

44.900

35.522

87

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)

44.900

35.522

87

Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

X_85
X_85
X_85

1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768

94.500
94.500
94.500

68.677
68.677
68.677

85
85
85

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

108.000
108.000
108.000

63.981
63.981
63.981

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

78.125
78.125
78.125

72
72
72

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75

1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024

135.000
135.000
135.000

79.976
79.976
79.976

75
75
75

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

UX_60
UX_60
UX_60

1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200

112.288
112.288
112.288

75.000
75.000
75.000

60
60
60

Digital Separate Sync


Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

---

14.318

15.734

60

---

---

17.75

15.625

50

---

X_87I
X_87I

40
IND100104-2
34

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

User Controls
STD Products

41

Operation
POWER SWITCH:

This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.

Power ON: To turn the display on, press down


the power switch. The power light
indicator will turn green.

Assignable Hotkeys

Auto Power LED Dimmer

(If no RGB signal sync is present, a message


will appear in the display)

Power OFF: To turn the display off, press and


hold the power switch down for
3 seconds.

Power Switch
Brightness Knob

Power Light Indicator

DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS:

This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.

ASSIGNABLE HOTKEYS:

The user can assign various display functions as hotkeys (increase/decrease).


This will enable the user to quickly adjust the brightness, image size, contrast or other functions to
control the image. To assign these hotkeys, enter the EXTENDED MENU/DIRECT ACCESS menu and
change them to the desired hotkey function. Default hotkeys are set to increase/decrease contrast.

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

42

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

User Controls / OSD Menu


MENU

UP / DOWN Buttons

Adjust Buttons -/+

USER CONTROLS:

1: Press the MENU button. The OSD Menu shows the functions menu.
2: To modify the values or access to its submenu, use the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+).
3: To select another function use the Select Buttons / Up or Down to navigate up or down.

Note:

- The image quality depends on the computer or video card you are using.
- Select a crisp and bright image for display while adjustment takes place.
- The modified settings is automatically saved on menu exit. The user can also
decide whenever to deactivate this function. This means the user has to save the settings
manually by selecting the Exit Menu function and choosing save.

AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS:

The OSD Menu provides On Screen Display of certain common functions.


Pressing the MENU button will bring up the menu with its available functions that can be adjusted.
The selected function is highlighted. Often the selected function also have some quick information
(status line) which is displayed in the bottom of the menu. The user can also use the MENU button to exit
any menu or sub-menu.
To select another function, use the Select Buttons to navigate down/up on the menu. All modifications
will instantly be updated on screen. Some of the menus also have sub-menus where you can modify
more parameters, these are marked with an > arrow. They can be accessed by pressing the
Adjust Button (+) button as the OSD Menu describes.
Brightness
Contrast
Tuning
Autosetup
Image Adjust>
OSD Menu>
>System Info>
Extended Menu>
Exit Menu
PC
XGA

HF=48.73kHz

Selected function
VF=60.0Hz

Status line

Above: Sample of OSD Menu

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

43

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


Brightness
124
Use this function to adjust the image brightness in relation to the background.
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the value. The slider on screen will also
move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value. Range 0 to 236
114
Contrast
Use this function to adjust the overall image and background screen brightness.
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the value. The slider on screen will also
move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value. Range 0 to 210

Tuning
17
Use this function to fine tune the data sampling position (adjust display quality).
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the value. The slider on screen will also
move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value. Range 0 to 31
Autosetup
Use this function to automatically set up the display area like positions, image size, tuning etc.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate auto setup.
Image Adjustments> (Sub-menu)
In this sub-menu the user can adjust the horizontal position, vertical position, horizontal size, sharpness
and the 3 component RGB (Red, Green, Blue) color saturations of the display area.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:

Image Horizontal Position

32

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area horizontally (left or right).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 58

Image Vertical Position

31

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area vertically (up or down).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 56

Image Horizontal Size

1340

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will expand or shrink the display area from center horizontally.
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 1318 to 1358

Sharpness

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the sharpness level of the display area.
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 3

continues on next page........

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

44

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


....continued from previous page.

Red

18

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the red color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35

Green

18

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the green color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35

Blue

18

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the blue color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35

Reset RGB to default

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will reset any modifed RGB settings back to the previous
setting before the user entered this sub-menu.

Back>

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

45

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


OSD Menu> (Sub-menu)
In this sub-menu the user can modify the horizontal position, vertical position, horizontal size,
transparency, time out and auto save parameters for the OSD Menu itself.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:

Menu Hori Position

31

Menu Vert Position

30

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu horizontally (left or right).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 62
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu vertically (up or down).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 60

Transparency

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the OSD Menu transparent level in a stepwise
manner. The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a
numerical value. Range 0 to 3

Time Out

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will modify the timeout of the OSD Menu. The parameter
selected will be highlighted. Values are in seconds before the OSD Menu will automatically disappear
from the display area. Available parameters are: 10/20/30/45/60/cont
Choosing cont (never auto exit) requires that the user manually exits the menu.

Auto Save

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will choose whenever the modified settings will be
automatically saved when the OSD Menu exits. The parameter selected will be highlighted.

-When set to Off the user will manually have to save the modfied settings using the Exit Menu
function and choosing save.
-When set to On all settings modified will automatically be saved when the user exist the menu, or
the menu exits itself based on a timeout value.

Back>

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

46

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


System Info> (Sub-menu)
The status line will show some important technical information about the current display mode/controller:
Example: PC
XGA HF=48.73kHz VF=60.0Hz

On this sub-menu the user can view various technical information for the internal graphics controller and
the OSD Menu software. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu:

Display type

Shows the suggested display technology the user is running. Also detects what resolution the user is
running on the display area. Example: TFT LCD 1024x768

Model and Serial No

Shows the internal graphic controller model and its serial number.* Example: ACL-1024
* (Note: This is not the same as the display product serial number from Hatteland Display AS)

Bios version

Shows the BIOS version of the OSD Menu software. Example: 00.03-00.03

Run time

Shows the uptime for the display itself. The user can reset this internal clock by pressing the
Adjust Button (+) and hold it for 5 seconds.
Example: 480h00m (480 hours and 0 minutes)

Back>

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

47

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

OSD Menu Functions


Extended Menu> (Sub-menu)
On this sub-menu the user can modify various OSD Menu parameters such as Direct Access (hot-keys)
and language for all the OSD Menu and its submenus including any messages.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:

DOS Text or Graphics

Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will select between Text or Graphics
The parameter selected will be highlighted. Leave this setting to Graphics for best results.

Direct Access 1>

Allow the user to define the hot-keys (-) or (+) / Up or Down ) to one of the OSD functions.
When the user presses one of the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) or Select Buttons / Up or Down the
assigned hot-key will increase / decrease the value without the user entering the OSD Menu itself.
This can be very time consuming if the user has to modify any of the OSD functions quickly.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:

Brightness

Selecting this function will assign Brightness parameter changes to the


Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) buttons.

Contrast

Selecting this function will assign Contrast parameter changes to the


Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) buttons.

Back>

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the sub-menu one level with the
modified settings intact and saved.

Direct Access 2>

The same procedure applies here as above on: Direct Access 1>
The user can now assign the Select Buttons / Up or Down to the selected OSD function.

Language

Allow the user to configure the OSD Menu language for all the OSD Menu and its submenus
including any messages. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu
which enable the user to select the preferred language. The parameter selected will be highlighted.
Available languages are: English, Italian, Francais, Espanol, Svenska, Nederlands, Deutsche.

Back>

Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the language sub-menu with the
modified settings intact and saved. Pressing it once more will also exit out to the main menu.

Exit Menu
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will save the settings and exit the menu.
Pressing the Adjust Button (-) will exit the menu but does not save the modifed settings.

User Controls - STD


IND100064-2

48

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Preset Signal Timing XGA Displays


This TFT display is capable of detecting the following resolutions along with its preset signal timing setting.
These settings have been pre-programmed by the RGB controller factory. The following industrial standard
settings are supported for this display:
Mode

Resolution

Clk (MHz)

V_60
SV_56
SV_60
X_60

640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768

25.175
36.000
40.000
65.500

User Manual - STD


IND100104-3

Horiz.Freq(KHz)
31.469
35.156
37.879
48.363

49

Vert.Freq(Hz)
59.940
56.250
60.317
60.004

Sync Gate
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

50

Specifications

51

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 10T06 STD


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

10.4 inch viewable image size


Active Matrix, Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
RGB vertical stripe

339 (W), 256 (H), 54 (D) mm


Weight: 3,5 kg (approx)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)

Environmental Considerations:
Operating

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

Storage

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Supported Signal Inputs:

: 640 x 480 * (Including 640 x 350)

Available Options:

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Power Specifications:

Power Supply Options:


115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC

Accessories:
Touchscreen

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *

Resolutions:
VGA

: 15pin mini D-SUB (female)


: Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 10T06 STD A1
: Screw terminal Model JH 10T06 STD A2

User Controls:

Synchronisation:

Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

RGB (PC) signal


AC Power signal
DC Power signal

: Model JH 10T06 STD A1


: Model JH 10T06 STD A2

JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen

=
=
=
=

Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance: JH 10T06 STD


Standard: 100cm*
Steering: 70cm*

(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 10T06 MMD)

52
IND100129-11

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

10.4 inch viewable image size


Active Matrix, Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
RGB vertical stripe

339 (W), 256 (H), 54 (D) mm


Weight: 3,5 kg (approx)
Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

:
:
:
:
:
:

Accessories:
Touchscreen

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 10T06 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 10T06 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)

Synchronisation:

User Controls:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

Environmental Considerations:

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz to 85 Hz

Operating
Storage

Supported Signal Inputs:


Resolutions:
VGA

: 640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Available Options:

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen

=
=
=
=

Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.

Power Specifications:

Power Supply Options:


115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

: Model JH 10T06 MMD A1


: Model JH 10T06 MMD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance: JH 10T06 MMD

Standard: 100cm

Steering: 70cm

53
IND100129-10

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 15T05 STD


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

15.0 inch viewable image size


Color Active Matrix LCD Module
a-Si Thin Film Transistor (TFT)

412 (W), 345 (H), 58 (D) mm


Weight: 7 kg (approx w/bracket)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions

Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA -> XGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *

RGB (PC) signal


AC Power signal
DC Power signal

User Controls:

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED

Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 20% to 85% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 5% to 85% (non condensing)

Storage

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Supported Signal Inputs:


Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA

: 15pin mini D-SUB (female)


: Std IEC Inlet Model JH 15T05 STD A1
: Screw terminal Model JH 15T05 STD A2

: 640 x 480
: 800 x 600
: 1024 x 768 *

Available Options:

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV

Power Specifications:

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.

Power Supply Options:


115VAC/60Hz or 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC

: Model JH 15T05 STD A1


: Model JH 15T05 STD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating

: 40 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance: JH 15T05 STD


Standard: 130cm*
Steering: 100cm*

(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 15T05 MMD)

54
IND100129-52

= Bracket *
= Rotary Bracket *
= Sun Visor *

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

15.0 inch viewable image size


Color Active Matrix LCD Module
a-Si Thin Film Transistor (TFT)

412 (W), 345 (H), 58 (D) mm


Weight: 7 kg (approx w/bracket)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

:
:
:
:
:
:

Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet Model JH 15T05 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 15T05 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)


: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)

Synchronisation:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

User Controls:

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz

Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED

Environmental Considerations:
Operating

Supported Signal Inputs:

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA

Storage

: 640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)


: 800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
: 1024 x 768 *

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz or 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC

: Model JH 15T05 MMD A1


: Model JH 15T05 MMD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating

: 40 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance:

JH 15T05 MMD-A1 Standard: 125cm


JH 15T05 MMD-A2 Standard: 130cm

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Available Options:

JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV
JH XPR
Touch Screen

=
=
=
=
=

Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
External Power Relay
Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.

Steering: 85cm
Steering: 100cm

55
IND100129-49

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +50 deg. C


Humidity 20% to 85% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 5% to 85% (non condensing)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

19.0 inch viewable image size


Active Matrix, Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
MVA Premium Technology

483 (W), 444 (H), 68 (D) mm


Weight: 12 kg (approx w/bracket)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1280 x 1024
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
15 ms (typical), black to white
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
376.32 (H) x 301.056 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)

Synchronisation:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

:
:
:
:
:
:

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet Model JH 19T02 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 19T02 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)


: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)

User Controls:

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz

Environmental Considerations:

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Operating
Storage

Supported Signal Inputs:

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA

:
:
:
:

640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)


800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024 *

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Power Specifications:

Power Supply Options:


115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC

: Model JH 19T02 MMD A1


: Model JH 19T02 MMD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating

: 100 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance:

JH 19T02 MMD-A1 Standard: 125cm


JH 19T02 MMD-A2 Standard: 90cm

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Available Options:

JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 19TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 18T04 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 19T02 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 19T02 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.
(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)

Steering: 85cm
Steering: 65cm

56
IND100129-50

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

20.1 inch viewable image size


Active Matrix
Thin Film Transistor (Super-TFT)

534 (W), 481 (H), 79.50 (D) mm


Weight: 14 kg (approx w/bracket)
Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1280 x 1024
0.312 (H) x 0.312 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
399.36 (H) x 319.49 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

:
:
:
:
:
:

Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

Synchronisation:

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 20T03 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 20T03 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)


: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)

User Controls:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED

Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz

Environmental Considerations:

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Operating
Storage

Supported Signal Inputs:


Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA

:
:
:
:

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)


800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024 *

Available Options:

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video

* Recommended for optimum picture quality

Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC

: Model JH 20T03 MMD A1


: Model JH 20T03 MMD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating

: 100 W (max)

Compass Safe Distance:

JH 20T03 MMD-A1

JH MMD BR
JH MMDRO
JH 20TSV
JH VESA 20T03
JH VBUF
JH SCOM
JH XPR
ECDIS Version
Touch Screen

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Vesa Bracket *
Video Buffer (1)
Remote Control
External Power Relay
JH 20T03 MMD E1
Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.
(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)

Standard: 200cm

57
IND100129-5

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

Steering: 135cm

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

20.1 inch viewable image size


a-Si TFT (Thin Film Transistor) Active Matrix
SPVA (Super Patterned Vertical Alignment) mode

534 (W) 481 (H) 73 (D)


Weight: 15 kg (approx w/bracket)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1600 x 1200
0.255 (H) x 0.255 (V) mm
16 ms (typical), black to white
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 89 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
408.0 (H) x 306.0 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

Synchronisation:

:
:
:
:
:
:

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet Model JH 20T06 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 20T06 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)


: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)

User Controls:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz

Environmental Considerations:

* Recommended 60Hz for optimum picture quality. 56 Hz only in 800x600

Operating
Storage

Supported Signal Inputs:

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
UXGA

:
:
:
:
:

640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)


800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1200*

Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Available Options:

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video

* Recommended for optimum picture quality. (60 Hz only)

Power Specifications:

Power Supply Options:


115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC

: Model JH 20T06 MMD A1


: Model JH 20T06 MMD A2

Power Consumption:
Operating

: 100 W (max)

JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 20TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 20T03 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 20T06 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 20T06 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.
(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)

58
IND100129-59

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Specifications - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)


Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TFT Technology:

Physical Dimensions:

23.1 inch viewable image size


Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
MVA Premium technology

584 (W), 534 (H), 72 (D) mm


Weight: 17 kg (approx w/bracket)

Input Signal Terminal:

TFT Characteristics:

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Active Display Area :
Max Colors
:

1600 x 1200
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
600:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
(@ CR > 10)
470.4 (H) x 352.8 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)

DVI-D (PC) signal


RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal

Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

:
:
:
:
:
:

DVI-D Input 24pin Connector


15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet Model JH 23T02 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 23T02 MMD A2

: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)


: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)

Synchronisation:

User Controls:

Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm

On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED

Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz
* Recommended 60Hz for optimum picture quality. 56 Hz only in 800x600

Supported Signal Inputs:


Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
UXGA

:
:
:
:
:

640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)


800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1200*

Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating

: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C


Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
Storage
: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Safety Considerations: Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)

Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.

Available Options:

Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality. (60 Hz only)

Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC
Power Consumption:
Operating

: Model JH 23T02 MMD A1


: Model JH 23T02 MMD A2

*Option: Standard or custom logo and color


*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.

: 100 W (max)

(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)

Compass Safe Distance: JH 23T02 MMD-A1

Standard: 260cm

Steering: 160cm

59
IND100129-7

JH 23TBRT01A1= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 23TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 23T01 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 23T02 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 23T02 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

60

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Technical Drawings

61

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

4,50

309

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

Custom logo is optional

163 viewing area

256

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

339
322

SIDE VIEW

313

BACK VIEW

10

4701

10

11

12

11

1:1.5

Size: A1 Format
Scale:

-Drawing number:

Approved by:

12

Revision:

JH10T06STD-A1
Mechanical DesignerProjection:

Jakob Hatteland Display


msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats

16-12-2002

Date:

Metric thread M4 or 4,50


4 places

PANEL CUT OUT

JH10T06STD-A1 EXCL. BRACKET

ISOMETRIC VIEW

42

FRONT VIEW

216 viewing area

146
55

14
54

226

15

42

42

IND100132-13

62

230

Standard Version
42

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 STD

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 STD

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-13

63

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)

Standard Version

IND100132-12

64

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-12

65

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 STD

Standard Version

IND100132-72

66

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 STD

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-72

67

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)

Standard Version

IND100132-71

68

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-71

69

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)

Standard Version

IND100132-73

70

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-73

71

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)

Standard Version

IND100132-5

72

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)

Bracket(s) Version

IND100132-5

73

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)

Standard Version

IND100132-82

74

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

6,50

539

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

JH23T02MMD-A1

534

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

568

584

FRONT VIEW

281
126

SIDE VIEW

ISOMETRIC VIEW
7

165

11

4701

Mechanical DesignerProjection:

10

Jakob Hatteland Display


msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats

18-12-2002

Date:

13

1:3

Size: A1 Format
Scale:

148

11

PANEL CUT OUT

Optional holes 6,50


Screwed from back side of panel
13
4 places horizontally

543

BACK VIEW

10

Metric thread M6 or 6,50


4 places vertically

148

13

13

148

14
72

501

14

110

114

IND100132-7

75

110
Revision:

12

12

A000176-1

Drawing number:

Approved by:

--

505

Standard Version
114

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)

Bracket(s) Version

76

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

175
129

66
43
20
0

TOP VIEW

FRONT VIEW

320
345
360
385
442

50

BOTTOM VIEW

557

85

SIDE VIEW

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

18

23

IND100132-7
6

6
8

10

ROOF MOUNTING

556

536

32

4701

12

11

1:3

Size: A1 Format
Scale:

--

Revision:

12

A000176-1

Drawing number:

Approved by:

JH23T02MMD-A1
Mechanical DesignerProjection:

Jakob Hatteland Display


msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats

10

11

BACK VIEW

18-12-2002

Date:

10

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)

Technical Drawings - Accessories

77

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories


Suitable for: JH 10T06 MMD and JH 10T06 STD models

10 Inch Sun Visor

IND100132-47

78

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories

17 >> 23 Rotary Bracket

IND100132-46

79

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

20"

18"
19"

17"

46,97

18,00

6,50

197,06

237,06

347,06

396,56

237,06

277,06

362,63

412,13

261,57

301,62

411,57

461,07

50,00

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

165,53

173,32

34,72

42,50

66,97

296,34
304,13

IND100132-69

80

197,78

17 Inch > 20 Inch Bracket


328,59

ThisdocumentisthepropertyofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Thisdocumentandanyauthorizedreproductionthereof,mustnotbeusedin
anywayagainsttheinterestofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Anyauthorizedreproduction,inwholeorinpart,mustincludethislegend.

348,59

19,70

42,70

65,70

11

11

10

10

ExampleAssemblyBracket17"

10

11

10

10

11

11

12

Konstr./Tegnet

4701

11

Projeksjon

1:2

Mlest.(A1Format)

12

Aluminium 2mm
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium

Materiale

Erstattetav

ID
P000202-1
3D001BKD-A4
P000175-1
P000180-1
P000175-2
P000180-2
P000199-1
M4 X 0.7 X 10
P000197-1
P000200-1
M6 X 1 X 20 HEX

A000067-1

Pos.nr Antall Beskrivelse


1
4
Skive mellom brakett og brakettfeste
2
1
Backcover JH17T01MMD-A1
3
1
brakkettfeste hyre
4
1
brakett hyre
5
1
brakkettfeste venstre
6
1
brakett venstre
7
1
senter-brakett
8
4
DIN 7985A_M4 X 0.7_10_NONE
9
4
Flatskive 17W07191
10
4
underlagsskive M6x1,5mm 48506
11
4
DIN 7991_M6 X 1_20_NONE

ExampleExplodedViewConfigurationBracket17"

JakobHattelandDispla
y
msosen
N-5578NedreVat
s

Dato

17-01-2002

10

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories

15 TFT to 19 TFT adapter

IND100132-43

81

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

IND100132-44

19 TFT to 21 CRT adapter 82

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

32
28

98

117

47,50

23

34

ARB M6 * 4 stks.

11 Countersunk M6 hole * 4 stks.

533

R 3,25 * 2 stks.

6,50 * 2 stks.

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

384

411

455
448

176,50

R5

4701

Jakob Hatteland Display AS


msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats

Konstr./Tegnet

02-04-2002

485,50
499
510
Dato

480

Projeksjon

Pos.nr
1

Antall
1

1:3

Mlest. (A3 Format)

P000460-1

Beskrivelse
Adapterplate 19" TFT -> 21" CRT

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Erstattet av

ID
P000460-1

Materiale
Aluminium

Technical Drawings - Accessories

356,50

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories


Shown for 19 inch display. Other sizes available.

19 Inch Sun Visor

IND100132-67

83

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

VESA Bracket
4

4 mounting holes
VESA Bracket - Backcover
M6x12 screws

98

242

Date:

100

10

Mechanical DesignerProjection:

11

11

Size: A1 Format
Scale:

Approved by:

--

Revision:

12

84

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.

10

Drawing number:

12

H
1:3

Jakob Hatteland Display


msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats

222

75

130

160

IND100132-45
157

Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Technical Drawings - Accessories


Shown for 19 inch display. Other sizes available.

85

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

2




""



"





 

  

This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.


This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.




!
1"2!

IND100132-80
1"

Water Cover

 "

%&'()



 !"#





Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

*++



,-&.$ /0

$




Technical Drawings - Accessories


Shown for 19 inch display. Other sizes available.

86

INB100005-1 (Rev 7)

General - Appendix

87

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Basic Trouble-shooting
COMMON ERRORS: (Applies for Display products and Panel / Maritime / Rack Computers)
If for some reason there should be something wrong with the picture quality or no picture present,
check the symptoms carefully and try to cure it with the hints below:
NO PICTURE / LED BEHAVIOUR:
If there is no light at all in the LED at the FRONT, check power cables. If the LED in front is green
then check if the brightness knob is turned to the right (max brightness). If still no picture, check
if there is a VGA signal on the External VGA connector. If you have a picture on the external VGA
connector please look in BIOS documentation/chapter for correct display settings in BIOS.
Lack of image is most likely to be caused by incorrect connection, lack of power, or wrong BIOS
settings.
SCROLLING / UNSTABLE IMAGE:
Signal cable may not be completely connected to computer or TFT display.
Check the pin assignments and signal timings of the display and your video card with respect to
recommended timing and pin assignments. Make sure that the video card is compatible and that it
is properly seated / installed on the computer.
DISPLAY AREA IS NOT CENTERED / SIZED CORRECTLY
Make sure that a supported video mode has been selected on the display, or on the
video card / system. If it is impossible to position the image correctly, ie the image adjustment
controls will not move the image far enough, then test it again using another graphics card for the
PC system. This situation can occur with a custom graphics card that is not close to standard
timings or if something is in the graphics line that may be affecting the signal, such as a signal
splitter (please note that normally a signal splitter will not have any adverse effect).
If it is impossible to change to the correct resolution/color depth, check if you have the right VGA
driver installed in your system.
IMAGE APPEARANCE:
A faulty TFT panel can have black lines, pixel errors, failed sections, flickering or flashing image.
Incorrect graphics card refresh rate, resolution or interlaced mode will probably cause the image
to be the wrong size, it may scroll, flicker badly or possibly even no image is present. Sparkling on
the display may be a faulty TFT panel signal cable.
CONTINUED FAILURE:
If unit after unit keeps failing, consider and investigate whether you are short circuiting the
equipment or doing something else seriously wrong.
DEW CONDENSATION BEHIND GLASS:
Power on the TFT product and set brightness to 100%. Turn off any automatic screensavers on
PC or similar. During minutes the dew will be gone. To speed up the process, use a fan heater for
a reasonable time. Do not overheat the TFT product.

General - Appendix
IND100077-8

88

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Testing & Approvals Overview


These products have been tested / type approved by the following classification societies:
Type Number

Tests

Certificated by

JH 10T06 STD Ax

EN60529 (IP66) (Applies only for flush mounting)

JH 10T06 MMD Ax

EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)


EN60529 (IP66) (Applies only for flush mounting)

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai


DNV - Det Norske Veritas
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping

JH 15T05 MMD Ax

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)

DNV - Det Norske Veritas

JH 19T02 MMD Ax

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)


EN61174 (IEC1174) - Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (BSH)

GL - Germanischer Lloyd
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
KR - Korean Register Of Shipping
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping
BV - Bureau Veritas

JH 20T03 MMD Ax

EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)


EN60529 (IP66) (Applies only for flush mounting)
EN61174 (IEC1174) - Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (BSH)

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai


ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
BV - Bureau Veritas

EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)


EN60529 (IP66) (Applies only for flush mounting)
EN61174 (IEC1174) - Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (BSH)

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai


ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
BV - Bureau Veritas
KR - Korean Shipping (for ECDIS versions)

JH 15T05 STD Ax

JH 20T06 MMD Ax
JH 23T02 MMD Ax

General - Appendix
IND100077-10

89

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Testing & Approvals Overview


These products have been tested / type approved by the following classification societies:
Type Number

Tests

Certificated by

JH 12T01 MMC A4

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)


IACS E10

DNV - Det Norske Veritas


ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping

JH 15T05 MMC A1

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)


IACS E10

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai


GL - Germanischer Lloyd
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping

JH 19T02 MMC A1

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)


IACS E10

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai


GL - Germanischer Lloyd
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping

JH 23T02 MMC A1

EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th) (Pending)


IACS E10 (Pending)

General - Appendix
IND100077-10

90

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Declaration of Conformity
We, manufacturer
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S
msosen, N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
declare under our sole responsibility that the
MMD, MMC, STD and MIL products
is in conformity with the following standards
in accordance with the EMC Directive

EN 55022 Class A - Emission


EN 55024 - Immunity

Signature:........................................................
Frode Grindheim
Technical Director
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S

Signature:........................................................
Arne Kristiansen
Development Engineer
Jakob Hatteland Technology A/S

Date: 08 September 2004

Return Of Goods Information


Return of goods: (Applies not to warrenty/normal service/repair of products)

Before returning goods, please contact your system supplier before sending anything directly
to JHD. When you return products after loan, test, evaulation or products subject for credit,
you must ensure that all accessories received from our warehouse is returned to JHD.
This applies to cables, powermodules and additional equipment except screws or similar, user
manual, datasheets or other written paper documents. Furthermore, the product must not have any
minor / medium or severe scratches, chemical spills or similar on the backcover, front frame or
glass.
This is needed to credit the invoice 100%. Missing parts will not be subject for credit, and you will
not get total credit for returned product. You will either be charged separately or the amount is
withdrawn from the credit. If you noticed that our product missed accessories upon receival, we
are of course open for further investigation and positive solutions. If you decide to ship the missing
items on the after hand, you will get 100% credit for that particular invoice or items received at JHD
incoming goods control. Please contact our sales personnel if additional questions.
Current prices apply as per May 2004:
Signal Cable DSUB 15P Male or Female - Approx 1,8meters

Price:

170,- NOK each

Signal Cable BNC 5P - Approx 1,8meters

Price:

350,- NOK each

RS-232 serial cable DSUB 9P - Approx 1,8meters

Price:

80,- NOK each

Powercable 110 / 220 VAC (European or US standard) - Approx 1,8meters

Price:

50,- NOK each

Minor / Medium or severe scratches / chemical spill on backcover

Price: 1300,- NOK

Any scratch, chemical spill or similar on front frame (including glass)


(Prices are approx, and any deviation are evaulated during incoming goods control)

Price: 2000,- NOK

Approved packaging methods/materials: (Applies to all shipments to JHD)


When returning goods, please make sure you surround the product with the following material,
whenever possible: Original packaging from JHD, firm foam material, bubble wrap or lots of
PadPack paper or Foam chips/polyester wrapped in sealed plastic bags. In any case, always use a
solid cardboard box to surround everything.
Not approved packaging methods/materials are: Foam chips, expanded polyester, clothes, nothing,
or too little, or anything that will crumble and get into the ventilation holes of products and
cardboard boxes that are not suitable to secure the product during shipment.

General - Appendix
IND100077-14

92

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Terms
The Hatteland Group - Terms Of Sale And Delivery:
1) APPLICATION
The terms of sale and delivery include the following companies: Autostore AS, Jakob Hatteland Assembly AS,
Jakob Hatteland Computer AS, Jakob Hatteland Display AS, Jakob Hatteland Logistics, Jakob Hatteland Supply AS
and Jakob Hatteland Technology AS.
2) PRICE
a) The price is per each, if nothing else has been stated, VAT not included. Price is based on the prices from our
suppliers, current custom rates, taxes, rate of exchange and international raw material prices. We reserve ourselves
the rights to adjustments in case of alternation on the above mentioned.
b) Included in the price is the suppliers standard packing. In case of re-packing/smaller quantities we reserve
ourselves the right to add an additional sum for warrantable packing according to CECC 0015 (Basic inspection for
protection of electrostatic sensitive devices)
3) VALIDITY
If nothing else has been stated in our quotation, the offer is valid for 30 days from the date of quotation.
4) PACKAGE QUOTATION
A package quotation means that all the components offered, must be ordered by us. If one component or more are
removed from the quotation, the prices given in the package quotation are not valid.
5) TERMS OF PAYMENT
Cash on delivery or payment in advance. Net granted for companies, schools and institutions only, according to
agreement. In case of too late payment 1.5% interest/month will be charged. Seller has mortage rights in the goods
delivered until the purchase price, additional interests and charges have been paid in full. Accepted bill is not
considered as payment until it has been honoured in full.
6) TIME OF DELIVERY
The quoted time of delivery is based on information from our suppliers. We disclaim any responsibility for the
consequences of any delay or cancellation from our suppliers. Belated delivery gives not solely the right for
cancellation.
7) DELIVERY POINT OF TIME
Goods are considered delivered to customer when handed over to charterer.
8) FREIGHT / PACKING / FORWARDING FEE
Jakob Hatteland Display AS charge NOK 50,- in forwarding fee for orders below NOK 1000,-.
For orders below NOK 1000,- Jakob Hatteland Supply AS charge freight according to expenses, and NOK 25,- for
packing. For handling requested beyond ordinary hours NOK 250,- is charged. Express service is charged with NOK
100,- + freight charges. All the companies charge freight according to expenses for orders above NOK 1000,-. VAT
not included.
9) COMPLAINT
By receipt customer must check goods for obvious defects which have to be claimed within 8 days from receipt.
Otherwise acceptance of complaint can not be counted on.
10) GUARANTEE / SERVICES
Time of guarantee is calculated from our date of shipment, and applies to the extent that we are covered by our
suppliers guarantee regulations. The guarantee does no longer apply if:
I) there has been encroached upon the goods without sellers consent
II) terms of payment is not fulfilled
III) the goods have been damaged due to unskilled treatment
IV) components which are sensitive for static electricity have not been unpacked and treated in a secure way.
Minimum requirements: CECC 00015s standards for handling of such components. The guarantee does not include
fair wear and tear.

General - Appendix
IND100077-7

93

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Terms
11) RESPONSIBLITY
Seller undertake to deliver faultless and functional capable goods according to existing technical specifications.
Seller disclaim responsibility for any damage or loss which directly or indirectly may be caused due to failure or defect
with the delivered goods, if carelessness from the seller can be limited up to the cost of the goods. The suppliers
responsibility for defects with the supplied goods do not include secondary damage or loss.
12) CANCELLATION / RETURN
Binding sales contract is concluded when we have confirmed customers purchase order. Any disagreements in our
order confirmation must be reported to seller within 6 days. The agreement can not be altered without our permission,
after acceptance from our supplier. If goods are wanted to be returned, a Return No must be assigned from seller.
Returned goods without a Return No will not be accepted. By return of stock listed goods, 20% return fee is charged.
Returned goods are shipped on customers account and risk.
13) LOAN, RENT and DEMO
When borrowing of goods for demo/test, the date of return must be added to the document. If no date has been
stated, date of return is two weeks from the date of the document. Before return, seller must be contacted for a
Return No (RTK). Goods which have been sold with an agreed right of return within stated terms, shall also have a
Return No. The Return No must be obtained before the stated date of return. Returned goods without a Return No, or
which have not been packed in original packing, will not be accepted.
14) LIMITATIONS
If any of our suppliers claim limited delivery terms towards us, our terms of delivery will be restriced according to
those.
15) SOFTWARE
Sold or borrowed software is not allowed to be copied or spread in other ways, without a written permission.
16) RE-EXPORT
Goods delivered from seller may be subject to special rules of exportation in their suppliers native country. Buyer is
responsible to obtain necessary permissions for further export/re-sale.
17) QUESTION IN DISPUTE
To settle any dispute the Karmsund Herredsrett is approved the legal venue.

General - Appendix
IND100077-7

94

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Terms
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CONSIGNEE
1) CONTROL
Control the goods immediately by receipt. Examine the quantity towards the invoice/packinglist/shipping documents.
Look for outward defects on the packing which may indicate damage on or loss of contents. Control the container and
the seals for any defects.
2) SECURING EVIDENCE
When defects on the goods have been found, evidence must be secured, and seller must be informed. Call the
transporter and point out the defects. Add a description of the defects on the goods receipt, the forwarders copy of
the way-bill or on the driving slip.
3) RESCUE
Bound the damage. Try to restrict the damage and the loss. Seller will compensate expences incurred due to
reasonable security efforts in addition to damage and loss.
4) COMPLAINT
Write immediately a complaint to the transporter or his agent. Forward immediately the complaint to the transporter or
his agent, and hold the transporter responsible for the defects. The complaint must be sent at the latest:
- for carriage by sea:
within 3 days
- for overland / air transportation
within 7 days
5) DOCUMENTATION
For any claims the following documentation is required, and must be forwared to the company or their agent:
invoice, way-bill and/or bill of landing, and/or statement of arrival, inspection document, besides a copy of the letter of
complaint to the transporter.

General - Appendix
IND100077-7

95

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Notes
General Notes: (For all products)

- The unit is type approved according to EN60945 (1997), 4.4, equipment category b) protected
from the weather.
- Other type approvals applies for the different products.
Please see Testing & Approvals Overview section in this manual for more information.
- Use of brightness and push buttons may inhibit visibility of information at night.

Note for ECDIS Systems:

For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with the
indication mark located on the label. (See Physical Overview or Operation section elsewhere in
this manual)

VGA BIOS Firmware Verify: (On MMD and similar products only)

To verify your BIOS Firmware version, the version number is displayed in the UTILITIES menu in
the right top corner. If no version number shows, you may have a BIOS Firmware below V1.00
This manual currently applies for these BIOS Firmware Versions:
V0.xx / V1.00 / V1.10 / V1.2 / V1.2xx / V1.3xx / V1.5xx / V1.6xx
As the available functions are nearly indentical between older products and V1.6xx, there should
be no critical need to update the BIOS Firmware. In such case, consult your local technician or
sales/technical personnel at Hatteland Display if problems arise during the installation or within
usage of the product, or lack of support for your signal refresh rate etc.

VGA BIOS Firmware Versions: (On MMD and similar products only)

On products from V0.xx to V1.1xx = The advanced version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.2xx to V1.5xx = The simplified version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.6xx = The memorized state version of the OSD menu by startup default.
Advanced/Service Menu:
You will have a full set of functions available for your personal perference. Only for experienced
users.
Simplified Menu:
You will have a limited set of functions available for your personal perference. For the common
user.
Memorized State Menu:
The menu will either be advanced or simplified upon startup of display. If user changes from
simplified to advanced menu or visa versa, then this will be memorized in memory and it stays in
that mode until user changes it back again. This is only active on VGA BIOS Firmware versions
from V1.6xx and above.

General - Appendix
IND100077-6

96

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Notes

97
IND100077-24

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Revision History
Rev.

By

Date

Notes

SE

09 May 03
Pressed ver.

First release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.

SE

16 Jan 04
Pressed ver.

Second release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.


Removed Revision Record for SXGA, UXGA controllers.
Removed JH 10T05 VGA and JH 18T04 MMD (obsolete during Q1 2004).
Added DVI-D technical drawings for all MMD products. (where available)
Added testing and approvals section
Added accessories technical drawings.
Added revision history.
Added front page selected chapters.
Revised notes section, and VGA BIOS versions overview.
Reorganization of chapters and updating overall text where needed.

SE

14 May 04
Pressed ver.

Third release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.


Added Declaration Of Conformity
Inserted Book ID on all pages and performed minor maintenance.
Added more pin assignments for common connectors.
(Final Pressed version 2)

SE

11 Aug 04

Fourth release, User Manual. Internet version.


Added SXGA (DVI) and UXGA (NON-DVI) preset signal timings.

SE

29 Sep 04

Added note and updated label for ECDIS systems in OPERATION and NOTES sections.
(MMD products only)
Added Sunvisor drawing for JH 10T06 MMD

SE

22 Dec 04

Revised drawings with rotary bracket.


Overall updates made.

SE

25 Jan 05
Pressed ver.

SE

10 Feb 05

Updated specifications/drawings for 15,19 and 20 Inch (2005 version)


Revised Testing & Approval Overview section.
Revised frontpage with correct type number for 15 Inch

SE

17 Mar 05

Added JH 20T05 MMD Standard and Brackets Technical Drawings


Updated datasheets where needed.

10

SE

15 Jun 05
Pressed ver.

11

SE

18 Nov 05

Added JH MMDBR Bracket Drawing for 17 Inch to 20 Inch


(Final Pressed verion 3)
Replaced JH 15T03 MMD with JH 15T05 MMD
Replaced JH 19T01 MMD with JH 19T02 MMD
Replaced JH 20T04 MMD with JH 20T05 MMD

Revised JH 20T03 MMD specifications and drawings.


Removed JH 17T01 MMD (obsoleted, will be replaced by JH 17T02 MMD)
Revised Testing & Approval Overview section.
Added Water Cover technical drawing.
Revised Testing & Approval Overview section.
JH 20T05 MMD replaced by JH 20T06 MMD, due to TFT panel change.
Revised all products specifications.

General - Appendix
IND100077-11

98

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Contact Information
Main office, Vats / Norway:
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 5276 5444
Sales office, Oslo / Norway:
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
Gjerdrums vei 12
N-0484 Oslo
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 2258 6790
Sales office, Frankfurt / Germany:
Jakob Hatteland Display GmbH
Werner Heisenberg Strasse 12
D-63263 Neu-Isenburg
Germany
Tel: +49 6102 370 954
Fax: +49 6102 370 968

Sales office, Orlando / USA:


Jakob Hatteland Display Inc.
801 International Parkway, 5th Floor
Lake Mary, FL 32746
USA
Tel: +1 407 562 1677
Fax: +1 407 562 1777

www.hatteland.com
Thank you for choosing our quality products !

User Manual
for
HP Deskjet D2360

This document contains the complete manual:


HP Deskjet D2360, User Guide

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-416003-01MU

Unrestricted

1.0

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

- BLANK PAGE -

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-416003-01MU

Unrestricted

1.0

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

HP Photosmart Software Help

2006 Hewlett-Packard Development


Company, L.P.

Hewlett-Packard Company
notices
The information contained in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
All rights reserved. Reproduction,
adaptation, or translation of this
material is prohibited without prior
written permission of Hewlett-Packard,
except as allowed under copyright
laws.
The only warranties for HP products
and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP
shall not be liable for technical or
editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.

Acknowledgements
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Adobe, AdobeRGB, and Acrobat are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.

Terms and conventions


The following terms and conventions
are used in this user's guide.

Terms
The HP Deskjet printer is also referred
to as the HP Deskjet, HP printer, or
printer.

Cautions and warnings


A Caution indicates possible damage
to the HP Deskjet printer or to other
equipment. For example:
Caution Do not touch the
print cartridge ink nozzles or
copper contacts. Touching
these parts will result in clogs,
ink failure, and bad electrical
connections.
A Warning indicates possible harm to
you or to others. For example:
Warning Keep both new
and used print cartridges out
of the reach of children.

Accessibility
Your HP printer provides a number of
features that make it accessible for
people with disabilities.

Visual
The printer software is accessible for
users with visual impairments or low
vision through the use of Windows
accessibility options and features. It
also supports most assistive
technology such as screen readers,
Braille readers, and voice-to-text
applications. For users who are color
blind, colored buttons and tabs used in
the software and on the HP printer have
simple text or icon labels that convey
the appropriate action.

Mobility
For users with mobility impairments, the
printer software functions can be
executed through keyboard
commands. The software also supports
Windows accessibility options such as
StickyKeys, ToggleKeys, FilterKeys,
and MouseKeys. The printer doors,
buttons, paper trays, and paper guides
can be operated by users with limited
strength and reach.

Support
For more details about the accessibility
of this product and HP's commitment to
product accessibility, visit HP's Web
site at: www.hp.com/accessibility.

Contents
1
2
3

4
5

Welcome.................................................................................................................3
Special features.....................................................................................................5
Get started..............................................................................................................6
The printer at a glance ...........................................................................................6
Buttons and lights ...................................................................................................7
Paper tray ...............................................................................................................9
Print cartridges .....................................................................................................12
Ink-backup mode ..................................................................................................13
Connect to the printer.........................................................................................15
USB ......................................................................................................................15
Print using the Photosmart Express button.....................................................16
About the Photosmart Express button ..................................................................16
About the HP Photosmart Express software ........................................................16
Print photos.........................................................................................................17
Print borderless photos ........................................................................................17
Print photos with a border ....................................................................................19
HP Real Life Digital Photography options ............................................................21
Photo print cartridge .............................................................................................21
Exif Print ...............................................................................................................22
Store and handle photo paper ..............................................................................22
Save money when printing photos .......................................................................23
Print other documents........................................................................................24
Print e-mail ...........................................................................................................24
Print documents ....................................................................................................25
Print letters ...........................................................................................................26
Print envelopes .....................................................................................................27
Print postcards ......................................................................................................28
Print index cards and other small media ..............................................................29
Print labels ............................................................................................................30
Print CD/DVD tattoos ............................................................................................30
Print transparencies ..............................................................................................31
Print brochures .....................................................................................................32
Print greeting cards ..............................................................................................33
Print booklets ........................................................................................................34
Print posters .........................................................................................................36
Print iron-on transfers ...........................................................................................37
Printing tips..........................................................................................................39
Printing shortcuts ..................................................................................................39
Fast/Economical printing ......................................................................................39
Select a paper type ..............................................................................................40
Change the print speed or quality ........................................................................40
Print resolution ......................................................................................................41
Maximum dpi ........................................................................................................41
Print in grayscale ..................................................................................................42
Set the page order ................................................................................................42

HP Photosmart Software Help

Set a custom paper size .......................................................................................42


Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper ...................................................43
Resize a document ...............................................................................................43
Print preview .........................................................................................................43
Two-sided printing ................................................................................................44
Bound two-sided documents ................................................................................44
9 Printer software...................................................................................................46
Make the HP Deskjet the default printer ...............................................................46
Set default print settings .......................................................................................46
Printer Properties dialog box ................................................................................47
What's This? help .................................................................................................48
Ink Status window .................................................................................................48
Download printer software updates ......................................................................49
10 Maintenance.........................................................................................................50
Install print cartridges ...........................................................................................50
Align the print cartridges .......................................................................................53
Automatically clean print cartridges ......................................................................53
Calibrate color ......................................................................................................53
Print a test page ...................................................................................................54
View estimated ink levels .....................................................................................54
Maintain the printer body ......................................................................................54
Remove ink from your skin and clothing ..............................................................54
Manually clean print cartridges .............................................................................55
Maintain print cartridges .......................................................................................56
Printer Toolbox .....................................................................................................57
11 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................59
Installation problems .............................................................................................59
Printer does not print ............................................................................................61
Paper jam .............................................................................................................63
Paper problems ....................................................................................................64
Printer is stalled ....................................................................................................65
Print cartridge problems .......................................................................................65
Photos do not print correctly .................................................................................67
Print quality is poor ...............................................................................................68
Document is misprinted ........................................................................................69
Problems with borderless documents ..................................................................70
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed .................................................72
Error messages ....................................................................................................73
Power light is on or flashing .................................................................................74
Document prints slowly .........................................................................................75
If you continue to have problems .........................................................................76
A HP support ..........................................................................................................77
Support process ...................................................................................................77
HP support by phone ............................................................................................77
B Supplies................................................................................................................79
C Technical information ........................................................................................80
Printer specifications ............................................................................................80
Environmental product stewardship program .......................................................80
Regulatory notices ................................................................................................82
Index............................................................................................................................83

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Welcome
Welcome to the HP Deskjet D2300 series Help. Use the information in the following table
to find out how to do something. You can also use the table of contents pane on the left
to locate information.

Section

Description

Special features

Learn about some of the printer's special features.

Get started

Learn how to operate the printer and use and replace the
print cartridges.

Connect to the printer

Learn how to connect your computer to the printer.

Print photos

Learn how to print photos, adjust the appearance of


photos before you print, install a photo print cartridge,
store and handle photo paper, and share photos with
friends and family.

Print using the Photosmart


Express button

Open the HP Photosmart Express software and access


the HP imaging features.

Print other documents

Learn how to print a variety of documents, including email, greeting cards, envelopes, labels, posters,
booklets, transparencies, and iron-on media.

Printing tips

Learn how to use printing shortcuts, select a paper type,


change the print resolution, set the page order, print
multiple pages on a single sheet, preview a document,
and use two-sided printing.

Printer software

Learn how to make the HP Deskjet the default printer, set


default print settings, and download printer software
updates.

Maintenance

Learn how to install and care for print cartridges, view


how much ink is left in a print cartridge, print a test page,
and remove ink stains.

Troubleshooting

Find a solution to a hardware or software problem.

HP Photosmart Software Help

Chapter 1
(continued)

Section

Description

Supplies

Order supplies for the printer.

Specifications

Learn about the paper capacity, requirements, and other


specifications for the printer.

HP inkjet supplies
recycling program

Find out how to recycle print cartridges.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Special features
Congratulations! You have purchased an HP Deskjet printer that is equipped with several
exciting features:

User friendly: Easy to install and operate.


Borderless printing: Print 4 x 6 inch photos to the edges of the paper by using the
borderless printing feature.
Ink level indicator: Know the approximate ink level of each print cartridge with the
onscreen Ink Status window. For information, see View estimated ink levels Ink
Status window.
Ink-backup mode: Continue printing with one print cartridge when the other print
cartridge has run out of ink. For information, see Ink-backup mode.
Photosmart Express button: Use the Photosmart Express button to open the
HP Photosmart Express software, which provides a fast and easy way to make prints
of your photos or to purchase prints online.

HP Photosmart Software Help

Get started

The printer at a glance


Buttons and lights
Paper tray
Print cartridges
Ink-backup mode

The printer at a glance


Click the links below to learn about the printer features.

Buttons and lights

Paper tray

Print cartridges

HP Deskjet D2300 series

USB port

Buttons and lights


Use the printer buttons to turn the printer on and off, cancel a print job, and open the
HP Photosmart Express software. The printer lights give you visual cues about the status
of the printer.

Power button and light

Print Cancel button

Photosmart Express button

Power button and light


Use the Power button to turn the printer on and off. It can take a few seconds for the
printer to turn on after you press the Power button.

HP Photosmart Software Help

Chapter 3

Power button and light

The Power light flashes when the printer is processing.


Caution Always use the Power button to turn the printer on and off. Using a
power strip, surge protector, or a wall-mounted switch to turn the printer on and
off might cause printer failure.

Print Cancel button


The printer also has a Print Cancel button.

Print Cancel button

Pressing the Print Cancel button cancels the current print job.
Note Pressing the Print Cancel a second time causes the printer to resume
printing.

Photosmart Express button


Use the Photosmart Express button to open the HP Photosmart Express software. The
HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of your
photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP imaging
software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.
8

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Photosmart Express button

Paper tray
For information about the paper tray, select one of these topics.

Unfold the paper tray


Use the paper tray
Fold the paper tray

Unfold the paper tray


To unfold the paper tray
1. Raise the printer cover.

2.

Lower the paper tray.

HP Photosmart Software Help

Chapter 3

3.

Pull out the tray extension.

4.

If you are printing in the Fast Draft mode, fold out the tray extension stop.

5.

Lower the printer cover.

Use the paper tray


Print on different sizes of media by sliding the paper guide to the right or to the left. The
printer deposits printed pages on the top of the paper tray.

10

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Fold the paper tray


To fold the paper tray
1. Remove paper or other media from the paper tray.
2. If the tray extension stop is folded out, fold it back in.

3.

Push the tray extension into the paper tray.

4.

Raise the printer cover.

HP Photosmart Software Help

11

Chapter 3

5.

Raise the paper tray.

6.

Lower the printer cover.

Print cartridges
Three print cartridges can be used with the printer.

Black print cartridge

Tri-color print cartridge

Photo print cartridge

Note Your printer might be packaged with only a tri-color print cartridge. For
better results, install a black print cartridge in addition to the tri-color print
cartridge. You can print without a black print cartridge but doing so can cause the
printer to print more slowly and printed colors to differ from those you would see
if a black print cartridge and a tri-color print cartridge were installed.
To order print cartridges, go to www.hp.com. Choose your country/region, and
then click Buy or Online Shopping.
For information about using the print cartridges, see the following topics:

12

Use print cartridges

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Replace print cartridges

Use print cartridges


The print cartridges can be used in the following ways:

Everyday printing: Use the black and tri-color print cartridges for everyday print
jobs.
Quality color photos: For more vibrant colors when printing color photographs or
other special documents, remove the black print cartridge and install a photo print
cartridge. The photo print cartridge, in combination with the tri-color print cartridge,
provides you with virtually grain-free photos.

Replace print cartridges


When buying print cartridges, look for the print cartridge selection number.
You can find the selection number in three places:

Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.

Selection number label

Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Print Cartridge Ordering Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection
numbers, open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click
the Print Cartridge Information button.

If a print cartridge runs out of ink, the printer can operate in ink-backup mode. For more
information, see Ink-backup mode.
For information about installing a replacement print cartridge, see Installation
instructions.

Ink-backup mode
Use the ink-backup mode to operate the printer with only one print cartridge. The inkbackup mode is initiated when a print cartridge is removed from the print cartridge cradle.

HP Photosmart Software Help

13

Chapter 3

Note When the printer operates in ink-backup mode, a message is displayed on


screen. If the message is displayed and two print cartridges are installed in the
printer, verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from each
print cartridge. When plastic tape covers the print cartridge contacts, the printer
cannot detect that the print cartridge is installed.
For more information about ink-backup mode, see the following topics:

Ink-backup mode output


Exit ink-backup mode

Ink-backup mode output


Printing in ink-backup mode slows the printer and affects the quality of printouts.
Installed print
cartridge

Result

Black print cartridge

Colors print as grayscale.

Tri-color print cartridge

Colors print but black is grayed and is not a true black.

Photo print cartridge

Colors print as grayscale.

Note HP does not recommend using the photo print cartridge for ink-backup
mode.

Exit ink-backup mode


Install two print cartridges in the printer to exit ink-backup mode.
For information about installing a print cartridge, see Installation instructions.

14

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Connect to the printer

USB

USB
The printer connects to the computer with a universal serial bus (USB) cable. The
computer must be running Windows 98 SE or later to use a USB cable.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.

For instructions about connecting the printer with a USB cable, see the setup poster that
came with the printer.
Note A USB cable might not be packaged with your printer.

HP Photosmart Software Help

15

Print using the Photosmart


Express button
To quickly print photos, use the Photosmart Express button.

About the Photosmart Express button


About the HP Photosmart Express software

About the Photosmart Express button


The Photosmart Express button is located on the front panel of the printer. When you
press the button, the HP Photosmart Express software is opened on your computer.
The HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of
your photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP
imaging software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.

Photosmart Express button

About the HP Photosmart Express software


The HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of
your photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP
imaging software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.
Note If the HP Photosmart Express software is not installed on your computer,
a message is displayed when you press the Photosmart Express button. For more
information, see HP Photosmart Express software is not installed.

16

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Print photos
The printer software offers several features that make printing digital photos easier and
improve photo quality.
Learn how to print photos

Print a borderless photo.

Print a photo with a border.

Learn how to perform other photo printing tasks

Use the photo print cartridge for great colors and virtually grain-free photos.
Use HP Real Life technologies to touch up photos. For more information, see HP
Real Life Digital Photography options.
Print an Exif Print-formatted photo if you have Exif Print-enabled software.
Prevent photo paper from curling by following the photo paper storage and handling
guidelines.
Use HP Everyday Photo Paper to save money and ink when printing photos.

Print borderless photos


To print borderless photos, use 4 x 6 inch photo paper with a 0.5 inch tab (10 x 15 cm
with 1.25 cm tab); the photo prints without borders on three sides and with a small border
on the bottom edge that you tear off to make the photo completely borderless.
Guidelines
Use 4 x 6 inch photo paper with a 0.5 inch tab (10 x 15 cm with 1.25 cm tab).
Do not print borderless photos in ink-backup mode. Always have two print cartridges
installed in the printer.
For more information, see Ink-backup mode.
Open the file in a software program such as HP Photosmart software and resize the
photo. Ensure that the size corresponds to the paper size that you want to use.
For maximum fade resistance, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.
Verify that the photo paper that you are using is flat. For information about preventing
photo paper from curling, see the photo paper storage instructions.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of photo paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Verify that the photo paper is flat.

HP Photosmart Software Help

17

Chapter 6

3.

4.
5.

Place the photo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down and the short edge should point towards the printer.
If you are using photo paper that has a tear-off tab, verify that the tab is pointing
away from the printer.
Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-borderless,
and then select the following options:
Print quality: Normal or Best
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.

18

Paper type: An appropriate photo paper type


Paper size: An appropriate borderless photo paper size
Orientation: Portrait or Landscape

HP Deskjet D2300 series

5.
6.

Set the HP Real Life Digital Photography options as appropriate.


Click OK to print the photo.
If you printed on photo paper with a tear-off tab, remove the tab to make the
document completely borderless.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print photos with a border


Guidelines
For maximum fade resistance, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.
Verify that the photo paper that you are using is flat. For information about preventing
photo paper from curling, see the photo paper storage instructions.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of photo paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Verify that the photo paper is flat.
3. Place the photo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down and the short edge should point towards the printer.

HP Photosmart Software Help

19

Chapter 6

4.
5.

Push the paper into the printer until it stops.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Small photos

Large photos

Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-with white
borders, and then select the following options:
Print quality: Normal or Best
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.

5.
6.

Paper type: An appropriate photo paper type


Paper size: An appropriate photo paper size
Orientation: Portrait or Landscape
Set the HP Real Life Digital Photography options as appropriate.
Click OK to print the photo.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

20

HP Deskjet D2300 series

HP Real Life Digital Photography options


HP Real Life technologies make it easy for you to get better photos. Automatic red-eye
removal and adaptive lighting to enhance detail in shadows are just a few of the
technologies included.
Use the HP Real Life technologies dialog box to set these options:

Automatic red-eye removal: Click On to automatically remove or reduce red-eye


in the photo.
Photo brightening: Automatically enhance colors and contrast for washed-out
photos. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to intelligently brighten your
photo, focusing only on areas that need adjustment.
Adaptive lighting: Adjust the exposure in dark areas of photos to bring out detail.
Click Automatic to allow the printer software to balance lightness and darkness
automatically.
SmartFocus: Enhance the image quality and clarity of low resolution images such
as those downloaded from the Internet. Click On to allow the printer software to
sharpen details in the image automatically.
Sharpness: Adjust the image sharpness to your preference. Click Automatic to
allow the printer software to set the level of sharpening for the image automatically.
Smoothing: Soften an image. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set
the level of smoothing for the image automatically.

To open the HP Real Life Digital Photography dialog box


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Real Life digital photography
button.

Photo print cartridge


The photo print cartridge, when used in conjunction with the tri-color print cartridge,
provides virtually grain-free photos. It offers exceptional fade resistance for photos that
are printed on HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.

The photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with your
printer.
To install the photo print cartridge
To install the photo print cartridge, remove the black print cartridge from the printer,
and then install the photo print cartridge in the right side of the print cartridge cradle.

HP Photosmart Software Help

21

Chapter 6

Note To learn how to install a print cartridge, see Installation instructions. To


protect a print cartridge when it is not in the printer, follow these storage
guidelines.
To use the photo print cartridge
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click either Photo printingborderless or Photo printing-with white borders.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, click Normal or Best.
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then click
Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
5.
6.

In the Paper type drop-down list, select the appropriate photo paper type.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Exif Print
Exif Print (Exchangeable Image File Format 2.2) is an international digital imaging
standard that simplifies digital photography and enhances printed photos. When a photo
is taken with an Exif Print-enabled digital camera, Exif Print captures information such
as exposure time, type of flash, and color saturation, and stores it in the image file. The
printer software then uses this information to automatically perform image-specific
enhancements to create outstanding photos.
To print Exif Print-enhanced photos, you must have the following items:

A digital camera that supports Exif Print


Exif Print-enabled photo software, such as HP Photosmart software

To print Exif Print-enhanced photos


1. Open the photo in an Exif Print-enabled software program that allows editing, such
as HP Photosmart software.
2. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Type is drop-down list, select the appropriate photo paper type.
5. In the Print Quality drop-down list, click Normal, Best, or Maximum dpi.
6. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
The printer software automatically optimizes the printed image.

Store and handle photo paper


Follow these instructions to maintain the quality of HP brand photo paper.

22

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Storage
Keep unused photo paper in a plastic bag. Store the packaged photo paper on a flat
surface in a cool place.
When you are ready to print, remove only the paper that you plan to use immediately
from the plastic bag. When you have finished printing, return any unused photo
paper to the plastic bag.
Do not leave unused photo paper in the paper tray. The paper might start to curl,
which can reduce the quality of your photos.
Handling
Always hold photo paper by its edges. Fingerprints on photo paper can reduce print
quality.
If the corners of the photo paper curl more than 10 mm (0.4 inch), flatten the paper
by putting it in the storage bag, and then gently bending it in the opposite direction
of the curl until the paper lies flat.
Photo paper should be flat before it is printed on.

Save money when printing photos


To save money and ink when printing photos, use HP Everyday Photo Paper and set the
print quality to Normal.
HP Everyday Photo Paper is designed to create quality photos with less ink.
Note For higher-quality photos, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper and set the
print quality to Best or Maximum dpi.

HP Photosmart Software Help

23

Print other documents

E-mail

Documents

Letters

Envelopes

Postcards

Index cards

Labels

CD/DVD tattoos

Transparencies

Brochures

Greeting cards

Booklets

Posters

Iron-on transfers

Printing tips: Minimize your cost and effort while maximizing the quality of your printouts
with printing tips.
Printer software: Learn about the printer software.

Print e-mail
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of plain paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.

24

HP Deskjet D2300 series

3.
4.

Push the paper into the printer until it stops.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday printing
or Fast/Economical printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print documents
Guidelines
For draft documents, use Fast/Economical printing.
Save paper with two-sided printing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.

HP Photosmart Software Help

25

Chapter 7

3.

Push the paper into the printer until it stops.


Note Depending on the paper size, the paper might extend over the edge
of the tray.

4.

Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday
printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select the following print settings:
Print quality if you want a print quality other than Normal.
Print on both sides if you want to print on both sides of the paper.
For more information, see Two-sided printing.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print letters
Guidelines
For information about printing an envelope for your letter, see envelopes.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
Note If you are using letterhead paper, the letterhead should face down and
point toward the printer.

26

HP Deskjet D2300 series

3.
4.

Push the paper into the printer until it stops.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print envelopes
Guidelines
Avoid using envelopes that have the following features:
Clasps or windows
Thick, irregular, or curled edges
Shiny or embossed coatings
Wrinkles, tears, or other damage
You can print a single envelope or multiple envelopes.
Align the envelope edges before inserting the envelopes in the paper tray.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 10 envelopes.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the envelopes in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down. The flap should be on the left side.

HP Photosmart Software Help

27

Chapter 7

3.
4.

Push the envelopes into the printer until they stop.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the envelopes.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate envelope size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print postcards
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 postcards.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down and the short edge should point toward the printer.
3. Push the cards into the printer until they stop.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.

28

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: An appropriate card type
Print quality: Normal or Best
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.

Print index cards and other small media


Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 cards.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down and the short edge should point toward the printer.
3. Push the cards into the printer until they stop.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.

HP Photosmart Software Help

29

Chapter 7

Print labels
Guidelines
Use only paper, plastic, or clear labels that are designed specifically for inkjet
printers.
Use only full sheets of labels.
Avoid using labels that are sticky, wrinkled, or pulling away from the protective
backing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of labels (use only Letter or A4size sheets).
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Fan the edges of the label sheets to separate them, and then align the edges.
3. Place the label sheets in the right side of the tray. The label side should face down.
4. Push the sheets into the printer until they stop.
5. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the sheets.

Print
Note If your software program includes a label printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow the
instructions below.
1.
2.
3.

4.

Open the Printer Properties dialog box.


Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday
printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
Click OK.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print CD/DVD tattoos


Note This feature might not be available in your country/region.

30

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Guidelines
See the instructions that are included with the CD/DVD tattoo for the most current
printing tips.
To avoid damaging the printer, do not feed a CD/DVD tattoo through the printer more
than once.
Make sure the CD/DVD tattoo covers the entire backing sheet with no exposed
spaces. Separating any part of the CD/DVD tattoo from the protective backing sheet
before printing could damage the printer.
Avoid using a CD/DVD tattoo that is pulling away from the protective backing, or that
is wrinkled, curled, or damaged in any way.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 1 sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place one sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be
printed on should face down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: 5x7in.
Type is: HP CD/DVD Tattoo
Print quality: Best
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print transparencies
Guidelines
For great results, use HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 transparencies.

HP Photosmart Software Help

31

Chapter 7

Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the transparencies in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed should
face down and the adhesive strip should face up and toward the printer.
3. Carefully push the transparencies into the printer until they stop, so that the adhesive
strips do not catch on one another.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the transparencies.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: An appropriate transparency film
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print brochures
Guidelines
Open the file in a software program and assign the brochure size. Ensure that the
size corresponds to the paper size on which you want to print the brochure.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 30 sheets of brochure paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.

32

HP Deskjet D2300 series

3.
4.

Push the paper into the printer until it stops.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. Specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: An appropriate HP inkjet paper or other paper type
Note Not all paper sizes and types are available for borderless printing.

4.
5.
6.

7.

Set the print quality to Best.


Click the Basics tab, and then set the orientation.
Click the Finishing tab, and then select Print on both sides to print on both sides
of the paper.
For more information, see Two-sided printing.
Click OK to print.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print greeting cards


Greeting cards
Unfold prefolded cards, and then place them in the paper tray.
For great results, use HP Greeting Card Paper.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 cards.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Fan the edges of the greeting cards to separate them, and then align the edges.
3. Place the greeting cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down.

HP Photosmart Software Help

33

Chapter 7

4.
5.

Push the cards into the printer until they stop.


Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.

Print
Note If your software program includes a greeting card printing feature, follow
the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow
the instructions below.
1.
2.

3.

Open the Printer Properties dialog box.


Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings.
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: An appropriate card type
Print quality: Normal
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

Print booklets
Booklet printing automatically arranges and resizes the pages of a document so that
when the document is folded into a booklet, the page order is correct.
For example, when a four-page booklet is printed on both sides of the paper, the pages
are reordered and printed like this:

Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 80 sheets of paper.
34

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, Duplex, printing.
4. In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click one of the following binding options:
Left edge booklet
Right edge booklet
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
6. When prompted, reload the printed pages in the paper tray as shown below.

7.

Click Continue to finish printing the booklet.

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

HP Photosmart Software Help

35

Chapter 7

Print posters
Guidelines
For poster printing, sections of the poster are automatically arranged on individual
sheets that can be taped together. After the sections of a poster have been printed,
trim the edges of the sheets and tape the sheets together.

Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 80 sheets of paper.

Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Click the Finishing tab, and then select the number of sheets for the poster.
4. Click the Basics tab, and then specify the orientation.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

36

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Print iron-on transfers


Guidelines
When printing a mirror image, the text and the pictures are horizontally reversed
from what is displayed on the computer screen.

Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 10 iron-on transfers.

Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the iron-on transfer paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed
on should face down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.

Print
Note If your software program includes an iron-on transfer printing feature,
follow the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise,
follow the instructions below.
1.
2.

3.

Open the Printer Properties dialog box.


Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: Other specialty paper
Print quality: Normal or Best
Click the Basics tab, and then set the orientation to Mirror image.
Note Some iron-on transfer software programs do not require you to print
a mirror image.

4.

Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

HP Photosmart Software Help

37

Chapter 7

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.

38

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Printing tips
Save time

Use the Printing Shortcuts tab.


Set the order that the pages print.

Save money

Use Fast/Economical printing.


Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Print in grayscale.
Print a two-sided document.
Use HP Everyday Photo Paper to save money and ink when printing photos.

Enhance the quality of printouts

Preview the document before printing it.


Print on a custom paper size.
Select the correct paper type.
Change the print speed and quality.
View the print resolution.
Achieve the highest printing resolution with Maximum dpi.
Resize the document as needed.

Printing shortcuts
Use printing shortcuts to print with print settings that you use often. The printer software
has several specially designed printing shortcuts that are available in the Printing
Shortcuts list.
Note When you select a printing shortcut the appropriate printing options are
automatically displayed. You can leave them as is or change them.
Printing shortcuts
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab for the following print tasks:

General everyday printing


Photo printingborderless
Photo printingwith white borders
Fast/Economical printing
Presentation printing
Two-sided, duplex, printing

Fast/Economical printing
Use Fast/Economical printing to produce draft-quality printouts quickly.

HP Photosmart Software Help

39

Chapter 8

To use Fast/Economical printing


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Fast/Economical printing.
4. Specify the print settings that you want, and then click OK.

General Everyday printing


Use General Everyday printing to print documents quickly.

Documents
E-mail

Presentation printing
Use Presentation printing to print high-quality documents, including:

Letters
Brochures
Transparencies

Select a paper type


When printing a higher-quality document, HP recommends that you select a specific
paper type.
To select a specific paper type
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Paper type drop-down list, select an appropriate paper type.
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Change the print speed or quality


The HP Deskjet automatically chooses a print quality and speed setting depending on
the paper type setting you select. You can also change the print quality setting to
customize the speed and quality of the print process.
Print quality settings
Fast Draft produces draft-quality output at the fastest printing speed, while using
the least amount of ink.
Fast Normal produces higher quality output than the Fast Draft setting and prints
more quickly than the Normal setting.
Normal provides the best balance between print quality and speed and is
appropriate for most documents.

40

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Best provides the best balance between high quality and speed and can be used
for high quality prints. For most documents, the Best setting prints more slowly than
the Normal setting.
Maximum dpi optimizes the dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet prints. Printing
in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a large
amount of disk space. For more information, see Maximum dpi.

To select a print quality and speed


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the type of paper that you have loaded.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, select the appropriate quality setting for your
project.

Print resolution
The printer software displays the print resolution in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi varies
according to the paper type and print quality that you select in the printer software.
To view the print resolution
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the type of paper that you have loaded.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, select the appropriate print quality setting for
your project.
The print resolution dpi is displayed beneath the Print quality drop-down list.

Maximum dpi
Use maximum dpi mode to print high-quality, sharp images.
To get the most benefit from maximum dpi mode, use it to print high-quality images such
as digital photographs. When you select the maximum dpi setting, the printer software
displays the optimized dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet will print.
Printing in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a
large amount of disk space.
Note If a photo print cartridge is also installed, the print quality is enhanced. A
photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with the
HP Deskjet.
To print in Maximum dpi mode
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the appropriate paper type.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, click Maximum dpi.
The print resolution is displayed in maximum dpi beneath the print quality setting.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

HP Photosmart Software Help

41

Chapter 8

Print in grayscale
To print in grayscale
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Color tab.
3. Select the Print in grayscale check box, and then select a grayscale option.
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Set the page order


The page order determines the order in which your multipage documents print.
To set the page order
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Basics tab.
3. Select one of the following options:
Front to back: The first page of the document will be on top when the document
is finished printing. You do not have to reorder the printed pages.
Note This option requires more time for printing.

4.

Back to front: The last page of the document will be on top when the document
is finished printing. You have to reorder the printed pages.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Set a custom paper size


Use the Custom Paper Size dialog box to print on a special paper size.
Note This feature is not available for all paper types.

To define a custom paper size


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. Click the Custom button.
The Custom paper size dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Name drop-down list, click a custom paper size name.
5. In the Width and Length boxes, type the dimensions of the custom paper size.
The minimum and maximum dimensions are displayed beneath each of the boxes.
6. Click the unit of measurement: Inches or Millimeters.
7. Click Save to save the custom paper size.
8. Click OK to exit the Custom paper size dialog box.
9. To use the custom paper size, select its name in the Size is drop-down list.

42

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper


Use the printer software to print multiple pages of a document on a single sheet of paper.
The printer software automatically resizes the document text and images to fit on the
printed page.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. In the Pages per sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to
appear on each sheet of paper.
4. If you want a border to appear around each page image that is printed on the sheet
of paper, select the Print page borders check box.
5. In the Page order is drop-down list, select a layout for the pages.
A preview of the page order is displayed at the top of the Finishing tab.
6. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Resize a document
Use the printer software to print a document that is formatted for one paper size on
another paper size. Doing this can be useful if you do not have the correct paper size
available.
For example, if you have created a document that is formatted for letter-size paper, but
you do not have any letter-size paper available, you can print the document on another
paper size that is available.
To resize a document for a different paper size
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Effects tab.
3. Select the Print document on check box, and then select the target paper size in
the drop-down list.
The target paper size is the size of the paper on which you are printing, not the size
for which the document was formatted.
4. Select the Scale to fit check box.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.

Print preview
Use the print preview function to view a printout on your computer before printing a
document. If the printout does not look correct, you can cancel the print job and adjust
the print settings as needed.
To preview a printed document
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Basics tab.
3. Select the Show print preview check box.

HP Photosmart Software Help

43

Chapter 8

4.
5.

Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Before the document prints, a preview is displayed.
Do one of the following:
Click OK to print the document.
Click Cancel to cancel the print job. Adjust the print settings as needed before
printing the document.

Two-sided printing
Use two-sided printing, also called duplexing, to print on both sides of the paper. Printing
on both sides of the paper is not only economical, but environmentally conscious as well.
To print a two-sided document
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, duplex printing.
4. In the Print on both sides drop-down list, click Manually.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
The printer prints the odd-numbered pages first.
6. After the odd-numbered pages have been printed, reload the printed pages with the
printed side facing up.

7.

Click Continue to print the even-numbered pages.

To create a two-sided document with a binding, see Bound two-sided documents.

Bound two-sided documents


If you want to bind printed pages into a book, you can adjust the print settings to
accommodate the binding.
Bound two-sided documents can have a book binding (binding on the side) or a tablet
binding (binding at the top). Book binding is the most common type of binding.
To print a two-sided document with a book binding
Follow the instructions for basic two-sided printing.

44

HP Deskjet D2300 series

To print a two-sided document with a tablet binding


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. Select the following check boxes:
Print on both sides
Flip pages up
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
The printer prints the odd-numbered pages first.
5. After the odd-numbered pages have been printed, reload the printed pages, with the
printed side facing up according to the document orientation, portrait or landscape.

Portrait

Landscape
6.

Click Continue to print the even-numbered pages.

HP Photosmart Software Help

45

Printer software

Make the HP Deskjet the default printer.


Set the default print settings for all documents.
Use the Printer Properties dialog box to select printing options.
Use the What's This? help to learn more about specific print settings.
View the Ink Status window for the approximate ink level of each print cartridge.
Download printer software updates for the latest features and improvements.

Make the HP Deskjet the default printer


You can set the HP Deskjet as the default printer to use from any software program. This
means that the HP Deskjet is automatically selected in the printer drop-down list when
you click Print from the File menu in a software program.
To set the default printer
1. On the Windows taskbar, click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Right-click the HP Deskjet icon, and then click Set as Default Printer.

Set default print settings


The HP Deskjet uses default print settings for all documents unless you specify other
settings.

46

HP Deskjet D2300 series

To save time when printing, set the default print settings to options that you use often.
That way, you do not have to specify the options every time you use the printer.
To change the default print settings
1. Double-click the HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon on the right side of the Windows
taskbar.

2.
3.

HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon

The HP Solution Center is displayed.


In the HP Solution Center, click Settings, point to Print Settings, and then click
Printer Settings.
Make changes to the print settings, and then click OK.

Printer Properties dialog box


The printer is controlled by software that is installed on your computer. Use the printer
software, also known as the printer driver, to change the print settings for a document.
To change the print settings, open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Note The Printer Properties dialog box is also referred to as the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
To open the Printer Properties dialog box
1. Open the file that you want to print.
2. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties or Preferences.
The Printer Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note The path to the Printer Properties dialog box can vary depending on the
software program you are using.

HP Photosmart Software Help

47

Chapter 9

What's This? help


Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that you see on the Printer
Properties dialog box.

What's This? help


Use What's This? help to learn more about the available printing options.
To use What's This? help
1. Move the cursor over the feature that you want to learn more about.
2. Click the right mouse button.
The What's This box is displayed.
3. Move the cursor over the What's This? box, and then click the left mouse button.
An explanation of the feature is displayed.

Ink Status window


The Ink Status window is displayed each time the printer prints a file. The window displays
the approximate ink level of each print cartridge. To close the Ink Status window, click
Close.
Note This feature might not be available in your operating environment.

Print cartridge information and ordering


For print cartridge information and to link to HP's Web site for ordering print cartridges,
click the Print Cartridge Information button.
Displaying the Ink Status window
If you do not want the Ink Status window to appear when you print, select the Do not
show this again check box in the lower-left corner of the window.
If you previously chose not to show the Ink Status window but now want it to appear when
you print, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.

48

Open the printer Toolbox.


Click the Configuration tab.
Select the Display Ink Status Window check box.
Click Apply, and then click OK.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Download printer software updates


Download the latest printer software update every few months to ensure you have the
latest features and improvements.
To download a printer software update
1. Make sure you are connected to the Internet.
2. From the Windows Start menu, click Programs or All Programs, point to HP, and
then click HP Software Update.
The HP Software Update window is displayed.
3. Click Next.
HP Software Update searches the HP Web site for printer software updates.
If the computer has the most recent version of the printer software installed, No
updates are available for your system at this time is displayed in the HP
Software Update window.
If the computer does not have the most recent version of the printer software
installed, a software update is displayed in the HP Software Update window.
4. If a software update is available, select the check box beside the update name.
5. Click Install.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Download HP Photosmart software
Installing the printer software update you download from the HP Web site does not
update the HP Photosmart software you might have installed on the computer. For
information about updating the HP Photosmart software, see the HP Photosmart Help.

HP Photosmart Software Help

49

10

Maintenance

Install print cartridges


Align the print cartridges
Automatically clean print cartridges
Calibrate color
Print a test page
View estimated ink levels
Maintain the printer body
Remove ink from your skin and clothing
Manually clean print cartridges
Maintain print cartridges
Printer Toolbox

Install print cartridges


When you need to replace print cartridges, make sure you have the correct print
cartridges for your printer, and then install them in the print cartridge cradle.

Print cartridge combinations


Selection numbers
Ink-backup mode
Installation instructions

Print cartridge combinations


For printing most documents, use the tri-color print cartridge and the black print cartridge.
When printing photos, use the photo print cartridge along with the tri-color print cartridge.
Always install the tri-color print cartridge in the left side of the print cartridge cradle.
Install the black or photo print cartridge in the right side of the print cartridge cradle.
Note Your printer might be packaged with only a tri-color print cartridge. For
better results, install a black print cartridge in addition to the tri-color print
cartridge. You can print without a black print cartridge but doing so can cause the
printer to print more slowly and printed colors to differ from those you would see
if a black print cartridge and a tri-color print cartridge were installed.
To order print cartridges, go to www.hp.com. Choose your country/region, and
then click Buy or Online Shopping.

Selection numbers
When buying replacement print cartridges, look for the print cartridge selection number.

50

HP Deskjet D2300 series

You can find the selection number in three places:

Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.

Selection number label

Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Print Cartridge Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers,
open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click the Print
Cartridge Information button.

Ink-backup mode
The printer can operate with only one print cartridge installed. For more information, see
Ink-backup mode.

Installation instructions
To install a print cartridge
1. Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
2. Open the printer cover.
The print cartridge cradle moves to the center of the printer.
3. Push down on the print cartridge.
4. Slide the print cartridge out of the cradle.

Press the Power button

Open the printer cover

Push down on the print cartridge

Slide the print cartridge out of the cradle

HP Photosmart Software Help

51

Chapter 10

5.

Remove the replacement print cartridge from its packaging and carefully remove the
plastic tape. Hold the print cartridge so that the copper strip is on the bottom and
facing toward the printer.

Remove plastic tape

Caution Do not touch the print cartridge ink nozzles or copper contacts.
Touching these parts will result in clogs, ink failure, and bad electrical
connections. Do not remove the copper strips. They are required electrical
contacts.

6.

52

Ink nozzles

Copper contacts

Slide the print cartridge firmly into the cradle at a slight upward angle until you feel
resistance.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

7.
8.
9.

Push the cartridge into the cradle.


You hear a snap when the print cartridge is correctly positioned.
Close the printer cover.
Align the print cartridges for optimum print quality.

For information about storing print cartridges, see Maintain print cartridges.
For information about recycling empty print cartridges, see HP inkjet supplies recycling
program.
Warning Keep both new and used print cartridges out of the reach of children.

Align the print cartridges


After installing a print cartridge, align the print cartridges to ensure the best print quality.
To align the printer
1. Load Letter or A4 unused plain white paper in the paper tray.
2. Open the printer Toolbox.
3. Click Align the Print Cartridges.
4. Click Align, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
The HP Deskjet prints a test page, aligns the print cartridges, and calibrates the
printer. Recycle or discard the test page.

Automatically clean print cartridges


If your printed pages are missing lines or dots, or if they contain ink streaks, the print
cartridges might be low on ink or might need to be cleaned. For more information, see
View estimated ink levels.
If the print cartridges are not low on ink, clean the print cartridges automatically.
To clean the print cartridges
1. Open the printer Toolbox.
2. Click Clean the Print Cartridges.
3. Click Clean, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
If your documents are still missing lines or dots after cleaning, manually clean the print
cartridge contacts.
Caution Clean print cartridges only when necessary. Unnecessary cleaning
wastes ink and shortens the life of the cartridge.

Calibrate color
Perform a color calibration if the colors in photos that are printed with the photo print
cartridge consistently look incorrect.
Before performing a color calibration, align the print cartridges, and then reprint the photo.
If the color is still incorrect, perform a color calibration.

HP Photosmart Software Help

53

Chapter 10

To calibrate color
1. Load Letter or A4 unused plain white paper in the paper tray.
2. Verify that both a tri-color print cartridge and a photo print cartridge are installed in
the printer.
3. Open the printer Toolbox.
4. Click Calibrate Color.
5. Click Start, and then follow the onscreen instructions.

Print a test page


You can print a test page to view the effects of any changes you have made to the print
settings.
To print a test page
1. Open the printer Toolbox.
2. Click the Print a Test Page button, and then follow the onscreen instructions.

View estimated ink levels


Follow these instructions to view the estimated ink levels of the print cartridges that are
installed in the printer:
1.
2.

Open the printer Toolbox.


Click the Estimated Ink Level tab.
Note If the print cartridges were used before being installed in the printer, the
estimated ink levels will not appear on the Estimated Ink Level tab.

The Estimated Ink Level tab also contains print cartridge ordering information. To view
this information, click the Print Cartridge Information button.

Maintain the printer body


Because the HP Deskjet ejects ink onto the paper in a fine mist, ink smudges will
eventually appear.
To remove smudges, stains, or dried ink from the exterior
1. Turn off the HP Deskjet, and then disconnect the power cord.
2. Wipe the outside of the HP Deskjet with a soft cloth that has been lightly moistened
with water.
Caution Do not use any type of cleaning solution. Household cleaners and
detergents might damage the printer finish. Keep all fluids away from the interior.
Do not lubricate the metal rod on which the print cartridge cradle slides. Noise is
normal when the cradle moves back and forth.

Remove ink from your skin and clothing


Follow these instructions to remove ink from your skin and clothing:

54

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Surface

Remedy

Skin

Wash the area with an abrasive soap.

White fabric

Wash the fabric in cold water and use chlorine bleach.

Color fabric

Wash the fabric in cold water and use sudsy ammonia.

Caution Always use cold water to remove ink from fabric. Warm or hot water
can set the ink into the fabric.

Manually clean print cartridges


If the HP Deskjet is used in a dusty environment, a small amount of debris can
accumulate on the print cartridge contacts. This debris can cause ink streaks and missing
lines on printed pages. The problem can be corrected by manually cleaning the print
cartridge contacts.
You need the following items to clean the print cartridges:

Distilled water (tap water can contain contaminants that can damage the print
cartridge)
Cotton swabs or other soft, lint-free material that will not stick to the print cartridge

Be careful not to get ink on your hands or clothing as you clean.


To prepare to clean
1. Open the HP Deskjet cover.
2. Wait until the print cartridge cradle moves to the center of the HP Deskjet and is idle
and quiet.
3. Remove the print cartridges and place them on a piece of paper, with the copper
strips facing up.
Caution Do not leave the print cartridges outside the HP Deskjet for more
than 30 minutes.

HP Photosmart Software Help

55

Chapter 10

To manually clean print cartridge contacts


1. Lightly moisten a cotton swab with distilled water and squeeze any excess water
from the swab.
2. Gently wipe the print cartridge copper contacts with the cotton swab.
Caution Do not touch the print cartridge ink nozzles. Touching the ink
nozzles will result in clogs, ink failure, and bad electrical connections.

3.
4.

Ink nozzles (do not touch)

Copper contacts

Repeat this process until no ink residue or dust appears on the swab.
Insert the print cartridges in the HP Deskjet, and then close the cover. For more
information, see Installation instructions.

Maintain print cartridges


Use these tips to maintain and store HP print cartridges and to ensure consistent print
quality.

Maintenance tips
Storage tips
Print cartridge protector

Maintenance tips

Keep all print cartridges in their sealed packages until they are needed. Print
cartridges should be stored at room temperatures (15 to 35 C or 59 to 95 F).
Do not remove the plastic tape covering the ink nozzles until you are ready to install
the print cartridge in the printer. If the plastic tape has been removed from the print
cartridge, do not attempt to reattach it. Reattaching the tape damages the print
cartridge.

Storage tips

56

When you remove print cartridges from the printer, store them in an airtight plastic
container.
Make sure that the ink nozzles are face down but are not in contact with the
container.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Print cartridge protector


If you have purchased an HP photo print cartridge, you can store it in the protector that
comes with the print cartridge.
To insert the print cartridge into the print cartridge protector
Slide the print cartridge at a slight angle into the protector, and snap it securely in
place.

To remove the print cartridge from the print cartridge protector


1. Press down and back on the top of the protector to release the print cartridge.
2. Slide the print cartridge out of the protector.

Caution Do not drop the print cartridge. Dropping the print cartridge can
damage it.

Printer Toolbox
The printer Toolbox contains a number of useful tools to enhance the performance of the
printer.
Use the printer Toolbox to perform the following tasks:

Align the print cartridges


Clean the print cartridges
Calibrate color
Print a test page
View estimated ink levels

HP Photosmart Software Help

57

Chapter 10

To open the printer Toolbox


1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Services tab, and then click the Service this device button.
The Toolbox is displayed.

58

HP Deskjet D2300 series

11

Troubleshooting

Installation problems
Printer does not print
Paper jam
Paper problems
Printer is stalled
Print cartridge problems
Photos do not print correctly
Print quality is poor
Document is misprinted
Problems with borderless documents
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed
Error messages
Power light is on or flashing
Document prints slowly
If you continue to have problems

Installation problems
If the software installation program stops or fails, check the following topics for more
information:

Installation program stops


"Unknown Device" message displays
Printer name does not appear

If you continue to have problems, visit HP Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.

Installation program stops


If the installation program stops when it looks for new hardware, one of the following
issues is causing a communication problem:

The USB cable is old or defective.


Software, such as an antivirus program, is running.
Another device, such as a scanner, is connected to the computer.

To resolve the problem


1. Make sure that no USB devices other than the printer, the keyboard, and the mouse
are connected to the computer.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
3. Make sure that the printer is connected directly to a USB port on the computer
(instead of through a USB hub).
4. If the installation program still does not locate the printer, replace the USB cable,
and then continue to the next step.
5. Click Cancel, and then restart the computer.
6. Turn the printer off, and then disconnect the USB cable and power cord.

HP Photosmart Software Help

59

Chapter 11

7.

Quit any antivirus programs or other software programs that are running on the
computer.
Note To quit an antivirus program, follow the manufacturers instructions.

8.

Reinstall the printer software:


a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions. When the installation program prompts you,
connect the USB cable and the power cord to the printer, and then make sure
that the printer is on.
Note Do not connect the USB cable until you are told to do so.

9.

c. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.


Restart the antivirus program.

"Unknown Device" message displays


During installation, an Unknown Device message might be displayed when you connect
a USB cable between the printer and the computer. A possible cause might be a defective
USB cable.
Note This is not a problem if you are using Windows 2000. If you are using
Windows 2000 and this message is displayed, you can continue with the software
installation.
To resolve the problem
1. Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the printer.
3. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
4. Reconnect the power cord to the printer.
5. Reconnect the USB cable to the printer.
6. If the Unknown Device message is still displayed, replace the USB cable.

60

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Printer name does not appear


If the printer software seems to install correctly, but the printer name does not appear in
the list of printers when you click Print on the File menu or in the Printers folder in Control
Panel, try reinstalling the printer software.
To reinstall the printer software
1. Quit any antivirus programs or other software programs that are running on the
computer.
Note To quit an antivirus program, follow the manufacturers instructions.

2.

Uninstall the printer software:


a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive, and then follow the onscreen
instructions.
Note If the installation program does not start automatically, click your
CD drive letter in Windows Explorer, then double-click the setup.exe file.
For example, double-click D:\setup.exe.

3.

4.

b. When prompted, click Remove All.


Reinstall the printer software:
a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.
Restart the antivirus program.

Printer does not print

Verify the following


Check the printer cable connection
Clear the print queue
If the printer still does not print

Verify the following


Verify the following conditions if the printer is not printing:

The printer is connected to the power source.


The cable connections are secure.
The printer is turned on.
The print cartridges are the correct print cartridges for the printer and are properly
installed.
For more information, see Print cartridges and Installation instructions.
The paper or other media is correctly loaded in the paper tray.
The printer cover is closed.
The rear access door is attached.

HP Photosmart Software Help

61

Chapter 11

Check the printer cable connection


If your printer and computer are connected with a USB cable and the devices are not
communicating with each other, try the following:

Make sure the power cord is firmly connected to the printer and plugged into a power
outlet.
Check the USB cable. If you are using an older cable, it might not be working
properly. If you experience problems, the USB cable might need to be replaced. Also
verify that the cable does not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet) in length.
Check the connection from your printer to your computer. Verify that the USB cable
is securely plugged into the USB port on the back of your printer. Make sure the
other end of the USB cable is plugged into a USB port on your computer. After the
cable is connected properly, turn your printer off and then on again.
If you are connecting the printer through a USB hub, make sure the hub is turned
on. If the hub is on, try connecting the printer directly to your computer.
Try connecting the USB cable to another USB port on your computer. After you
check the connections, try restarting your computer. Turn your printer off and then
on again.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.

Clear the print queue


When you start a print job, it is sent to a list called the print queue. If the printer stops
printing before the job is complete, the print job might be stalled in the print queue.
To resolve a print job that is stalled in the queue
1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Double-click the name of the HP Deskjet printer.
3. Click the Printer menu, and then click Pause Printing.
4. Click the Printer menu again, and then click Cancel All Documents.
5. Click Yes to confirm the cancellation.
6. Click the Printer menu, and then uncheck Pause Printing.
7. If there are still documents in the list, restart the computer.
8. After restarting, if there are still documents in the list, repeat steps 1 6.

If the printer still does not print


1.

2.

62

Select the topic below that best describes the problem:


Paper jam
Out of paper message
Printer is stalled
If the printer still does not print, shut down, and then restart your computer.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Paper jam
To clear a paper jam
1. Remove the paper from the paper tray.
2. If you are printing labels, verify that a label did not become detached from the label
sheet while passing through the printer.
3. Turn off the printer.
4. Remove the rear access door. Press the handle to the right, and then pull out the
door.

5.

Remove the paper jam from the back of the printer, and then replace the rear access
door securely.

6.

If the paper jam cannot be removed from the back of the printer, raise the printer
cover, remove the paper jam from the front of the printer, and then lower the cover.
Caution Remove the paper jam carefully as it is possible to damage the
printer when removing paper from the front.

7.

Reload paper in the paper tray.

HP Photosmart Software Help

63

Chapter 11

8.
9.

Turn on the printer.


Reprint the document.
Note If paper jams occur frequently, try using a heavier paper. See Printer
specifications for paper weight specifications.

Paper problems

Printer does not feed paper


Out of paper message
Printer prints on multiple sheets at once

Printer does not feed paper


Try one or more of the following solutions:

Reduce the number of sheets in the paper tray.


Remove the paper from the paper tray, and then reload it.
Use a different type of paper.

Out of paper message


Follow the appropriate steps for the condition that exists.

If the paper tray is loaded


If the paper tray is empty

If the paper tray is loaded


1. Verify the following:
A sufficient amount of paper is loaded in the paper tray (at least ten sheets).
The paper tray is not overly full.
The paper stack is touching the back of the paper tray.
2. Slide the paper guide so that it fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
3. Click Continue to resume printing.
If the paper tray is empty
1. Load paper in the paper tray.
2. Push the paper forward until it stops.
3. Slide the paper guide so that it fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
4. Click Continue to resume printing.

Printer prints on multiple sheets at once


If the printer prints on multiple sheets at once, check the following:

Paper weight
Paper might be loaded improperly

Paper weight
The printer might print on multiple sheets of paper at once if the paper is under the
recommended paper weight. Use paper that is within the recommended specifications.
64

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Paper might be loaded improperly


The printer might print on multiple sheets of paper at once if the paper is loaded too far
toward the back of the printer or if the paper guide is not positioned firmly against the
paper. Reload the paper into the paper tray, pushing the paper until you feel resistance,
and then slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper stack.
The printer also might print on multiple sheets if different paper types are loaded in the
printer. For example, photo paper might be mixed with plain paper. Empty the paper tray
and load only the paper type that is appropriate for the document that you are printing.

Printer is stalled
If the printer stalls while printing a document, raise the printer cover, and then disconnect
the power cable from the back of the printer.
Caution First, check for any loose or broken parts in the printer. If you find loose
or broken parts, go to www.hp.com/support.
If there are no loose or broken parts, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Check for and remove any obstacles, such as packing tape or materials, that prevent
the print cartridges from moving back and forth.
Make sure the print cartridges are installed securely in the print cartridge cradle.
For more information, see Installation instructions.
Make sure the tri-color print cartridge is installed in the left side of the cradle and the
black or photo print cartridge is installed in the right side of the cradle.
Check for and clear any paper jam.
For more information, see Paper jam.
Lower the printer cover.
Connect the power cable to the back of the printer, and then turn on the printer.

Print cartridge problems

Incorrect print cartridge


Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly
"Printing in ink-backup mode" message
"Print cartridge is in the wrong slot" message

HP Photosmart Software Help

65

Chapter 11

Incorrect print cartridge


The printer can only print when the correct print cartridges are installed.
To verify that you have the correct print cartridges
1. Open the printer cover.
2. Read the selection number on the print cartridge label.

3.

4.
5.
6.

Warranty date

Selection number

Check the list of print cartridges that can be used in the printer.
a. Open the printer Toolbox.
b. Click the Estimated Ink Levels tab.
c. Click the Print Cartridge Information button and view the list of print cartridge
selection numbers.
The reference guide that came with the printer also shows the print cartridge
selection numbers.
Check the warranty date on the print cartridge.
If the print cartridge has the wrong selection number, or if the warranty has expired,
install a new print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
Close the printer cover.
If the Power light is not flashing, then the problem is fixed.
If the Power light is flashing, visit HP Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.

Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly


The printer cannot print if the print cartridges are faulty, or if they are not installed properly.
To resolve the problem
1. Raise the printer cover.
2. Do one of the following:
If an error message is displayed on screen, remove the print cartridge that is
named in the error message. Go to step 3.
If an error message is not displayed, remove and reinstall each print cartridge.
If the Power light is not flashing, the problem is solved.
If the Power light is flashing, go to step 4.

66

HP Deskjet D2300 series

3.

4.
5.

Reinstall the print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
If the Power light is not flashing, the problem is solved.
If the Power light is flashing, go to step 4.
Manually clean the print cartridge.
Reinsert the print cartridge in the printer and close the printer cover.
If the Power light is still flashing, the print cartridge is faulty and must be replaced.
Note You can print with one print cartridge in ink-backup mode if you do not
have a replacement print cartridge available. For more information, see Inkbackup mode.

6.

If the Power light continues to flash after replacing the print cartridge, visit HP
Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.

"Printing in ink-backup mode" message


When the printer detects that only one print cartridge is installed, ink-backup mode is
initiated. This printing mode lets you print with a single print cartridge, but it slows the
printer and affects the quality of printouts.
If you receive the ink-backup mode message and two print cartridges are installed in the
printer, verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from each print
cartridge. When plastic tape covers the print cartridge contacts, the printer cannot detect
that the print cartridge is installed.

"Print cartridge is in the wrong slot" message


If you receive this error message, the print cartridge is installed in the wrong side of the
print cartridge cradle.
Always install the tri-color print cartridge in the left print cartridge cradle compartment.
Install the black or photo print cartridge in the right print cartridge cradle compartment.

Photos do not print correctly

Check the paper tray


Check the printer properties

Check the paper tray


1.
2.
3.

Verify that the photo paper is placed in the paper tray with the side to be printed on
facing down.
Slide the paper forward until it stops.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Do not press the guide so firmly against the paper that the paper bends or curls.

Check the printer properties


Open the Printer Properties dialog box and verify the following options:

HP Photosmart Software Help

67

Chapter 11

Tab

Setting
Size is: An appropriate paper size

Paper/Quality

Type is: An appropriate photo paper


Print quality: Best or Maximum dpi

Print quality is poor

Streaks and missing lines


Print is faded
Blank pages print

Streaks and missing lines


If your printed pages are missing lines or dots or if streaks appear, the print cartridges
might be low on ink or might need to be cleaned. For more information, see View
estimated ink levels and Automatically clean print cartridges.

Print is faded

Verify that neither of the print cartridges is low on ink.


For more information, see View estimated ink levels. If a print cartridge is low on ink,
consider replacing the print cartridge. For the correct part numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Verify that a black print cartridge is installed.
If the black text and images on your printouts are faded, you might be printing with
only the tri-color print cartridge. Insert a black print cartridge, in addition to the tricolor print cartridge, for optimal black print quality.
Verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from the print
cartridges.

68

Remove plastic tape

Consider selecting a higher print quality.

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Blank pages print

The protective piece of plastic tape might still be attached to the print cartridges.
Verify that the plastic tape has been removed from the print cartridges.

Remove plastic tape

The print cartridges might be out of ink. Replace one or both empty print cartridges.
For more information, see View estimated ink levels.

Document is misprinted

Text and images are misaligned


Document is printed off-center or at an angle
Parts of the document are missing or printed in the wrong place
Envelope is printed at an angle
Document does not reflect the new print settings

Text and images are misaligned


If the text and images on your printouts are misaligned, then align the print cartridges.

Document is printed off-center or at an angle


1.
2.
3.

Verify that only one type of paper is placed in the paper tray, and that the paper has
been placed in the tray correctly.
Verify that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of paper.
Reprint the document.

Parts of the document are missing or printed in the wrong place


Open the Printer Properties dialog box and confirm the following options:
Tab

Setting

Basics

Orientation: Verify the appropriate orientation.

Paper/Quality

Size is: Verify the appropriate paper size.

Effects

Scale to fit: Select this option to scale text and


graphics to the paper.

Finishing

Poster printing: Verify that Off is selected.

HP Photosmart Software Help

69

Chapter 11

If parts of the document are still missing, the printer settings might be overridden by the
software program print settings. Select the appropriate print settings from within the
software program.

Envelope is printed at an angle


1.
2.
3.

Slide the flap inside the envelope before loading it in the printer.
Confirm that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of the envelope.
Reprint the envelope.

Document does not reflect the new print settings


The printer settings might differ from the software program print settings. Select the
appropriate print settings within the software program.

Problems with borderless documents

Borderless printing guidelines


Image is printed at an angle
Fading occurs on the edges of a photo
Photo has an unwanted border

Borderless printing guidelines


When printing borderless photos or brochures, follow these guidelines:

Verify that the paper size that is specified in the Paper Size drop-down list on the
Printing Shortcuts tab matches the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper
tray.
Select the appropriate paper type in the Paper Type drop-down list on the Printing
Shortcuts tab.
If printing in grayscale, select High Quality under Print in Grayscale on the
Color tab.
Do not print borderless documents in ink-backup mode. Always have two print
cartridges installed in the printer when printing borderless documents.
For more information, see Ink-backup mode.

Image is printed at an angle

70

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Verify that no problem exists with the source image. For example, if you are printing a
scanned image, verify that the image was not crooked when it was scanned.
If the problem is not caused by the source image, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove all paper from the paper tray.


Load the photo paper correctly in the paper tray.
Verify that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
Follow loading instructions for the paper type.

Fading occurs on the edges of a photo

Verify that the photo paper is not curled. If the photo paper is curled, place the paper in
a plastic bag and gently bend it in the opposite direction of the curl until the paper lies
flat. If the problem persists, then use photo paper that is not curled.
For instructions about preventing photo paper from curling, see Store and handle photo
paper.

Photo has an unwanted border

For small photo paper


For small photo paper with a tear-off tab

For small photo paper

HP Photosmart Software Help

71

Chapter 11

If the printout has an unwanted border, try the following solutions:

Align the print cartridges.


Open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Paper/Quality tab, and verify that
the selected paper size matches both the paper size that the photo is formatted for
and the size of the paper that is loaded in the printer.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select
the Borderless auto fit check box.
Verify that the software application you are using supports borderless printing.
Verify that no problem exists with the source image. For example, if you are printing
a scanned image, verify that the image was not crooked when it was scanned.

For small photo paper with a tear-off tab


If the border appears below the tear-off tab, then remove the tab.

If the border appears above the tear-off tab, then align the print cartridges.

HP Photosmart Express software is not installed


You pressed the Photosmart Express button on the printer but the HP Photosmart
Express software is not installed on the computer.
The HP Photosmart Express software must be installed on the computer before you can
use the Photosmart Express button. Insert the HP software CD that came with your
72

HP Deskjet D2300 series

printer in the CD drive. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the HP Photosmart
Express software.

Error messages

Print cartridge error messages


Other error messages

Print cartridge error messages


If you receive a print cartridge error message, follow these directions.
Incorrect print cartridge message
The printer can only print when the correct print cartridges are installed. If you receive a
print cartridge error message, one or both of the print cartridges cannot be used in the
printer.
To resolve the problem, follow the instructions in Incorrect print cartridge.
Print cartridge problem message
The printer cannot print if the print cartridges are faulty, or if they are not installed properly.
If you receive a message stating there is a problem with a print cartridge, follow the
instructions in Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly to resolve the problem.
"Print cartridge carriage is stalled" message
If the printer stalls while you are printing a document, follow the instructions in Printer is
stalled.
"Print cartridge is in the wrong slot" message
If you receive this error message, the print cartridge is installed in the wrong side of the
print cartridge cradle. Follow the instructions in "Print cartridge is in the wrong slot"
message to resolve the problem.
"Printing in ink-backup mode" message
If you receive this error message, follow these instructions.

Other error messages


If you receive an error message, follow these directions.
Out of paper message
If you receive an out of paper message, follow the guidelines in Out of paper message.
"There was an error writing to USB port" message
The printer might not be receiving correct data from another USB device or USB hub.
Connect the printer directly to the USB port on the computer.

HP Photosmart Software Help

73

Chapter 11

"Two-way communication cannot be established" or "Printer not responding"


message
The printer might not be able to communicate with the computer if the USB cable is too
long.
If you receive this error message, make sure that the USB cable is not greater than 3
meters (approximately 9.8 feet) in length.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.

General Protection Fault


A General Protection Fault, or GPF, is a Microsoft Windows error message that appears
when a software program, or a device such as a printer, performs an action that Windows
determines to be a problem.
There are many possible causes of a GPF. Try the following to resolve a GPF:
1.
2.
3.

Restart your computer, and then try printing again.


Try printing using different settings or options.
If the problem still occurs:
Use a different software program, if available.
Check with the software program vendor for program updates.
Verify that your computer has sufficient RAM and hard disk space.
Delete any temporary files on your computer.

If you continue to experience problems, visit HP Technical Support at


www.hp.com/support.

Power light is on or flashing

74

Power light

If the Power light is on, the printer is either printing or ready to print.
If the Power light is off, the printer is off.
If the Power light is flashing, see the following information.

What the flashing light means

HP Deskjet D2300 series

If an error message appears


If no error message appears

What the flashing light means


The Power light can flash for several reasons:

The printer cover is open.


The printer is out of paper.
A problem exists with the printer, such as a paper jam or a problem with a print
cartridge.
For information about clearing a paper jam, see Paper jam.

If an error message appears


Read the error message that explains the problem and its solution.

If no error message appears


Check the status of the printer by using the printer tools. To gain access to the tools,
open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Services tab, and then click the Service
this device button.
Use the printer tools to perform the following tasks:

View estimated ink levels.


Clean the print cartridges.
Calibrate the printer.
Print a test page.
Perform other functions as needed.

Document prints slowly


Multiple software programs are open
The computer resources are insufficient for the printer to print at its optimum speed.
To increase printer speed, close all unnecessary software programs when printing.
Complex documents, graphics, or photos are printing
Documents containing graphics or photos print more slowly than text documents.
Best or Maximum dpi print mode is selected
The printer prints more slowly when Best or Maximum dpi is selected as the print quality.
To increase the printer speed, select a different print quality mode.
Printer is in ink-backup mode
The printer might print more slowly if it is in ink-backup mode. For more information, see
Ink-backup mode.
To increase the print speed, use two print cartridges in the printer.

HP Photosmart Software Help

75

Chapter 11

Printer software is outdated


Outdated printer software might be installed.
For information about updating the printer software, see Download printer software
updates.
Computer does not meet system requirements
If your computer does not have enough RAM or a large amount of free space on the hard
drive, the printer processing time will be longer.
1.

2.

Verify that the computer hard disk space, RAM, and processor speed meet the
system requirements.
The system requirements are listed in the reference guide that came with the printer.
Make space available on the hard drive by deleting unwanted files.

If you continue to have problems


If you continue to have problems after investigating the troubleshooting topics, shut down
your computer and then restart it.
If you still have questions after restarting your computer, visit HP Technical Support at
www.hp.com/support.
For information about the support process, see HP support.

76

HP Deskjet D2300 series

HP support

Support process
HP support by phone

Support process
If you have a problem, follow these steps
1.
2.

Check the documentation that came with the HP Deskjet.


Visit the HP online support Web site at www.hp.com/support. HP online support is available
to all HP customers. It is the fastest source for up-to-date device information and expert
assistance and includes the following features:

3.

4.

Fast access to qualified online support specialists


Software and driver updates for your HP Deskjet
Valuable HP Deskjet and troubleshooting information for common problems
Proactive device updates, support alerts, and HP newsgrams that are available when you
register your device
For Europe only: Contact your local point of purchase. If your device has a hardware failure,
you will be asked to bring it back to your local point of purchase. (Service is provided at no
charge during the device limited warranty period. After the warranty period, you will be quoted
a service charge.)
Call HP support. Support options and availability vary by device, country/region, and language.

HP support by phone

Phone support period


Placing a call
After the phone support period

Phone support period


One year of phone support is available in North America, Asia Pacific, and Latin America (including
Mexico). To determine the duration of phone support in Europe, the Middle East, and Africa, go
to www.hp.com/support. Standard phone company charges apply.

Placing a call
Call HP support while you are in front of the computer and the HP Deskjet. Be prepared to provide
the following information:

Device model number (located on the label on the front of the device)
Device serial number (located on the back or bottom of the device)
Messages that appear when the situation occurs
Answers to these questions:

Has this situation happened before?


Can you re-create it?
Did you add any new hardware or software to your computer at about the time that this
situation began?
Did anything else occur prior to this situation (such as a thunderstorm, device was moved,
etc.)?

HP Photosmart Software Help

77

Appendix A

After the phone support period


After the phone support period, help is available from HP at an additional cost. Help may also be
available at the HP online support Web site: www.hp.com/support. Contact your HP dealer or call
the support phone number for your country/region to learn more about support options.

78

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Supplies
Order the following supplies with your HP Deskjet.
Paper
To order media such as HP Premium Paper, HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film, or HP Greeting
Cards, go to www.hp.com.
Choose your country/region, and then click Buy or Online Shopping.
USB cables
C6518A HP USB AB 2-meter cable

HP Photosmart Software Help

79

Technical information

Printer specifications
Environmental product stewardship program
Regulatory notices

Printer specifications
The HP Deskjet has the following specifications and requirements.
Physical specifications
Printer dimension (without the tray extended): 140 mm high x 467 mm wide x 190 mm deep (5.51
inches high x 16.57 inches wide x 7.48 inches deep)
Printer weight (without print cartridges): 2.5 kg (5.51 lbs)
Software compatibility
Windows compatible (98 SE, Me, 2000, and XP)
Memory
384 KB integrated memory
Minimum system requirements
Operating system

Processor

RAM

Hard disk
space

Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000,


XP

Pentium II or equivalent

64 MB

200 MB

Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.

Paper tray capacity


Plain paper sheets: Up to 100
Paper size
For a complete list of supported media sizes, see the printer software.
Paper weights
Letter Paper: 65 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb)
Legal Paper: 70 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb)
Envelopes: 70 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb)
Cards: Up to 200 g/m (110-lb index maximum)
Photo Paper: Up to 280 g/m (75-lb index maximum)

Environmental product stewardship program


Hewlett-Packard is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner.
Design for recycling has been incorporated into this product. The number of materials has been
kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and reliability. Dissimilar materials have been
designed to separate easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and
remove using common tools. High priority parts have been designed to access quickly for efficient
disassembly and repair.
80

HP Deskjet D2300 series

For more information, visit HPs Commitment to the Environment Web site at:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/index.html
This section contains the following topics:

Paper use
Plastics
Material safety data sheets
Recycling program
HP inkjet supplies recycling program
Energy consumption - Energy Star

Paper use
This product is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309 and EN 12281:2002.

Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability
to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of product life.

Material safety data sheets


Material safety data sheets (MSDS) can be obtained from the HP Web site at:
www.hp.com/go/msds

Recycling program
HP offers an increasing number of product return and recycling programs in many countries/regions,
and partners with some of the largest electronic recycling centers throughout the world. HP
conserves resources by reselling some of its most popular products. For more information regarding
recycling of HP products, please visit:
For more information regarding recycling of HP products, please visit:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/recycle/

HP inkjet supplies recycling program


HP is committed to protecting the environment. The HP Inkjet Supplies Recycling Program is
available in many countries/regions, and lets you recycle used print cartridges and ink cartridges
free of charge. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/recycle/

Energy consumption - Energy Star


Energy usage drops significantly while in ENERGY STAR mode, which saves natural resources,
and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product.
This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR (MOU v.3.0), which is a voluntary program established
to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products.

ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. EPA. As an ENERGY STAR partner,
HP has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.
For more information on ENERGY STAR guidelines, go to the following Web site:
www.energystar.gov

HP Photosmart Software Help

81

Appendix C

Regulatory notices

FCC statement
LED indicator statement
Notice to users in Korea

FCC statement
The United States Federal Communications Commission (in 47 CFR 15.105) has specified that the
following notice be brought to the attention of users of this product.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.


Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Modifications (part 15.21): The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
For further information, contact the Manager of Corporate Product Regulations, Hewlett-Packard
Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, (650) 857-1501.

LED indicator statement


The display LEDs meet the requirements of EN 60825-1.

Notice to users in Korea

82

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Index
A
accessibility 2
after the support period 78
aligning print cartridges 53
B
booklet printing 34
borderless printing 70
bound two-sided printing 44
brochure printing 32
buttons
Photosmart Express
button 8
Power button 7
Print Cancel button 8
C
calling HP support 77
CD/DVD tattoo printing 30
cleaning
print cartridges
automatically 53
print cartridges manually
55
printer body 54
clearing the print queue 62
color calibration 53
custom paper size 42
D
default print settings 46
default printer 46
digital photos 21
document is misprinted
document is printed offcenter or at an angle 69
document printing 25
document prints slowly
complex documents are
printing 75
ink-backup mode 75
Maximum dpi selected 75
multiple programs are
open 75
printer software is
outdated 76
system requirements 76
HP Photosmart Software Help

dpi, maximum 41
duplexing 44
E
e-mail printing 24
energy consumption 81
Energy Star 81
envelope printing 27
environment
Environmental product
stewardship program
80
error messages
other errors 73
out of paper message 64
print cartridge errors 73
estimated ink level 54
Exif Print 22
F
fast/economical printing
FCC statement 82

39

G
general everyday printing 40
grayscale printing 42
greeting card printing 33
H
Hewlett-Packard Company
notices 2
HP Photosmart software
downloading 49
I
index card printing 29
Ink Status window 48
ink, removing ink from skin and
clothing 54
ink-backup mode 13
installation
program stops 59
installing print cartridges 50
iron-on transfer printing 37
L
label printing

30

LED indicator statement 82


letter printing 26
lights
Power light 7
low ink 54
M
maintenance
print cartridges 56
printer 50
printer body 54
maximum dpi 41
O
other document printing 24
P
page order, setting 42
paper jam 63
paper tray
folding paper tray 11
unfolding paper tray 9
paper type, selecting 40
phone support period
period for support 77
photo has unwanted border
for small photo paper 71
photo paper, storing and
handling 22
photo print cartridge 21
photo printing
borderless photos 17
photos with a border 19
saving money 23
photo printing problems
verifying print settings 67
photos
digital 21
do not print correctly 67
Photosmart Express button
16
placing a call 77
postcard printing 28
poster printing 36
power light is flashing
if an error message
appears 75
83

if no error message
appears 75
presentation printing 40
print cartridge problems
incorrect print cartridge 66
print cartridges
aligning 53
cleaning automatically 53
cleaning manually 55
faulty 66
installing 50
maintaining 56
not installed properly 66
ordering information 54
photo print cartridge 21
problem message 66
selection numbers 50
used with the printer 12
print preview 43
print quality
blank pages print 69
print queue, clearing 62
print resolution 41
print settings
changing 47
default settings 46
print speed 40
printer does not feed paper
64
printer features 6
printer is not printing 61
printer is stalled 65
printer maintenance 50
printer name does not
appear 61
printer prints on multiple sheets
at once 64
printer properties 47
printer software
downloading updates 49
printer specifications 80
printer Toolbox 57
printer troubleshooting 59
printing
4800 x 1200 optimized
dpi 41
booklets 34
borderless photos 17
bound two-sided printing
44
brochures 32
CD/DVD tattoos 30
custom paper size 42

84

digital photos 21
documents 25
e-mails 24
envelopes 27
Exif Print 22
fast/economical 39
general everyday printing
40
grayscale 42
greeting cards 33
high quality 41
index cards and small
media 29
iron-on transfers 37
labels 30
letters 26
maximum dpi 41
multiple pages on single
sheet 43
other documents 24
photos 17
photos with a border 19
Photosmart Express
button 16
postcards 28
posters 36
presentation printing 40
print preview 43
print quality 40
print resolution 41
print settings 47
print speed 40
resizing documents 43
selecting a paper type 40
setting the page order 42
software 46
tips 39
transparencies 31
two-sided printing 44
with one print cartridge 13
Printing Shortcuts tab 39
printing tips 39
problems with borderless
documents
for small photo paper with a
tear off tab 72
R
Real Life technologies 21
recycle
ink cartridges 81
regulatory notices
FCC statement 82

notice to users in Korea


82
removing ink from skin and
clothing 54
resizing documents 43
S
settings 47
T
terms and conventions in
manual 2
test page, printing 54
Toolbox 57
transparency printing 31
troubleshooting
borderless printing
guidelines 70
borderless printing
problems 70
document does not reflect
new print settings 70
document prints slowly 75
envelope prints at angle
70
image prints at angle 70
installation program stops
59
misprinted document 69
multiple pages print at
once 64
paper jam 63
parts of the document are
missing or in wrong
place 69
photo printing problems
67
poor print quality 68
print is faded 68
printer 59
printer does not feed
paper 64
printer is not printing 61
printer is stalled 65
printer name does not
appear 61
streaks and missing lines
68
text and images are
misaligned 69
unwanted border on
photo 71

HP Deskjet D2300 series

Index
two-sided printing

44

U
Unknown Device message 60
updates
downloading for software
49
HP Photosmart software
49
USB
cable 79
connecting to the printer
15
W
What's This help 48

HP Photosmart Software Help

85

86

HP Deskjet D2300 series

User Manual
for
DOT MATRIX PRINTER
OKI MICROLINE 280 Elite

This document contains the complete manual:


OKI, MICROLINE 280 Elite, Users Guide

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-416001-01MU

Unrestricted

1.0

2006 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

- BLANK PAGE -

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-416001-01MU

Unrestricted

1.0

2006 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

ML280 ELITE

user's guide

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete,
accurate, and up-to-date. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of
errors beyond its control. The manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in
software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this Guide will
not affect the applicability of the information in it. Mention of software products
manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the
manufacturer.
While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and
helpful as possible, we make no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, as to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained herein.
The most up-to-date drivers and manuals are available from the Oki Europe website:

http://www.okieurope.com
Copyright 2004. All rights reserved.
Oki and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Company Ltd.
Energy Star is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
Hewlett-Packard, HP, and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.
Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their proprietors.
As an Energy Star Program Participant, the manufacturer has
determined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for
energy efficiency.
This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives
89/336/EEC (EMC) and 73/23/EEC (LVD) as amended where applicable
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to
electromagnetic compatibility and low voltage.

PREFACE > 2

CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Using this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Online usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Printing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Contents and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removing the shipping restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ribbon cartridge handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing the platen knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adjusting the head gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fitting the paper separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For AC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For DC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . . . . 17
Bottom feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . 20
Top feed single sheet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Testing your printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Computer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parallel (LPT) connection, IEEE 1284 . . . . . . . . . . . 23
USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Serial connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Front panel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting printer defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Entering the MENU mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Default menu selections - AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the pull tractor unit (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using the cut-sheet feeder (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Manual loading with the cut-sheet
feeder installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cut-sheet feeder controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

CONTENTS > 3

Using the roll paper stand (if fitted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


Loading the paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Replacing the ribbon cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Adjusting the printhead gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Testing your printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear feed jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear feed, repeating paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Single sheet paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Purchasing parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Oki contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

CONTENTS > 4

NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS


CAUTION!
A caution appears in this manual like this. A caution provides
additional information which, if ignored, may result in equipment
malfunction or damage.

WARNING!
A warning appears in this manual like this. A warning provides
additional information which, if ignored, may result in a risk of
personal injury.
NOTE
A note appears like this. A note provides additional information to
supplement the main text.

NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS > 5

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on purchasing this Oki printer!
In this chapter you will find a summary of the main features of your
printer followed by some advice on how to use this Users Guide to get
the most from your printer.
The ML280 Elite is an entry level 9 pin dot-matrix printer. It is fast,
robust, compact and light. Outstanding reliability, compact size and
ease of use make it ideal for industrial workstation applications, as
well as customer service points in wholesale, retail and service
environments.

Using this manual


This manual will lead you logically through the unpacking, setting up
and operation of your printer to help you to make the best use of its
many advanced features. Also included are guidelines for
troubleshooting and maintenance to ensure that it continues to
perform at its best. Instructions are also provided for adding optional
accessories as your needs evolve.
l

The Users Guide has been written using one printer as a


model, and the illustrations/screenshots reflect this. What you
see will be appropriate to the model you are installing.

The Users Guide has been designed to provide you with a


clear presentation on the installation and maintenance of your
new printer. This information is compiled in the logical
sequence required to result in a successful installation.

NOTE
The information in this manual is supplemented by the extensive
online help facility associated with the printer driver software.

In addition, we provide a Technical Reference Guide for those users


requiring more in-depth Technical information. This is available in
English only.

INTRODUCTION > 6

Online usage
This manual is intended to be read on screen using Adobe Acrobat
Reader. Use the navigation and viewing tools provided in Acrobat.
You can access specific information in two ways:
l

In the list of bookmarks down the left hand side of your screen,
click on the topic of interest to jump to the required topic. (If
the bookmarks are not available, use the Table of Contents.)

In the list of bookmarks click on Index to jump to the Index. (If


the bookmarks are not available, use the Table of Contents.)
Find the term of interest in the alphabetically arranged index
and click on the associated page number to jump to the page
containing the subject.

Printing pages
The whole book, individual pages, or sections may be printed. The
procedure is:
1.

From the toolbar, select [File], then [Print] (or press the
Ctrl + P keys).

2.

Choose which pages you wish to print:


(a)

All pages, for the entire manual.

(b)

Current page for the page at which you are looking.

INTRODUCTION > 7

(c)

3.

Pages from and to for the range of pages you specify by


entering their page numbers.

Click on OK.

INTRODUCTION > 8

GETTING STARTED
Location
l

Select a firm, solid surface on which to site your printer.

Allow enough space around the printer to easily access the


platen knob and the various paper feed paths.

Make sure a suitable grounded power outlet is available


nearby.

Read the Installation Safety Booklet.

Contents and unpacking


l

If any items are missing, contact your dealer immediately.

Keep your packing materials and carton in case you ever need
to ship or transport the printer.

3
5
4

2
1
6

8
10

7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Printer
Ribbon Cartridge
Power Cord(s)
Platen Knob
Sheet Separator

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

9
Installation Safety booklet
Pan European limited Warranty
Manual CD
Driver CD
Setup Guide

GETTING STARTED > 9

Do not plug the printer into the AC supply until the following steps
have been completed:

Removing the shipping restraint


1.

Remove any packing tape. Insert your hand in the top cover
slot (2) and remove the access cover (1) by lifting it.
2

2.

Remove the printhead shipping restraint. Keep shipping


restraint for future use.

3.

Reinstall the access cover.

GETTING STARTED > 10

Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge


CAUTION!
When replacing a Ribbon Cartridge, make sure you have the correct
replacement ribbon for your printer. The wrong ribbon will not print
when installed in your printer.

Ribbon cartridge handling


l

Leave unused ribbon cartridges in their packages until


needed.

Careful; the ribbon ink may cause permanent stains.

Ribbon ink on skin or clothing can usually be removed with


soap and water.

Make sure the printer is turned OFF.


1.

Open the access cover and center the printhead (1).

GETTING STARTED > 11

2.

When replacing a Ribbon Cartridge, first remove the old one.

WARNING!
If you are replacing the ribbon Cartridge, the printhead may be HOT!
3.

Unpack the ribbon cartridge and install it on the printhead.

1
2

GETTING STARTED > 12

4.

Press gently on the ribbon cartridge until you feel it click into
place.

CAUTION!
Do not remove the ribbon shield (X in graphic above) from the
ribbon!
5.

Turn the take-up knob (a) in the direction of the moulded arrow
to take up any ribbon slack.
a

6.

Replace the access cover.

Installing the platen knob


If the Platen Knob is not already fitted, align the key way (a) correctly
and push it firmly into place.

GETTING STARTED > 13

Adjusting the head gap


The head gap is the distance between the print head and the platen
roller. When you use envelopes or multi-part forms you will need to
have a larger gap than when using plain paper. Use the recommended
head gap to ensure the best print quality and easy paper feed.

CAUTION!
Incorrect setting of the print head gap can cause print head damage
or ribbon jams. To avoid these problems set the print head gap for the
type of stationery being used.
To adjust the print head gap, move the coloured lever located to the
left of the ribbon cartridge (a), to the correct position for the type of
stationery being used......

.....as detailed in the following table:


Paper Type

Weight

Lever position

Single part paper


Form
Two part
Three part
Four part

14 - 20lb (52 - 75gm)

1, 2

9 - 11 lb. (35 - 40 gm) with a


2-3
maximum thickness of 0.28mm 3
3

GETTING STARTED > 14

Fitting the paper separator


The Paper Separator is utilised when using single sheets (no carbons)
and when using continuous stationery to separate the ingoing/
outgoing paper to prevent paper jams. It is fitted as follows:
1.

Grasp the paper separator by either side, with the spring


loaded stays to the rear of the printer.

2.

Locate the two hooked lugs on the edges of the paper


separator into the two corresponding slots in the top of the
printer.

3.

Release paper separator on to the top of the printer.

GETTING STARTED > 15

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER


Power connection
Make sure both the printer and the computer are switched OFF.

For AC models:
1.

Plug the power cord into the back of the printer, then into a
grounded AC outlet.

2.

Switch the Printer ON.

For DC models:
With the printer switched OFF.....
1.

Terminate the free ends of the power cord with connector(s)


appropriate for connection to your DC voltage source.

WARNING!
Observe polarity of connection!

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 16

2.

Plug the power cord into the back of the printer and lock by
twisting the collar of the connector clockwise.

3
2

3.

Switch the Printer ON.

Loading paper
Three types of paper can be used with your printer:
l

Single sheet (with or without the optional cut sheet feeder)

Roll paper (use the correct rollpaper stand)

Fan-fold paper (with or without the optional tractor feed unit)

When using fan-fold paper, adjust the distance between the sprocket
pins at the ends of the platen to the holes in the paper. Fan-fold paper
can be fed from the rear of the printer, or, if a slotted stand is
available, from underneath.

Rear feed continuous form fan-fold paper


Ensure that the printer is switched OFF and the power supply lead
removed.
1.

Place a box of fan-fold paper behind the printer.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 17

2.

Remove the Access cover (1).

1
3.

Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.

4.

Move the Paper lever (3) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.

5.

Insert the first sheet of paper between the separator paper


guides (4).
4
2

3
5

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 18

Push the paper in just enough so that its sprocket holes


engage the sprocket pins located on the platen ends.
6.

Turn the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper until it appears
in front of the platen.

7.

Move the Bail arm lever (2) to the rear of the machine to lower
the Bail bar.

8.

Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.

9.

Replace the Access cover and switch the printer ON.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 19

Bottom feed continuous form fan-fold paper


Ensure that the printer is switched OFF and the power supply lead
removed.
1.

Place the printer on a slotted printer stand, carefully aligning


the slot in the stand with the slot in the base of the printer.

2.

Place a box of fan-fold paper under the printer stand.

3.

Remove the Access cover.

4.

Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.

5.

Move the Paper lever (3) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.

6.

Insert the first sheet of paper through the opening in the


printer stand and the bottom of the printer.

7.

Adjust the Platen sprocket(s) to align with the sprocket holes


in the paper.

8.

Use the Platen knob to gently pull the paper up until it appears
in front of the platen, and above the Bail bar

9.

Move the Bail arm lever to the rear of the machine to lower the
Bail bar (6).

10.

Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.

11.

Replace the Access cover and switch the printer ON.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 20

Top feed single sheet paper


Your printer can accommodate single sheets of 216mm width x 297 or
355mm length paper. Remove the Tractor Feed unit and any other
accessories, then raise the Paper Separator into its upright position.

3
2

1.

Switch the printer ON.

2.

Move the Paper lever (1) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the rear of the machine, to the Blank sheet of paper symbol.

3.

Ensure that the printer is OFF-LINE (press the SELECT switch if


necessary).
Make sure the Bail arm lever (2) is set to the rear of the machine
(in its closed position).

4.

Raise the paper separator as shown above.

5.

Adjust the Cut Sheet guide (3) on the Paper Separator to


position the left edge of the sheet.

NOTE
If letter size paper is used, set the cut sheet guide to the line mark on the
paper separator. 80 character width text (10cpi) is then positioned
centrally on the paper.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 21

6.

Insert a single sheet along the Cut Sheet guide until it reaches
the pinch roller. Be sure to keep the paper inside the platen
ends, otherwise the built-in sprocket rollers will tear it.

7.

Move the Bail arm lever (2) towards the front of the machine,
into the open position. The sheet of paper will be pulled
around the platen.

8.

Close the Bail arm lever (2) ensuring that the paper has been
positioned correctly.

9.

Press the SELECT button to bring the printer ON-LINE.

10.

The sprockets can be released and moved out from the platen
if required.

Testing your printer


Your printer has a built-in test (self test) to make sure that your printer
is set up and working correctly.
1.

Firstly, load continuous forms paper into the printer (Please


see the Loading Paper section of this Guide).

2.

Hold down the LINE FEED button and turn the printer ON.
The printer will begin its test print.

3.

To stop the test, press the SELECT button or turn the printer
OFF.

Typical test print:


ML280 ELITE ME1

F/W XX.XX
CG XX.XX

42434401YR-00

HSD 10CPI
!$%^&*()0123456789:;<=>@aABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]abcdefghijklm
nopqrstuvwxyz

NOTE
The top of each print test contains information about your printer model.
Be sure to have a copy of the printout handy if you have to call for service.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 22

Computer connections
NOTE
It is not recommended that you connect serial/USB and parallel
cables to the printer simultaneously.

For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above (not Windows


95 upgraded to Windows 98) or Macintosh.
The operation of a printer is not assured if a USB compatible device is
connected concurrently with other USB compatible machines.
Interface cables are not supplied with your printer.

Parallel (LPT) connection, IEEE 1284


l

Requires a bi-directional cable, max. length 6 ft. (1.8 m), not


supplied

The printer has a 36-pin Centronics type socket.

CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.

Switch both the computer and the printer OFF.

2.

Attach a suitable bi-directional cable to the parallel connector


on the back of the printer. Then attach and secure the cable to
your computer.

3.

Turn the printer and computer back ON.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 23

USB connection
l

Requires a USB 1.1 cable, maximum length 19.7 ft. (5 m), not
supplied.

Printer has a USB series B receptacle.

NOTES
For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above (not Windows
95 upgraded to Windows 98).

The operation of a printer is not assured if a USB compatible device is


connected concurrently with other USB-compatible machines.
When connecting multiple printers of the same type, they appear as
*****, ***** (2), ***** (3), etc. These numbers depend on the order
of connecting or turning on each printer.
USB is a hot-pluggable protocol. This means that the printer and
computer do not necessarily have to be switched OFF.

1.

Attach a suitable USB cable to the printer. Then attach the


cable to your computer.

2.

If you have turned the computer and printer OFF, turn them
back ON.

Follow any on-screen insructions.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 24

Serial connection
The Serial Interface Board is an option on this printer and is supplied
with installation and setup instructions. Once this board has been
installed, the serial interface settings will appear in the printer menu
and may need to be adjusted to match your PC.

CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.

Switch both the computer and the printer OFF.

2.

Plug the cable into the serial ports of both your PC and printer
and tighten the thumbscrews (1).

The cable should comply with the RS232C Serial Interface


Specification and have a maximum length of 15 metres (49ft).
3.

Turn the printer and computer back ON.

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 25

Printer drivers
Printer drivers enable your computer to communicate with the printer.
As with most printer manufacturers, Oki creates printer drivers for use
with popular types of software, such as Microsoft Windows operating
systems, from Windows 95 onwards. Installing a printer driver is
normally a simple process of making a selection within the software.
If a driver is not available by name for your printer, contact the
software manufacturer and ask if they can supply an updated version
of their software with additional drivers. Alternatively, check the
driver availability on the Oki Europe Web Site at:
www.okieurope.com
If you are using bespoke software or software created specifically for
your company, it is unlikely that the CDs supplied with this software
will include drivers for your printer. In this instance you will have to
choose a driver as closely compatible as possible. Compatible drivers
contain printing codes that will operate your printer. They may not
offer the special features of an original driver, but they will allow you
to perform normal printing tasks.
Okis printers contain more than one printer emulation selectable via
the menu system. See the table below for compatible drivers.
However, please note that the emulations listed toward the bottom of
this list are more basic and offer fewer of the printers features.
Microline
Emulation

IBM Emulation

Epson LQ Emulation

ML280 Microline

ML280 IBM
IBM Graphics Printer

ML280 Epson
Epson FX80
Epson FX

SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 26

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER


Front panel operation
LINE
FEED

FORM
FEED

TOF
SET

SELECT

ALARM

POWER PITCH

10

NLQ

MODE
12

UTILITY

17

HSD

The Front Panel has 9 indicators and 6 buttons. The function of each
is as follows:
Indicators
SELECT
ALARM

Lit - Printer ON-LINE, unlit printer OFF-LINE. Flashes with ALARM on to


indicate a fault has been detected.
l
If lit permanently and SELECT is not lit - it is indicating paper out
or paper jam if a Cut Sheet Feeder is in use.
l

If lit permanently and SELECT is flashing - it is indicating that


auto diagnostics have detected an error.

If flashing and SELECT is lit - it is indicating either printhead


temperature protection circuit, firmware protection of line feed
or space motor is operating. In any case, normal print operation
will resume after a cooling period.
Indicates that the printer is connected to the supply and is switched ON.
Indicates the current character pitch selected.
Indicates the current print mode selected - NLQ, Utility, HSD (HSD is SSD
if 12cpi is selected).
l

POWER
PITCH
MODE

Buttons
LINE FEED
Advances the paper one line for each press.
FORM FEED Advances the paper to the next top of form (TOF) or ejects any single
sheet paper from the printer.
TOF SET
Sets new top of form (TOF) position.
SELECT
Places printer ON or OFF line
PITCH
Changes the character pitch setting (cpi)
MODE
Changes the print style setting.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 27

Additional button functions if pressed at Power ON


LINE FEED
SELECT and
LINE FEED
SELECT and
FORM FEED
SELECT
TOF SET

Initiates the printer self test.


Initiates the printers continuous rolling ASCII test.
Places the printer into a Hex dump mode, printing all data and control
commands received as HEX codes for fault finding.
Enters the printers Menu Mode.
Selects the print pitch as 17cpi.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 28

Setting printer defaults


The printer has an internal MENU containing a number of default
conditions that can be set to enable your printer to match the
parameters required by your computer.

Entering the MENU mode


1.

Power on the printer while holding down the SELECT button.


The 12 and UTILITY LEDs will flash.

2.

Press the SELECT button to print the complete menu. This will
detail the current default settings.

3.

Press the LINE FEED button to select the relevant group that
needs to be changed (the group is the left-hand column on the
MENU printout).

4.

Press the FORM FEED button to select the relevant item within
the selected group (the Item is the centre column on the MENU
printout).

5.

Press the TOF SET button to cycle through the settings


available for the item you want to change (the settings are the
right-hand column on the MENU printout).

6.

Once you have reached the setting that you want, press either
the LINE FEED button (for the next group) or the FORM FEED
button (for the next item) to be changed.
Follow steps to 3 to 5 until all your required settings have been
changed.

7.

On completion of the changes, press the PITCH and MODE


buttons together to exit and save all the changes you have
made.

NOTE
Important, do not exit the menu mode by switching off the printer, as this
will not save any changes you have made.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 29

Default menu selections - AC


Group

Item

Setting

Printer Control See the Printer Driver section of this


document for more information.
Font
Print Mode
Draft Mode
Pitch
Proportional Spacing
Style
Size
Symbol Sets Character Set
Language Set
Zero Character
Code Page
Slashed Letter O
Vertical
Line Spacing
Control
Skip Over Perforation
Page Length
Set-up
Graphics
Receive Buffer Size
Paper out Override
Print Registration
Operator Panel Function
Reset Inhibit
Printer Suppress Effective
Auto LF
Auto CR
S1 Select Pitch (10 CPI)
S1 Select Pitch (12 CPI)
Time Out Print
Auto Select
ESC/S1 Pitch
CSF/RPS Pitch
Impact Mode
Parallel I/F
I - Prime
Pin 18
Bi - Direction

IBM
Utility
SSD
10 CPI
No
Normal
Single
Set II
ASCII
Unslashed
USA
No
6 LPI
No
12"
Uni-directional
64K
No
0
Semi Operation
No
Yes
No
Yes
17.1 CPI
20 CPI
Valid
No
17.1
RPS
Normal
Buffer Print
+5V
Enable

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 30

Using the pull tractor unit (if fitted)


Paper can be loaded either from the rear of the printer or from the
bottom if you have a slotted printer stand.
1.

Remove the access cover.

A
B

2.

Adjust the left tractor if necessary, making sure that it is not


more than 12.7mm (0.5 inch) from the left-hand end of the
tractor unit. To move the tractor, pull the lock lever forward,
slide the tractor to the desired position, then push the lock
lever backward to lock it in place.

A
B

3.

Adjust the right tractor to the paper width by pulling its lock
lever forward, sliding the tractor to the desired position, then
pushing the lock lever backward to lock it in place.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 31

4.

Pull the paper under the Bail bar and up to the level of the
tractor unit.

5.

Open the sprocket covers and slide the paper release lever
forward.
A
B

6.

Locate the sprocket holes in the paper over the sprockets on


the tractor unit and close both sprocket covers (leave the
paper release lever open).

7.

Replace the access cover.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 32

Using the cut-sheet feeder (if fitted)


3

4
5
2
1

6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Paper set lever


Left paper guide
Rear sheet support
Front sheet support
Right paper guide
Front sheet guide

1.

Place the paper set lever (1) in the RESET position.

2.

Release the paper guides by pushing the locking levers


downward.

3.

Move the left paper guide (2) to the position where you wish to
set the left-hand edge of the sheet, making sure that this
paper guide is not set to the right of the paper out sensor (the
groove in the platen).

4.

Flex a paper stack (not more than 170 sheets of 60g/m


(16lb.) paper). Square the stack, turn over and repeat the
bending. The stack of paper should not exceed 16mm
thickness.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 33

5.

Insert the paper stack into the hopper and push it against the
left paper guide, making sure that the paper fits under the
corner separators.

6.

Adjust the right paper guide to the paper width.

7.

Push both paper guide locking levers upward into the locked
position.

8.

Push the paper set lever (1) gently backward into the set
position.

Manual loading with the cut-sheet feeder installed.


1.

Gently insert the paper from directly above the front sheet
support.

2.

Use the FORM FEED button to feed the sheet.

3.

Turn the Platen knob clockwise/anti-clockwise for fine


adjustment.

NOTE
The manually set sheet is printed automatically, even when other sheets
are loaded in the hopper. When the FORM FEED button is pressed, the
manually inserted sheet will be fed from the cut-sheet feeder.

CAUTION!
l Do not manually feed paper if a sheet is being fed from the
hopper. Simultaneous feeding of paper will result in a paper
jam.
l To manually feed a sheet of paper, you must use the FORM FEED
button to feed the paper. If the paper is being fed manually and
is positioned using the platen knob rather than the FORM FEED
button, it may be ejected just before printing begins (use the
Platen Knob for fine adjustment only).

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 34

Cut-sheet feeder controls


The printers control switches also control the operation of the cutsheet feeder. The control switches, however, function only when the
printer is off-line or deselected (SELECT indicator is not lit).

Using the roll paper stand (if fitted)

Loading the paper


1.

Open the paper separator all the way.

2.

Remove the paper roller.


Note that there is a disk on the left end of the roller.

3.

Slide the roller into a tube of paper.


Ensure the disk is on the left side and paper must roll up from
the bottom.

4.

Replace the paper roller back into the stand, with the disc on
the left side.

5.

Feed the paper over the roller on the stand. NOT UNDER!

6.

Adjust the round paper guides at either side to the paper


width.

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 35

7.

Feed the paper down behind the platen and use platen knob to
bring paper through the printer.
Lift the bail arm as paper comes round to front of platen. (The
paper release lever needs to be in the top position to perform
this step.)

8.

Continue to feed the paper through for approx. 4 inches.

9.

Move the paper release lever toward the front of the machine.
Align the paper so that the exit and entry paper edges align.
Return the paper release lever to the rear position to re-apply
pressure on platen.

10.

Close the bail arm.

11.

Replace the access cover. Fit the cover tabs into the slots at the
printer front. Lower the cover carefully, making sure the paper
fits through the front slot in the access cover.

12.

Lower the paper separator so that paper enters the printer


from under the separator and exits the printer going over the
separator (see below).

13.

Turn the platen knob to move the paper to the point where you
want printing to start. (Many word processing packages
automatically allow for a top margin of 25.4mm (1 inch)).

Correct paper path


a
c

Paper roll
Platen

b
d

Roll Paper Stand


Paper Guide

OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 36

MAINTENANCE
Replacing the ribbon cartridge
See Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge on page 11.

Adjusting the printhead gap


See Adjusting the head gap on page 14.

Loading paper
See Loading paper on page 17.

Testing your printer


See Testing your printer on page 22.

MAINTENANCE > 37

TROUBLESHOOTING
General information
Here are some general things to check before proceeding with
detailed troubleshooting.
l

Is the printer plugged in and turned ON?

Are the connections (power and interface) secure?

Is the product being operated under the proper ambient


conditions?

Does the paper being used meet the specifications for this
product?

Is the paper properly installed?

Is the ribbon properly installed?

Is an Oki ribbon being used?

Is the printhead gap correctly set?

Are the correct printer drivers being used for the printer?

NOTE
Settings in your software application will normally override any
settings in your printer driver.

Printer driver settings normally override settings from the printer


menu or printer front panel.

Problem
My word processor files do not print the way I have the menu and front
panel set.
Solution
Remember: The note above!
Before sending a file to the printer, many word processors send either
an initialization string or an I-Prime signal to the printer.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 38

The initialization string contains codes that override the panel and
menu settings. To change your printer to ignore the reset code, enter
the Menu Mode, go to the Set-Up group and change the setting for
Reset Inhibit to Yes.
The I-Prime signal will automatically override any front panel settings
you have made. To eliminate this problem, enter the Menu Mode, go
to the Parallel Interface group and change the setting for I-Prime to
Invalid.
For more information on changing menu settings, see Changing the
Menu Settings in Chapter 3.
Problem
Nothing happens when I turn ON the printer.
Solution
Check the power cord connection to the outlet and to the printer. If
you are using a power strip, make sure it is turned ON, and that the
fuse hasnt blown or that the circuit breaker hasnt tripped. If the
solution is not obvious call for service.
Problem
The printer does not print when the computer sends data.
Solutions
1.

Is the SEL light on? If not, press the SEL key.

2.

Check that the interface cable is securely connected to both


the printer and the computer.

3.

If you have the optional serial interface board installed, check


to be sure that it is firmly seated in the printer and that the
interface cable is securely connected to both the printer and
the computer.

Problem
I'm getting strange symbols, incorrect fonts, etc., when I try to print a
document.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 39

Solutions
1.

Check to be sure that the printer driver you have selected in


your software matches the printer emulation.

2.

Please refer to the Printer Driver section for details of


emulations, then check the menu settings (see Setting Printer
Defaults in the Operating your Printer section).

3.

If you have embedded any printer commands in your software,


check to be sure that you entered them correctly.

Problem
Ink smears on the paper when I print narrow columns.
Solutions
The head gap could be too close. Check that the head gap is set
correctly (see the table in Adjusting the head gap in the Getting
Started section).
Problem
I've installed a new ribbon and the printing is smeared and streaked.
Solution
The ribbon shield (1) is either loose or missing.

Remove the ribbon cartridge and check the ribbon shield.


If it is loose, secure it. If it is missing, find it and install it. If you
cannot find it, replace the ribbon cartridge.
Tip: If you still have an old ribbon cartridge, remove the shield
from it and install it on the ribbon cartridge on your printer.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 40

Problem
There are dots missing in my printouts (typically, tops and /or bottom
of characters missing).
Solution
The head gap may not be set correctly. Try moving the headgap lever
to a lower setting. If that doesnt help, the printhead may be
damaged; call for service.
Problem
The ALARM light is flashing.
Solution
Try turning the printer OFF and then back ON again. If the light still
blinks, call for service.
Problem
The Print Quality and Character Pitch keys on the front panel don't
work.
Solution
The Operator Panel Function in the printer menu can be used to
disable these buttons (Limited Function). If the printer is part of a
customized system or if it is used by a number of people, the system
manager may have used this option to make sure the printer is always
set properly.
Check with your system manager before changing any menu settings.
Problem
My printer keeps indicating Paper out when there is paper installed.
Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper sensor groove in the platen is
not being covered by paper. Re-align paper to cover the sensor
groove.
Problem
When I am using continuous feed paper, the sprocket holes are torn,
causing alignment problems.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 41

Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper lever is set to friction feed.
Move the lever to Fan-fold (to the front of the printer).

Clearing paper jams


Rear feed jams
1.

Turn the printer OFF.

2.

Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.

CAUTION!
Make sure the printer is turned OFF before you open the access cover.

WARNING!
The printhead may be HOT!
3.

Open the access cover, move the bail arm lever toward the
front of the printer and remove any torn paper.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 42

4.

Reload the paper (see section on Maintenance), move the


bail arm lever towards the rear of the printer and close the
access cover.

5.

Turn the printer ON.

Rear feed, repeating paper jams


If the paper keeps jamming, you may have:
l

defective paper

misaligned paper

bits of paper in the paper path

Defective Paper
Replace the defective paper with a fresh stack.
Misaligned Paper
1.

Turn the printer OFF.

2.

Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.

3.

Tear off a couple of sheets of paper, leaving a new, clean,


square-cut edge.

4.

Reload the paper and turn the printer back ON.

Bits of paper in the paper path


Depending on which paper feed method you are using, remove any
accessories, open the access cover and remove any debris from the
paper path.

WARNING!
l Always ensure that the printer is switched OFF and that the
power supply lead is disconnected.
l If the printer has been recently used, the printhead may be HOT!

TROUBLESHOOTING > 43

Single sheet paper jams


1.

Turn off the printer.

2.

Use the platen knob to back the paper out.

3.

Open the access cover.

4.

Remove any torn pieces from around the carriage.

5.

Close the access cover.

TROUBLESHOOTING > 44

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES


Purchasing parts and accessories
Before you purchase parts and accessories, make a note of your
printer model name (see the front of the unit) and have the correct part
number and description of the item you wish to purchase. Item
descriptions and part numbers are provided in this section.
l

Consult the dealer where you purchased your printer.

Locate an Authorised Oki Data Reseller by visiting your local


Oki web site. Links to all countries are provided on:
http://www.okieurope.com
x2

2
1

Item

Part number

Comment

Ribbon Cartridge (1)


Platen Knob (2)
Power Cord AC (3) - Euro
UK

09002303
40673402
YS4011-1272P001
YS4011-1273P001

Life - 3 million characters

Power Cord DC (not shown)


Printhead (4)
Access Cover (5)
Sheet Guide (6)

YS4100-1187P001
4YA4025-1401G002 Life - 200 million characters
42594601
42017901

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES > 45

Options
1

2
3
4

Option

Part number

Pull Tractor Assembly (1)


Roll Paper Stand (2)
Cut Sheet Feeder (3)
Serial Interface Card, RS232 (4)
Serial Interface Card, RS422 (not shown)
Current Loop Interface Card (not shown)

09002363
09002334
09000689
09002353
09002357
09000685

All Accessories are supplied complete with an Installation Guide.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES > 46

SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Specification

Print Method
Printhead

Impact dot matrix


9 pins, 0.30 mm (0.0118") diameter, with
thermal protection
Epson FX
IBM Graphics
Oki MICROLINE

Emulations (co-resident)

Print Speed
High Speed Draft (HSD)
Utility (UTL)
Near Letter Quality (NLQ)

333cps*
250cps*
62.5cps*
* cps = characters per second

Paper Specifications
Type
Cut Sheets
Single part Continuous
Multi Part Continuous
Maximum thickness
Maximum number of
sheets

Feed
Top only
Rear/Bottom
Rear/Bottom

Weight
Width (range)
16 to 21lb. (60 to 81g/m)
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
0.28mm (0.11 inches)
4 (original plus 3 copies) carbonless

Reliability
Ribbon Life (black)
Printhead Life
Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF)
Mean Time to Repair
(MTTR)

3 million characters, on average


200 million characters average in 10cpi utility mode

20,000 hours at 25% duty cycle and 35% page density


15 minutes

General Printer Characteristics


Dimensions
Weight
Buffer size
Noise level
Power requirements
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Operating
Storage

Height: 80mm (height) x 372mm (width) x 275mm (depth)


4.5Kg
128Kb
<54dBA and <51dBA in Quiet Mode
230VAC (+6%;-14%), 240VAC (10%;) @50/60Hz (2%)
5 to 40C
-40 to +70C)
20 to 80% RH
5 to 95% RH

SPECIFICATIONS > 47

Item
Interfaces:
Standard:
Optional:

Specification
Centronics parallel, IEEE-1284 compliant
USB 1.1
RS-232C Serial
RS-422
Current Loop

SPECIFICATIONS > 48

INDEX
A

Access cover........................ 18, 20


Additional button functions
if pressed at Power ON..............28
ALARM........................................27
Auto CR ......................................30
Auto LF .......................................30
Auto Select .................................30

H
Humidity.....................................47

I
Impact Mode...............................30
Initialization string......................38
Installing the Ribbon Cartridge ....11
I-Prime ................................ 30, 38

Bail arm lever....................... 18, 20


Bi - Direction...............................30
blank sheet of paper symbol .......21
Bottom feed continuous
form fan-fold paper...................20

Language Set..............................30
Limited Operation .......................41
LINE FEED ............................ 27, 28
Line Spacing ...............................30
Loading Paper.............................17

Centering printhead position.......40


Character Set..............................30
Clearing Paper Jams ....................42
Code Page ..................................30
Computer Connections................23
CSF/RPS Pitch.............................30
Current Loop...............................48
Cut Sheet feeder .........................21

Mean Time Between Failures


(MTBF)......................................47
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) ........47
MODE .........................................27

ESC/S1 Pitch ..............................30

Fanfold ................................ 18, 20


Fitting the Paper Separator..........15
Fonts
Embedded Printer
Commands .........................40
FORM FEED .................................27
Front Panel .................................27

G
Graphics.....................................30

O
Operator Panel............................30
Operator Panel Function..............41

Page Length................................30
paper lever .................... 18, 20, 21
Paper out Override ......................30
Paper Separator..........................21
Paper Specifications ...................47
Parallel (LPT) Connection.............23
Parallel Interface
I-PRIME Signal.......................38
Pin 18.........................................30
PITCH .........................................27
POWER .......................................27
Power Connection ................ 16, 23
Print Method...............................47
Print Registration ........................30
Print Speed.................................47

INDEX > 49

Printer Drivers.............................30
Printer Suppress Effective ...........30
Printhead ...................................47

Z
Zero Character ............................30

R
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold
paper .......................................17
Receive Buffer Size .....................30
Removing the shipping
restraint ...................................10
Reset Inhibit ...............................30
Ribbon Shield ...................... 13, 40
RS-232C Serial Interface .............48
RS-422 .......................................48

S
S1 Select Pitch (10 CPI) ...............30
S1 Select Pitch (12 CPI) ...............30
SELECT .......................................27
SELECT and FORM FEED ...............28
SELECT and LINE FEED .................28
Serial Cable Connection ..............25
Serial Interface Option ................39
Setting Printer Defaults ...............29
Skip Over Perforation ..................30
Software
Embedded commands ...........40
Software vs. printer
settings ..............................38

T
Time Out Print.............................30
TOF SET ............................... 27, 28
Top feed single sheet paper ........21
Tractor Feed unit .........................21

U
Unpacking ....................................9
USB Connection ..........................24
Using the Cut-Sheet Feeder .........33
Using the Cut-sheet Feeder..........33
Using the pull Tractor Unit ...........31
Using the Roll Paper Stand ..........35

INDEX > 50

OKI CONTACT DETAILS


Oki Systems (UK) Limited

Oki Systems (Thailand) Ltd.

550 Dundee Road


Slough Trading Estate
Slough, SL1 4LE

956 Udomvidhya Building 6th


Floor, Rama IV Rd., Bangkok
10500, Thailand

Tel :44 (0) 1753 819819


Fax :44 (0) 1753 819899
http://www.oki.co.uk

Tel : (662) 636 2535


Fax : (662) 636 2536
http://www.okisysthai.com

Oki Systems Ireland Limited

Oki Hong Kong Limited

The Square Industrial Complex


Tallaght, Dublin 24, Ireland

Suite 1909, Tower3,


China Hong Kong City,
33 Canton Rd., Tsimshatsui,
Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel :+353 1 4049590


Fax :+353 1 4049591
http://www.oki.ie

OKI Systems (Ireland) Ltd


40 Sydenham Park
Belfast, BT4 1PW

Tel : (852) 2736 0130


Fax : (852) 2376 3725

The IPL Group

Tel :+44 44 (0)28 90 20 1110


http://www.oki.ie
Technical Support for all of
Ireland:
Tel : +353 1 4049570
Fax : +353 1 4049555
E-mail: tech.support@oki.ie

Oki Data Corporation


4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 108-8551, Japan
Tel : (81) 3 5445 6158
Fax : (81) 3 5445 6189
http://www.okidata.co.jp

63-85 Victoria Street


Beaconsfield NSW 2015,
Australia
Tel : (61) 2 9690 8200
Fax : (61) 2 9690 8300
http://www.oki.com.au

Comworth Systems Ltd.


10 Constellation Drive Marring
Bay, Auckland,
New Zealand
Tel : (64) 9 477 0500
Fax : (64) 9 477 0549
http://www.comworth.co.nz

Oki Data (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.


78 Shenton Way, #09-01,
Singapore 079120
Tel : (65) 221 3722
Fax : (65)421 1688
http://www.okidata.com.sg

OKI CONTACT DETAILS > 51

ML280 ELITE

Central House
Balfour Road, Hounslow
TW3 1HY
United Kingdom
tel +44 (0) 20 8219 2190
Fax +44 (0) 20 8219 2199

07051001 ISS.01

User Manual
for
Ultrasonic Anemometer, WindObserver II
and
Winddisplay, OMC-139

This document contains the complete manual:


Gill Instruments Ltd, WindObserver II Ultrasonic Anemometer, User Manual
Winddisplay OMC-138/139, Users Manual Ver. No. 1.07

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-652003-01MU

Unrestricted

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

- BLANK PAGE -

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-652003-01MU

Unrestricted

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

WindObserver II
Ultrasonic Anemometer
User Manual
Doc No. 1390-PS-0004
Issue 16

Gill Instruments Ltd recognise all trademarks

Gill Instruments Limited


Saltmarsh Park,
67 Gosport Street,
Lymington,
Hampshire.
SO41 9EG
UK
Tel: +44 (0) 1590 613500
Fax: +44 (0) 1590 613501
E-mail: anem@gill.co.uk
Website: www.gill.co.uk

WindObserver II Anemometer

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 2
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

FOREWORD...................................................................................................... 6
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 6
FAST TRACK SET-UP..................................................................................... 6
SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................... 7
PRE-INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 8

5.1.
5.2.

Equipment supplied...............................................................................................8
Installation requirements .......................................................................................8

6.

INSTALLATION...............................................................................................10

6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.

Installation Guidelines .........................................................................................10


Bench system test...............................................................................................11
Cabling ................................................................................................................11
Connections ........................................................................................................12
Connecting to a Gill WindDisplay...................................................................... 13
Connecting to a PC with a RS422 or RS485 input ............................................. 14
Networking units............................................................................................. 15

6.5.

Analogue connections .........................................................................................16


Connections for 5V output................................................................................ 16
Connections for 2.5V output ........................................................................ 16
Connections for 4-20mA output ........................................................................ 16
Connections for 4-20mA output ........................................................................ 17

6.6.
6.7.

Power supplies ....................................................................................................17


Mechanical installation........................................................................................18
Location.......................................................................................................... 18
Orientation ...................................................................................................... 18
Mounting bracket............................................................................................. 18
Alignment ....................................................................................................... 20

7.
8.

USING WITH THE GILL WINDDISPLAY ...................................................21


MESSAGE FORMATS & OPTIONS............................................................22

8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.7.

Wind Speed format .............................................................................................22


Output formats.....................................................................................................22
Networking...........................................................................................................22
Units.....................................................................................................................24
Output rate...........................................................................................................24
Averaging ............................................................................................................24
Options ................................................................................................................24
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature.......................................................... 24
Heating (If fitted)............................................................................................. 24
45 Offset ....................................................................................................... 24
Vertical Output Padding................................................................................... 24

8.8.

ASCII message format (UV and Polar)...............................................................25


ASCII UV format............................................................................................. 25
ASCII Polar format ......................................................................................... 26

8.9.

Binary message format (UV, Polar and Tunnel).................................................26


Binary UV format ............................................................................................. 26
Binary Polar format .......................................................................................... 27
Binary Tunnel format ....................................................................................... 27

8.10.

NMEA Format......................................................................................................28

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 3
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.11.

Analogue outputs and options ............................................................................29


Output modes ................................................................................................. 29
Channel outputs.............................................................................................. 29
Status............................................................................................................. 29
Temperature ................................................................................................... 29
Tunnel mode................................................................................................... 29
Scaling ........................................................................................................... 29
Polar mode direction wraparound..................................................................... 30
Low wind speeds............................................................................................. 30

9.

CONFIGURING ...............................................................................................31

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
9.10.

Entering Configuration mode ..............................................................................31


Returning to Measurement mode .......................................................................31
Checking the configuration .................................................................................32
Changing settings................................................................................................32
Output format ......................................................................................................32
Unit Identifier .......................................................................................................33
Units.....................................................................................................................33
Output rate...........................................................................................................33
Averaging ............................................................................................................33
Options ................................................................................................................33
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature.......................................................... 33
Heating (If fitted)............................................................................................. 33
NMEA ............................................................................................................ 34
Vertical Output Padding ................................................................................... 34
45 Offset ....................................................................................................... 34

9.11.

Communications settings....................................................................................35
Baud rate........................................................................................................ 35
Duplex mode .................................................................................................. 35
Data and parity options .................................................................................... 35
ASCII Message terminator ............................................................................... 36

9.12.

Analogue settings (if fitted) .................................................................................36


Voltage or current output ................................................................................. 36
Channel 3 output ............................................................................................. 36
Scaling ........................................................................................................... 36
Polar mode direction wraparound..................................................................... 36
Analogue power-up tests ................................................................................. 37

9.13.

Configuration and Diagnostic Information ..........................................................37

10.

MAINTENANCE & FAULT-FINDING..........................................................38

10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
10.5.
10.6.

Cleaning ..............................................................................................................38
Servicing..............................................................................................................38
Fault-finding.........................................................................................................38
Returning unit ......................................................................................................39
Status (error) codes ............................................................................................39
Bench test............................................................................................................39
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC) ........................................................................ 40
Integrity & Zero Wind Check ............................................................................ 40

11.

APPENDICES..................................................................................................42

11.1.
11.2.
11.3.

Glossary & Abbreviations ....................................................................................42


Guarantee............................................................................................................43
Principle of operation ..........................................................................................44

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 4
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11.4.

Electrical Conformity ...........................................................................................45


EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ACCORDING....................................... 45

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 5
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1.

FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing the WindObserver II manufactured by Gill Instruments Ltd.
The unit has no customer serviceable parts and requires no calibration or maintenance.
To achieve optimum performance we recommend that you read the whole of this manual
before proceeding with use. Do NOT remove black rubber transducer caps.
Gill products are in continuous development and therefore specifications may be subject to
change and design improvements without prior notice.
The information contained in this manual remains the property of Gill Instruments and
should not be copied or reproduced for commercial gain.

2.

INTRODUCTION

The Gill WindObserver II wind sensor is a very robust, lightweight unit with no moving
parts, outputting wind speed and direction. The units of wind speed, output rate and
formats are all user selectable.
The WindObserver II is available with or without de- icing heating (recommended if icing
is likely), and with or witho ut analogue outputs.
The WindObserver II can be used in conjunction with a PC, datalogger or other device,
provided it is compatible with the RS422 output or the analogue outputs. Multiple units
can be networked if required.
Alternatively, the WindObserver II is designed to connect directly to the Gill WindDisplay
unit to provide a complete wind speed direction system without any configuration required
by the user.
The output message format can be configured in Polar, UV (2-axis), NMEA (0183
Version 3), Tunnel formats, and as either a Continuous output or Polled (requested by
host system) , detailed in full in Section 8 Message Formats & Options.
WindObserver II may be configured using WindCom software which is available, free of
charge, from the Gill website www.gill.co.uk, or by using standard communications
software on a PC. This is explained in Section 9 Configuring.

3.

FAST TRACK SET-UP

If you are in a hurry to try out the WindObserver II, are familiar with Gill equipment, and
coupling to a PC using RS422, go to the following sections :
Section 6 Installation
Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Section 9 Configuring
After you have successfully set up the WindObserver II, we strongly advise that you then
go back and read the rest of the manual to ensure that you get the best results from the
WindObserver II.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 6
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4.

SPECIFICATION
Measurement
Output
Parameters
Units
Averaging
Wind Speed
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Offset
Direction

1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10Hz
UV, Polar, NMEA, Tunnel
m/s, Knots, MPH, KPH ft/min
Flexible 1-3600 seconds
0 - 65m/s (0-145mph)
2%
0.01m/s
0.01m/s

Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Sonic Temperature Output
Range
Anemometer Status

0 - 359
2
1

Starting Threshold
Dead Band Wind Direction
Power Requirement

0.01 m/s
None

Anemometer only
Heating - Optional
Digital Output

9-30 V DC (40mA @ 12VDC)


3A @ 24V AC or DC

Communication
Baud rates
Formats
Analogue Output - Optional
Quantity
Scale
Type
V output resistance
4-20mA loading
Dimensions
Size
Weight
Materials
External Construction
Environmental

RS422, full duplex, network facility


1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
8 data, odd, even or no parity

Moisture protection
Operating temperature
Humidity
Precipitation
EMC

-40C to + 70C
Supplied as part of standard message

3 (speed, direction, status or sonic temperature)


Multiples of 10m/s up to 70m/s
2.5V, 0-5V or 4-20mA
60 Ohms
10-300 Ohms
405mm x 210mm
1.5kg
Stainless Steel 316

Icing
Standards

IP66 (NEMA4X)
-55C to +70C (heated version)
5% to 100% RH
300mm/hr
BS EN 50081-1: 1992 (Emissions class B)
BS EN 50082-2: 1992 (Immunity)
FCC class A
MILSTD810E Method 521.1 Procedure 1
Traceable to UK national standards

Site Calibration

None required. (See Section 10.6 Zero Wind Check)

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 7
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5.

PRE-INSTALLATION

5.1.

Equipment supplied

or
or
or
and
and
and
and

WindObserver II Option 1 RS422 output


WindObserver II Option 2 RS422 output and analogue outputs
WindObserver II Option 3 RS422 output and de- icing
WindObserver II Option 4 RS422 output, analogue outputs and de-icing
Installation kit (comprising a gasket and four Stainless Steel screws)
WindObserver II Quick Start Guide
WindObserver II User Manual (this manual)
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC) (Optional)

5.2.

Installation requirements

Host system - One of the following:


PC with an internal or external interface compatible with the RS422 output from
the WindObserver II.
Gill WindDisplay.
Other equipment with I/O compatibility to the WindObserver II option selected.
For example if the unit has Analogue outputs, a Data Logger, Chart Recorder, or PC
fitted with an ADC card.
Networking - Multiple WindObserver II units can be networked
Software - One of the following:
WindCom A user- friendly package providing easy configuring of the
WindObserver II, for use on PCs running under Windows 98, 2000 or XP.
Available to customers as a free download from www.gill.co.uk .
Hyperterminal (for Windows 9x and later), or Terminal (Windows 3.n),
normally already installed on a PC.
Other Terminal Emulation software packages
Cable and Junction box
To connect between the WindObserver II and the host system. The unit is supplied with a
1.5m or 10m flying cable, requiring a mast mounted junction box (not provided) for
onward connection.
See Section 6.4 for connection details
The flying cable must be retained with a cable tie within 150mm of the base of the
anemometer.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 8
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Mounting Bracket
A mounting bracket is required (not provided) which will attach to the WindObserver II
via the four tapped holes in the base of the unit. Always ensure that the gasket supplied is
fitted to the base of the anemometer.
It is important that the gasket supplied forms a water tight seal on the base of the
anemometer.
In the event that the mounting bracket supplied by the customer is not flat or does not
form complete support for the anemometer base; the customer must fit a mounting ring as
shown in Figure 2.
See Section 6.7 for mounting details.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 9
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.

INSTALLATION
Do NOT remove the black rubber transducer caps. Warranty is void if the
blue security seal is damaged or removed.
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.
If an Intrinsically Safe (IS) device is required, the I.S. WindObserver must be
used - the WindObserver II is NOT an IS device.

6.1.

Installation Guidelines

The WindObserver II has been designed to meet and exceed the stringent standards listed
in its specification. Operating in diverse environments all over the world, WindObserver II
requires no calibration or adjustment whatsoever.
As with any sophisticated electronics, good engineering practice should be followed to
ensure correct operation.
Always check the installation to ensure the WindObserver II is not affected by
other equipment operating locally, which may not conform to current standards,
e.g. radio/radar transmitters, boat engines, generators etc.
Guidelines
Avoid mounting in the plane of any radar scanner a vertical separation of
at least 2m should be achieved.
Radio transmitting antennas, the following minimum separations (all round)
are suggested
VHF IMM 1m
MF/HF 5m
Satcom 5m (avoid likely lines of sight)
Ensure the product is correctly earthed in accordance with this manual
Use cables recommended by Gill, keeping the length below the maximum allowed
(SeeSection 6.3) Where the cables are cut and re-connected (junction boxes, plugs
and sockets) the cable screen integrity must be maintained, to prevent the EMC
performance being compromised.
Earth loops should not be created earth the system in accordance with the
installation guidelines. (SeeSection 6.4)
Ensure the power supply operates to the WindObserver II specification at all times.
Avoid turbulence caused by surrounding structures that will effect the accuracy of the
WindObserver II such as trees, masts and buildings. The World Meteorological
Organisation make the following recommendation:
The standard exposure of wind instruments over level open terrain is 10m above
the ground. Open terrain is defined as an area where the distance between the
sensor and any obstruction is at least 10 times the height of the obstruction.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 10
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.2.

Bench system test

Note : Prior to physically mounting the WindObserver II in its final location, we strongly
recommend that a bench system test is carried out to confirm the system is configured
correctly, is fully functional and electrically compatible with the selected host system and
cabling (preferably utilising the final cable length). The required data format, units,
output rate, and other options should also all be configured at this stage. If an Integrity
Check Chamber (ICC) has been purchased refer to Section 10.6.

6.3.

Cabling

Cable type
A RS422 compatible cable should be used, with the number of twisted pairs matching the
application. If both the (optional) Heating and Analogue outputs are utilised, then a 9 pair
cable is required.
Generic description Twisted pairs with drain wire, screened with aluminised tape,
with an overall PVC sheath. Wire size 7/0.2mm (24 AWG)
The table shows some suitable manufacturers references; other manufactures equivalents
can be used.
Table 1
Belden
Batt electronics
No. of pairs Gill ref.
ref.
ref.
2
9729
3
026-02660
9730
91030
4
026-03156
9728
91199
9
026-02663
8774
91009
Cable length
The typical maximum length at 9600 baud is 1km (3200ft), using the recommended cable.
If any problems of data corruption are experienced (due to, for example, a high local
electrical noise level), then a lower baud rate should be used. Alternatively, a thicker or
higher specification cable can be tried. See also Section 6.1
Cabling and junction box
The WindObserver II unit is fitted with a flying 9 pair cable attached (1.5m or 10m long).
This must be terminated in a suitable terminal box to IP66 or better, fitted with glands to
prevent moisture ingress.
The cable type from the terminal box to the host system must be as specified above. If any
cable is likely to be exposed to mechanical damage, it must be enclosed in a suitable
conduit or cable tray. The cable must be securely fixed with cable clamps or equivalent,
such that the cable is not under stress at the cable glands.
The gland area at the base of the WindObserver II should not be directly exposed to
moisture, as whilst the gland is sealed when mated, the anemometer is vented to air at the
base to avoid pressure build up. If an IP66 rating is essential or the unit is mounted other
than right way up use the gasket provided in the mounting kit.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 11
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.4.

Connections

Important
Do NOT join any of the cores of the cable together. Joining cores
could damage the unit permanently. Any cores not used should be isolated.
Do NOT connect the units 0V, he ating ve, analogue output 0V or digital 0V to the
screen or earth.
The screens of each pair are joined together inside the anemometer - these should be
joined to the cable screen(s) of any further cable run. Avoid long grounding loops. Digital
OV should be used in conjunction with RS422 TX RX lines in order to improve noise
immunity. Each pair in the cable is labelled with its pair number.
Table 2
Conductor colour
Designation
Pair 1
green
RS422_TXB (+)
black
RS422_TXA (-)
Pair 2
white
RS422_RXB (+)
black
RS422_RXA (-)
Pair 3
red
Supply V+
black
Supply VPair 4
blue
Digital 0v
black
Not used (isolate)
Pair 5
yellow
Heater + *
black
Heater *
Pair 6
brown
Analogue Ch 1 voltage output *
black
Analogue Ch 1 current output *
Pair 7
orange
Analogue Ch 2 voltage output *
black
Analogue Ch 2 current output *
Pair 8
white
Analogue Ch 3 voltage output *
red
Analogue Ch 3 current output *
Pair 9
green
Analogue 0 volt reference/current return *
red
Analogue 2.5 volt reference *
Screens
Chassis ground

May not be functional - check model number and options fitted.

Earthing or grounding
To ensure correct operation, and for maximum protection against lightning, the
anemometer MUST be correctly earthed (grounded) via its mountings. Inadequate
earthing will degrade anemometer performance, particularly in the presence of radio
frequency interference.
See Fig 1 Suggested mounting bracket and earthing (grounding) arrangements
The unit MUST be connected to an appropriate grounding point with a minimum of 6mm
copper wire, via the M5 base screws. The cable screens must be joined with any cable
screen continuing from the units cable via a junction box. The primary earth for the
anemometer must be provided via the base screws and not via the cable screens.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 12
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Connecting to a Gill WindDisplay


For further details see Section 7 Using With The Gill WindDisplay,
and the WindDisplay User Manual for the method of operation.
Notes
Use the WindObserver II as supplied in the factory default settings i.e. do not
reconfigure, apart from configuring heater if fitted. (See Section 9.10)
The WindDisplay can provide power for the WindObserver II

WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Pair
Signal names
no.
TXB (+)
1
TXA ()

WindDisplay
colour
green
black

CONNECTED INTERNALLY
Supply V+
Supply V-

Heater + *
Heater - *

Cable 2 or 3
twisted pairs

Screen and
drain wires

Signal
names
TXD +
TXD

Terminal
nos.
RS422+
RS422-

Ground (Earth)

red
black

+
O

yellow
black

+
-

2
1

Heater power
supply
see Section 6.6

* If fitted
Default Settings
The factory default settings are:
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
See Section 9 Configuring for further details

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 13
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Connecting to a PC with a RS422 or RS485 input


The PC requires either an internal RS422 interface card, or an external RS422/485 to
RS232 converter which will plug into the standard 9 way or 25 way RS232 serial port of
the PC or host equipment.

WindObserver II
9 pair cable

PC with RS422
or RS485 input
Cable - 3 or 4
twisted pairs

Signal names

Pair
no

Colour

TXB (+)
TXA (-)

green
black

RXB (+)
RXA (-)

RXB (+)
RXA (-)

white
black

TXB (+)
TXA (-)

Digital OV

blue

Signal Ground

CONNECTED INTERNALLY

Supply V+
Supply V-

Heater + *
Heater - *

Screen and
drain wires

Signal names

Ground (Earth)

red
black

DC Power
+ supply 9-30V
see section 6.6

yellow
black

+
-

Heated power
supply
see section 6.6

* If unit is fitted with a heater

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 14
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Networking units
Before coupling units into a network:

Each device must be configured with a unique Unit Identifier (letter B to Z)


It must be configured to a tri-state polled mode M3 or M4 .
See Section 9 - Configuring

WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Signal names

PC with RS485
card

Pair
Colour
no

TXB (+)
RXB (+)

1
2

green
white

TXA (-)
RXA (-)

1
2

black
black

Digital OV

blue

CONNECTED INTERNALLY

Supply V+
Supply V-

Heater +
Heater -

Cable - 2 or 3
twisted pairs

.. ..

Signal names
T / RXB (+)

T / RXA (-)
Signal Ground

Screen and
drain wires

Ground (Earth)

red
black

DC Power
+
supply 9-30V
see section 6.6

yellow
black

+
-

Heated power
supply
see section 6.6

To Next Unit

Note : Each unit in the ne twork will require its own power supplies.
Please refer to section 8.3.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 15
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.5.

Analogue connections

When using the analogue outputs it is advisable to use a low pass filter to remove any high
frequency noise present.
The analogue signals can be susceptible to external interference if unprotected. The
anemometer cable has individual screens covering each channels signal wires. The
continuing cable connected to the anemometer must be of equal or greater cross sectional
area as the anemometer cable and must be ind ividually screened or screened pairs.
Note that connections can also be made to a PC or other device as described in the
preceding section.
Connections for 5V output

Anemometer

Channel 1 Pair 6 Brown


Channel 2 Pair 7 Orange
Channel 3 Pair 8 White
+
V

Pair 9
Green
0v Ref

Connections for 2.5V output

Anemometer

Channel 1 Pair 6 Brown


Channel 2 Pair 7 Orange
Channel 3 Pair 8 White
+
V

Pair 9
Red
2.5V Ref

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 16
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Connections for 4-20mA output


Important When using the current outputs, the output loads on each channel
MUST be less than 300 ohms, including cable resistance.

Anemometer

Channel 1 Pair 6 Black


Channel 2 Pair 7 Black
Channel 3 Pair 8 Red
+
A

Pair 9
Green
0v

6.6.

300 max

Power supplies

All WindObserver II units


Voltage
Current

9 to 30v DC
60mA max. 50mA average

Heating
If fitted, the heating module requires a separate power supply.
Either
22 30V DC @ 3A
or
24V AC RMS 10% @ 3A AC RMS

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 17
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.7.

Mechanical installation
Before installing, a bench system test is recommended (see Section 6.2).
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.

Location
It is important to ensure that the WindObserver II is mounted in a position clear of any
structure which may obstruct the airflow or induce turbulence.
Do NOT mount the WindObserver II in close proximity of high powered radar or radio
transmitters. A site survey may be required if there is any doubt about the strength of
external electrical noise. ( See Section 6.1 )
Orientation
Normally the WindObserver II is mounted vertically with the cable exit at the bottom.
Alternatively, the unit may be mounted in any orientation, but note that if the unit is
mounted with the cable uppermost ,the gasket provided in the mounting kit must be used.
Mounting bracket
A suggested mounting bracket is shown in Fig 1 below.
It is recommended that the WindObserver II mounting bracket is manufactured from
stainless steel 316, to prevent possible galvanic corrosion.
It is also recommended that the supplied gasket is always fitted to ensure IP66 rating and
to prevent galvanic corrosion if the mounting bracket is not manufactured from stainless
steel 316.
Stainless steel 316 fixings must be used.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 18
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Figure 1. Suggested mounting bracket and earthing (grounding) arrangements

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 19
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Alignment
The anemometer should be set to point North (or to another known reference direction),
using the North alignment indicator on the base of the instrument. See Figure 2.
If the unit is used in a tunnel, (and the Tunnel format is used), the unit would normally be
aligned with the N S axis in the horizontal plane.

Figure 2 North marker and UV polarity definition (UV format) and Mounting Ring

SEE FIG.

4, ON PAGE 34 FOR U,V DEFINITION

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 20
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7.

USING WITH THE GILL WINDDISPLAY

The WindObserver II is designed to link directly to the Gill WindDisplay unit to provide a
complete wind speed and direction system.
When coupled to a WindDisplay, the WindObserver II must be used as supplied,
set to the factory de fault settings. It must NOT be reconfigured.
After coupling to a WindDisplay, the Wind Speed units and the Averaging period can be
selected using the WindDisplay controls. See the WindDisplay User Manual.
Note that although the WindDisplay can display wind speed in various units, these are
calculated within the WindDisplay. The data coming to the WindDisplay must be in
metres/sec (the factory default output setting).
Figure 3 WindDisplay

The WindDisplay has been designed to provide anemometer power (approximately 15V
@40mA).
If the WindObserver II has a de-icing heater fitted, this will need a separate power supply.
( See Section 6.6 )

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 21
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.

MESSAGE FORMATS & OP TIONS

On first applying power to the WindObserver II, it will be in Measurement Mode, and it
will output wind measurement information in one of nine configurations as described
below.
Setting the output format, units, other parameters, options and the communication settings
are all carried out in the alternative Configuration Mode.
See Section 9 CONFIGURING for details of how this is done.
The factory default settings are shown here in bold, and for convenience some
Configuration codes (as used to set the configuration) are shown in blue boxes.
For example M3 .

8.1.

Wind Speed format

The wind speed measurements can be output in one of the following formats:
UV, Polar, Customer formats (NMEA and Tunnel).

8.2.

Output formats

The UV and Polar wind speed parameters are output in either ASCII or binary.
These parameters can be transmitted continuously or polled from the user.
Polar is also available in continuous NMEA format.
Figure 4 Output formats
Output format
ASCII

ASCII
Binary
Binary
Tunnel
NMEA

8.3.

UV

Polar
UV
Polar

Output
Continuous
Polled
Continuous
Polled
Polled
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous

Tri-state o/p
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No

Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5

Networking

Gill Proprietary Network


Each anemometer connected to the network MUST be given a unique Unit Identifier
(Letters B to Z), and set to a polled tri-state mode (UV or Polar) ( M3 or M4 ).
In these modes the communications transmit line is tri-state unless the anemometer is
responding to a command.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 22
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Configuring WindObserver II for Half Duplex Operation.


1) Set up Two Terminals: One for RS485 Half Duplex and the other for RS422 Full
Duplex.
a (2-wire)
HYPER-TERMINAL
A (Half-D)

RS485 I/F
(USB)

SWITCH

HYPER-TERMINAL
B (Full-D)

WObsII

RS422 I/F
(USB)

b (4-wire)

One PC (with two USB ports) can be used for both Terminals, although two may be less
confusing.
Note: Power must not be disconnected from the anemometer throughout this procedure.
2) Assuming the unit is set for Full Duplex, connect 9-way at [b] disconnect 9-way at
[a]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
3) On Terminal B, enter CONFIGURATION MODE. Set Half Duplex (E2). The
CONFIRM> prompt will appear.
4) Disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way [a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
5) On Terminal A, type E <ENTER> to confirm.
6) The unit should now be configured in Half Duplex mode.
Configuring WindObserver II for Full Duplex Operation.
1) Assuming the unit is set for Half Duplex, disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way
[a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
2) On Terminal A, type E1 to select Full Duplex. The CONFIRM> prompt will
appear.
3) Disconnect 9-way [a] and connect 9-way [b]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
4) On Terminal B type E <ENTER> to confirm.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 23
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.4.

Units

The wind speed can be set to any of the following units:


Unit
Metres per sec
Knots
Miles per hour
Kilometres per hour
feet per minute

8.5.

Abbreviation
m/s
knots
MPH
kph
fpm

Output rate

The output frequency can be set between 1 and 10 per second. The wind speed is sampled
every 25ms, each axis being sampled sequentially..

8.6.

Averaging

The Averaging Period can be set from zero to 3600 secs. (1 hour). The default setting is
zero. When averaging is enabled, data is output at a rate determined by the averaging
period. The data is an average of valid data collected during the averaging period.

8.7.

Options

Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature


Either or both of these parameters can be selected or disabled
Note that neither of these parameters is available in Tunnel or NMEA formats.
SOS is useful for calculating air temperature with a rapid response. Sonic temperature is
derived from the SOS, based on an assumption of the composition of the atmosphere.
Humidity will affect the result.
True temperature can be calculated by:
T=
Ts
1+0.32 e/p
Where
T = True temperature (Kelvin)
Ts = Sonic temperature
e = Vapour pressure of water in air
p = absolute pressure of water in air
Heating (If fitted)
Heating is autonomous and requires no set-up once activated.
45 Offset
If required, the U axis can be offset +45 to the transducer axis.
Vertical Output Padding
A dummy W vector is inserted to provide compatibility with any WindMaster that may be
in a network.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 24
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.8.

ASCII message format (UV and Polar)

ASCII UV format
U axis wind speed

V axis wind speed

Units

<STX>A,+000.04,-000.02,M,+345.01,+022.36,00,<ETX>25
Start of
string

Unit
identification

Speed of
sound

Temperature

Status

End of
string

Check
sum

where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed

Units

In increments of 0.01 units (UUU.UU)


In increments of 0.01 units (VVV.VV)
Value
M
N
P
K
F

Units
Metres per second (m/s)
Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)

Start of string
Unit identification
Speed of sound
Temperature

ASCII value 2
Letter A Z (default A)
In metres per second (if enabled)
Sonic temperature in degrees C (if enabled)

Status

Value
0
60
Any other value

End of string
Check sum

ASCII value 3
Exclusive OR of all characters between Start of String
and End of String reported as ASCII hex.

Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK if enabled
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 25
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ASCII Polar format


Wind direction

Wind speed

Units

<STX>B,121,000.08,M,+344.66,+021.76,00,<ETX>06
Start of
string

Unit
identification

Speed of
sound

Temperature

Status

End of
string

Check
sum

where

8.9.

Wind direction
Wind speed

In degrees relative to N (DDD)


In increments of 0.01 units (MMM.MM)

All other parameters

See Section 8.8 ASCII UV format

Binary message format (UV, Polar and Tunnel)

Binary UV format
U axis wind speed

V axis wind speed

Units

0x81 0x81 000.04 -000.02 +345.01 +022.36 00 1


Start of string

Speed of sound

Temperature

Status

where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed

Units

In increments of 0.01 units (UUU.UU)


In increments of 0.01 units (VVV.VV)
Value
1
2
3
4
5

Units
Metres per second (m/s)
Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 26
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Start of string
Speed of sound
Temperature

In metres per second (if enabled)


Sonic temperature in degrees C (twos complement
signed) (if enabled)

Status

Value
0
60
Any other value

Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5

Binary Polar format


Wind speed

Wind direction

Units

0x81 0x81 006.04 265 +345.01 +022. 36 00 1


Start of string

Speed of sound

Temperature

Status

where
Wind direction
Wind speed

In degrees relative to N (DDD)


In increments of 0.01 units (MMM.MM)

All other parameters

See Section 8.9 Binary UV format

Binary Tunnel format


U axis wind speed

Direction

Units

0x81 0x81 +000.04 1 00 1


Start of string

Status

U axis Wind speed


Direction (along U axis)

In increments of 0.01 units (MMM.MM)


Value
Polarity
1
+U
0
-U

Other parameters

See Section 8.9 Binary UV format

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 27
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.10. NMEA Format


Instrument
Identifier

Wind direction

Wind speed

Units
Checksum
delimiter

$ IIMWV, 120, R, 002.10, M, A,* CC

Start of string

Instrument
type

Wind
measurement

Status

Check
sum

where
Wind direction
Wind speed

In degrees relative to N (DDD)


In increments of 0.01 units (MMM.MM)

Units

M
N
P
K
F

Start of string
Instrument type
Wind measurement
Status

$
IIMWV
R
Relative wind measurement
A
Valid measurement
V
Invalid measurement
Exclusive OR of all characters between $ and *
reported as ASCII hex.

Check sum

Metres per second (m/s)


Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)

A typical WindObserver II configuration suitable for NMEA would be:


B2, E1, F1, G0, K1, L1, M5, O1, P1, U1.
Consult specification NMEA 0183 version 3 (available on the web) www.nmea.org for
complete interface details.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 28
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

8.11. Analogue outputs and options


Analogue outputs are available on WindObserver II versions 2 and 4 only.
See Section 6.5 for connection details, and Section 9.12 for configuring the
analogue outputs.
Output modes
There are three analogue output channels which can be configured as either voltage (0 to
5v, or 2.5v), or current outputs (4 to 20mA).
Channel outputs
The signals on the Channel outputs 1 and 2 are dependant on the Output format chosen.
The signal on Channel 3 can be configured for either Status or Temperature.
Output format
UV (M1,M3,or M7)
Polar (M2, M4, or M8)
NMEA (M6)
Tunnel (M6)

Channel 1
U
Magnitude
Magnitude
U

Channel 2
V
Direction
Direction
U direction*

Channel 3

Status or Temperature

Status
If channel 3 is configured for Status, the output will be 0v (or 4mA) if the unit is an OK
condition. In a fault condition, error code 01, 02, or 04, the output will be +5v (or 0mA).
See Section 10.5 for the list of Error Codes.
Temperature
If channel 3 is configured for Temperature, it reports the temperature if it is between 40
and +70C, scaled from +0.7V to +5V (6.25mA to 20mA). Temperatures outside this
range are reported as errors by setting the output to 0V (4mA).
Tunnel mode
In Tunnel mode, Channel 2 gives the direction of the wind along the U axis, where a U
vector (=wind from the N direction) is represented by 0v (or 4mA), and a +U vector
(=wind from the S direction) by 5v (or 20mA).
Scaling
All analogue outputs are in m/s and can be scaled to have a full scale deflection of 10 to
70 units.
In Polar mode the sign should be ignored. Only the + sign is effective.
In all cases zero Wind Speed is represented by 0V or 4mA.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 29
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Polar mode direction wraparound


The Wind Direction in Polar mode can be configured for either Standard (0 - 359) or
Wraparound (0 - 539) options. If the Standard mode is used with a chart recorder, large
swings of the recorder pen will be experienced each time the wind direction passes
between 0 and 359. Using the Wraparound mode, when the wind first changes from 0 to
359, there will be a step change on the output, but after this first time the output will
change smoothly each time the wind passes through 360. (Similarly, the first time the
wind veers from 539 to 180, there will be a step change, after which the output will
change smoothly).
Wind
direction
(degrees)
0
180
360
540

Voltage output (V)

Current output (mA)

Standard

Wraparound

Standard

Wraparound

0
2.5
5.0
n/a

0
1.67
3.33
5.0

4.00
12.00
20.00
n/a

4.00
9.33
14.67
20.00

Low wind speeds


Whilst the wind speed is below 0.05 metres/sec, the wind direction will not be calculated.
The outputs on Channel 1 and 2 will continue to output the last calculated value.
If channel 3 is configured for Temperature, it will likewise output the last calculated value.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 30
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.

CONFIGURING

WindCom may be used to configure WindObserve r II. This is an easy to use menudriven package, available as a free download at www.gill.co.uk .
Alternatively, you may use terminal emulator software such as Hyperterminal or
Terminal.
This section describes the commands used to change settings when using terminal
emulator software. For a fuller descriptions of the settings and options see Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Keystrokes are shown thus :- D 3 ENTER

9.1.

Entering Configuration mode

From Continuous mode


*

From Polled mode


* N - where N is the Unit Identifier.
Note - the Unit Identifier must be entered
as upper-case

The WindObserver II responds with a CONFIGURATION MODE message, stops


reporting wind measurements, and waits for a command (as detailed below).

9.2.

Returning to Measurement mode


Q ENTER

If in Continuous mode, the anemometer responds with wind measurements immediately,


continuing at the selected Sampling rate .
If in Polled mode,
?
Enables poll
N
Polls anemometer (where N is the Unit identifier entered as upper-case)
The anemometer replies with a single set of wind measurements
&
Anemometer replies with Unit identifier
!
Disables poll

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 31
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.3.

Checking the configuration

We strongly recommend that, as a standard procedure, you use this command ( D3 ) prior
to, and after, changing any settings. It shows the current settings for all the alterable
settings. We suggest you note down your settings, so that you can easily return to them.
Enters Configuration Mode (from Continuous mode)
or
*N
Enters Configuration Mode (from Polled mode)
D 3 ENTER
The WindObserver II responds with the current settings.
The factory default settings are
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
*

How to change these settings is explained in the following sections.


To return to Measurement mode

9.4.

Q ENTER

Changing settings

To change a setting, first go into Configuration mode and then refer to the sections below.
Enter the Configuration code of the new setting required, followed by ENTER.
If successful, the new setting will be echoed back as a message by the WindObserver II.
For example, to change the message format to NMEA, enter M 5 ENTER .
The WindObserver II will reply with M5. When the unit is returned to the Measurement
mode, it will be in NMEA format.
Note : The factory-set (default) settings are shown in bold in the following sections.

9.5.

Output format

Output format
ASCII UV Continuous
ASCII UV Polled (tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Continuous
ASCII Polar Polled(tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Polled
Binary UV Continuous
Binary Polar Continuous
Tunnel Continuous
NMEA Continuous

Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5

* If units are to be networked, they MUST be given unique Unit Identifiers


(see Section 9.6 Unit Identifier)

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 32
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.6.

Unit Identifier

Changes the Unit Identifier to X.


X can be any letter from B to Z.
Note that the default Unit Identifier A should not be used when networking units.
NX

9.7.

Units
Units

metres/sec
(m/s)

knots
(knots)

miles / hour
(MPH)

kilometre/hour
(kph)

feet / minute
(fpm)

U1

U2

U3

U4

U5

Configuration
code

9.8.

Output rate

Outputs per second


Configuration code

9.9.

10

P1

P3

P2

P4

P5

P6

Averaging

Enter the required averaging period in seconds as a four figure number (nnnn) between
zero and 3600.
Gnnnn

9.10. Options
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature
Setting
Report SOS
Report Sonic temperature
Report SOS andSonic temperature
Disable both

Configuration code
A1
A2
A3
A0

Note that neither of these parameters is available in Tunnel or NMEA formats.


Heating (If fitted)
Heating is autonomous and requires no set-up once activated.
Setting
Configuration code
H1
Disabled
Activated
H2
Each transducer is heated independently and will be active when ambient temperature
drops below approximately +15C each transducer will de-activate when +25C threshold
is reached.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 33
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NMEA
Setting
NMEA string IIMWV
NMEA string WIMWV

Configuration code
K1
K2

Vertical Output Padding


Setting
Disable vertical output padding
Enable vertical output padding

Configuration code
V1
V2

45 Offset
Setting
Align U axis with
transducer axis
Align U axis +45
to transducer axis
Reverses Polar
Direction
Align @ 45 from
North

Configuration
code

Notes
X1. Aligns U axis with North/South axis.

X1

X2. This re-aligns both U&V and polarity 45.

X2

X3 reverses reported polar direction to allow the


instrument to be mounted upside down. N.B.
Does NOT affect UV alignment (Mode 1, 3).
X4 set UV & polar alignment at 45 degrees from
North when instrument is mounted upside down.

X3

X4

Figure 4 shows the polarity of U and V if the wind components along the U and V axis are
blowing in the direction of the respective arrows.

-U
N

-V

+V
S

+U
Figure 4 UV Polarity

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 34
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.11. Communications settings


Baud rate
Setting
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
1200
300

Configuration code
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

If a request is sent to change the Baud rate, before it changes it must be


confirmed by entering B ENTER (at the new Baud rate.)
eg. If set to B3 (9600 baud), to change to B5 (38400 baud), enter
B 5 ENTER , change host terminal to 38400 baud, and confirm by
entering B ENTER.
NOTE: a random echo will be generated after the B5 confirmation
Duplex mode
Setting
Full duplex
Half duplex

Configuration code
E1
E2

Data and parity options


Setting
8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit

Configuration code
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 35
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ASCII Message terminator


Setting

Configuration code

CR LF
LF

L1
L2

9.12. Analogue settings (if fitted)


Voltage or current output
Setting
Configuration code
Voltage (0 to 5V, or 2.5V) *
T1
Current
T3
* The selection between 0-5V or 2.5V is made by the appropriate
hardware connections See Section 6.5 Analogue connections
Channel 3 output
Setting

Configuration code

Status
Temperature

Y1
Y2

Scaling
Setting
Configuration code

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Z1

Z2

Z3

Z4

Z5

Z6

Z7

Polar mode direction wraparound


Setting
Wraparound (0 - 539)
Standard

Configuration code
C1
C2

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 36
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Analogue power-up tests


Setting
Disable analogue power-up tests
Enable analogue power-up tests
Enable continual cycling of analogue
power-up tests
Disable continual cycling of analogue
power-up tests

Configuration code
J0
J1
J2
J3

9.13. Configuration and Diagnostic Information


Each of these commands causes a response from the WindObserver II.

Item

Command
code

Type and serial No.


Software version

D1

Unit configuration

D3

Analogue ID
(if present)
Anemometer
power supply
voltage
Integrity check

D2

Typical response
E000694
2.07
current configuration :
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1
L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1
Z1

D4

GI1390 fitted.

D5

+29.8

D6

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 37
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

10. MAINTENANCE & FAULT-FINDING


10.1. Cleaning
If there is any build up of deposit on the unit, it should be gently cleaned with a cloth,
moistened with soft detergent. Solvents should not be used, and care should be taken to
avoid scratching any surfaces. The unit must be allowed to defrost naturally after being
exposed to snow or icy conditions, do NOT attempt to remove ice or snow with a tool.
Do NOT remove black rubber transducer caps.

10.2. Servicing
There are no moving parts or user-serviceable parts requiring routine maintenance.
Opening the unit or breaking the security seal will void the warranty and the calibration.
In the event of failure, prior to returning the unit to your authorised Gill distributor, it is
recommended tha t :
All cables and connectors are checked for continuity, bad contacts, corrosion etc.
A bench test is carried out as described in Section 10.6.
You contact your supplier for advice

10.3. Fault-finding
Symptom

No output

Corrupted output

One way
communication
Failed / Incorrect
WindObserver II
ouput, data
invalid flag

Solution
Check DC power to WindObserve r II, cable and connections.
Check comms settings of WindObserver II (as detailed in Section
9) and host system match, including correct Com port
Check unit is in Continuous mode
Check that in- line communication devices are wired correctly.
NOTE: It is us ual for Anemometer TX + to be connected to
converter device RX +
Check comms settings of WindObserver II and host system
match.
Try a slower baud rate.
Check cable lengths and type of cable.
Check wiring is in accordance with the manual.
Check that transducer path is not blocked

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 38
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

10.4. Returning unit


If the unit has to be returned, it should be carefully packed in the original packaging and
returned to your authorised Gill distributor, with a full description of the fault condition.

10.5. Status (error) codes


The Status code is sent as part of each wind measurement message.
Code
00
60
A
01
02
04
08
09
10
50
51
62
63
65
V

Status
Condition
OK
Sufficient samples in average period
OK and heating
Sufficient samples in average period
enabled
OK
NMEA data valid
Axis 1 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on U axis
Axis 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on V axis
Axis 1 and 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on both axes
NVM error
NVM checksum failed
ROM error
ROM checksum failed
System gain at max.
Inaccurate results likely
Marginal system gain
Results OK, but marginal operation
Measurement average building
Heating current tripped or electronic failure
Thermistor open circuit
Heating element open circuit
NMEA data invalid

10.6. Bench test


Couple the WindObserver II to the host system and power supply, using a known working
test cable.
Check that the unit is correctly configured by going into Configuration mode and using D3
See Section 9.3 Checking the configuration.
Check for normal output data, and that the Status Code is OK 00, 60 or A (for NMEA
format).
If the status code is other than these, refer to Section 10.5 Status (error) codes.
Use an office fan or similar to check that the unit is sensing wind, turning the unit to
simulate changing wind direction and to check that both axes are functioning.
Note that this a quick functional test. There are no calibration adjustments; the unit is
designed NOT to require re-calibration within its lifetime. Gill has provided and Integrity
Check, see next page for details.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 39
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Integrity Check Chamber (ICC)


The software to perform the Integrity Check (IC) is incorporated in the latest
WindObserverIIs.
The IC is designed to:
1. Identify any gross changes in the head geometry that would affect the
performance.
2. Provide a zero wind environment to confirm the WindObserverII zero calibration.
The ICC has been designed to be used in an indoor still air environment with an ambient
temperature between 10C and 28C. When conducting the test it is important that the ICC
is assembled on to the WindObserverII head and not touched or moved during the test.
This test is only valid if undertaken with an ICC purchased from Gill.
Integrity & Zero Wind Check
Zero Wind Check
Configure your PC to run HyperTerminal and assemble the ICC by inserting the reflector
cases and the two halves of the ICC onto the WindObserverII. The ICC must be retained
using the strips provided. Then:
1. Ensure that the WindbserverII is set in factory default mode. For Factory default
settings see section 9.3.
2. Enter Measurement Mode and Record/View data
In still air wind speed measurements should not exceed 0.03m/s. If wind speed exceeds
0.03m/s contact Gill Instruments.
Integrity Check
Ensure the ICC is assembled correctly on the WindObserverII. Using HyperTerminal,
enter Configuration Mode as described in Section 9.
Enter D6.
A typical report as shown below will be displayed.
ALIGMENT LIMITS: U=2417,2517
V=2369,2469
ALIGNMENT U:2467 *PASS*
ALIGNMENT V:2419 *PASS*
GAIN 0:0007 *PASS*
GAIN 1: 0007 *PASS*
GAIN 2:0008 *PASS*
GAIN 3:0008 *PASS*
D6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 40
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If there has been no significant changes to The WindObserverII head configuration then
*PASS* will confirm correct operation.
Alterations to the head geometry will result in a *FAIL* message. If this occurs please
contact Gill Instruments.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 41
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11. APPENDICES
11.1. Glossary & Abbreviations
Item
CAL
CR
CRLF
CSV
ENG
ESC
ETX
FAC
fpm
GND
HEX
I/P
IP66
KPH
LF
m/s
MAG
MAX
MPH
NEMA
NMEA 0183
(version 3)
No:
NVM
O/P
PC
PCB
POR
PROCOMM
ROM
RS232

Meaning
Calibration
Carriage Return
Carriage Return Line Feed
Comma Separated Variable
Engineering
ESCape key on keyboard used to stop any process that is being
executed
End of string character
Factory
Feet per minute
GrouND
HEXadecimal
InPut
Protection Classification
Kilometres per Hour
Line Feed
Metres per second
MAGnitude - scalar reference to wind speed
MAXimum
Miles per Hour
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Marine Electronics Association standard for interfacing
marine electronic navigational devices
Number
Non-Volatile Memory
Output
IBM compatible Personal Computer
Printed Circuit Board
Power On Reset
Terminal emulator software package
Read Only Memory
Communications standard

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 42
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Item
RS422
RS485
RTS
RX
RXD
S/W
SOS
SEC
STX
TERM
TX
TXD
+VE
-VE
WindCom
WRT

Meaning
Communications standard
Communications standard
Request To Send
Receive
Received Data
SoftWare
Speed Of Sound
SECond
Start of string character
TERMinal
Transmit
Transmitted Data
Positive
Negative
Gill software used to configure WindObserver II
With Respect To

11.2. Guarantee
For terms of guarantee contact your supplier.
Warranty is void if the red security seal covering base nuts is damaged or broken, or the
transducer caps have been damaged.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 43
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11.3. Principle of operation


The WindObserver II measures the times taken for an ultrasonic pulse of sound to travel
from the North transducer to the South transducer, and compares it with the time for a
pulse to travel from S to N transducer. Likewise times are compared between West and
East, and E and W transducer.
If, for example, a North wind is blowing, then the time taken for the pulse to travel from N
to S will be faster than from S to N, whereas the W to E, and E to W times will be the
same. The wind speed and direction (and the speed of sound) can then be calculated from
the differences in the times of flight on each axis. This calculation is independent of
factors such as temperature.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 44
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

Gill Instruments Ltd


_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11.4. Electrical Conformity


EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ACCORDING
TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC
We, Gill Instruments Ltd., declare our sole responsibility that the products:
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Heated Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Heated with Analogue Outputs Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Non-Heated Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Non-Heated with Analogue OutputsVariant)
Manufactured by:

Gill Instruments Ltd


Saltmarsh Park
67 Gosport Street
Lymington, SO41 9EG

to which this declaration relates, are in conformity with the protection requirements of Council Directive
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
This Declaration of Conformity is based upon compliance of the product with the following harmonized
standards:
EN50081 - 1

(Using EN55022 Class B)

EN50082 - 2

(Using IEC 61000-4-2


IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-6)

Signed by:
A.C.R. Stickland Director
Date of issue:

28/11/2000

Place of issue:

Gill Instruments Ltd


Saltmarsh Park
67 Gosport Street
Lymington, SO41 9EG

________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 45
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

130,00

113,50

80,00

63,50

X1
C

101,60

PG13,5

12 3456 78

PG13,5

For sensors with heater a


third PG 13,5 cablegland
must be mounted on left
side of the junction box.

PG13,5

1: RED, +V
2: BLACK, -V
3: YELLOW, HEATER+ (OPTION)
4: BLACK, HEATER- (OPTION)
5: GREEN, TX+
6: BLACK, TX7: WHITE, RX+
8: BLACK, RX-

WIND OBSERVER II JUNCTION BOX

A
DIPL. ING HOUM A.S
SIZE
SCALE

FSCM NO

YES

DWG NO

REV

E\HB\GILL\WOII.VSD
2
SHEET
1 OF 1

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

Winddisplay
OMC-138/139

Users Manual
Ver. No. 1.07
(pdf version)

OBSERVATOR instruments B.V.


P.O.Box 60
2980 AB Ridderkerk
Rietdekkerstraat 6
2984 BM Ridderkerk
Tel.
++31 (0)180 463411
Telefax ++31 (0)180-463510
The Netherlands

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

Contents
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2. Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Cable layout without heater
2.2.2 Power supply settings . . . .
2.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4. Daisy chaining . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3
3
3
3
4
5
6

3. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Internal hardware settings . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Analogue output . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Serial in/output . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Settings via frontpanel . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1Units and averaging settings
3.2.2 Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Deviation setting . . . . . . . .
3.3 Settings possible via the RS232 port.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10

4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5. Setting up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Input device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Vector range settings . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Instrument output device . . . . . . .
5.4 Analogue output range settings . .
5.5 RS232 output settings . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Currentloop/RS422 output settings
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422 . . . .
5.9 Averaging of channels . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Device options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Show all settings . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Page 1

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

1. General
The Obsermet digital wind display OMC-138 is a combined display
for wind speed and wind direction. The OMC-138 is provided with
a digital LED indicator for speed, and a double ring of 36 LEDs
actual and average direction information.
A second three digit display located in the lower right corner
provides gust information.
The front panel is provided with three buttons for adjusting the
brightness of the LEDs. testing all the LED displays and entering
a set menu for adjusting display settings.
The OMC-138 will accept the output-signals directly from the series
OMC-160 and OMC-170 wind sensors, without the need of
additional interfaces. It provides the power supply to the wind
sensor, and "daisy-chain" connections are available for additional
indicators. As an option, the OMC-138 can provide analogue
output signals for speed and direction. Those can be 4...20 mA or
0...1 volt.
The display is housed in a 144x144 mm. DIN-size casing suitable
for flush mounting in a console or display panel. Unit depth is
63mm.
The signal transmission of the daisy chain is: 20mA current loop,
300 Baud, ASCII-code.
The OMC-138 can display the wind speed in various scales i.e.
Miles per hour (mph). Meters per second (m/s). Knots. kilometers
per hour (km/h) and Beaufort. In addition the analogue output for
wind speed and direction can be transmitted using a variety of
averaging periods between 1 and 600 seconds.

Principle characteristics.
Power supply
Power supply optional
Speed display
Gust display
Direction display
Direction average
Input signal
Input optional
Output
Output (optional)
Dimensions
Weight
Scale
Brightness control
Readout units

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

220Vac. 115Vac and 24Vdc selectable via wire bridges


12 Vdc
3 digit 7 segment LED display 14.3 mm height
3 digit 7 segment LED display 10.1 mm height
36 LEDs circular color RED
36 LEDs circular color AMBER
Currentloop with ASCII information
Pulse. Potmeter and RS422
Daisy chain
0...1 volt. 4...20 mA, RS232 and NMEA-183
144x144x94 mm
approx. 800 gr
Knots, mph. m/s or km/h
From the front panel (optional on distance)
m/s. Km/h. knots, Mph and Bft

Page 2

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

2. Installation
2.1. Mechanical
Panel mounting of the OMC-138 display requires a panel cut-out of 137 mm square. Maximum
panel thickness 5 mm. Rear access must be provided, for fixing of the tightening clamps and
connecting the electric cabling. The depth of the unit is 63 mm and an additional clearance of 8 mm
should be allowed for the cable connections.

2.2. Electrical
All Obsermet displays utilize a common terminal strip for the connections to the wind sensors and
the ancillary displays and/or recorders. The signal cable between sensor and display is a 4-core
cable with 2 cores for power to the sensor and 2 cores for signal transmission. To reduce
interference the cable must have a common screen. This screen should be grounded to earth in the
junction box of the wind sensor. In this way the cable may run distances up to 1 kilometer.
Recommended cable: 2 (or 3) twisted pairs with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.
In the case that the wind sensor is provided with a heater. 2 extra cores are required for power
supply to the heater. The size of the heater cable depends on the cable length. (For more details
see manual wind sensor)
The OMC-138 display unit provides the 15 Volts DC. power supply to the microprocessor
transmitter in the wind sensor. The power consumption of the sensor transmitter electronics is
approx. 65 mA. This power supply should not be used for the optional heaters in the sensor. These
sensor-heaters must be powered independently from the display unit.

2.2.1 Cable layout without heater

Page 3

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

2.2.2 Power supply settings


The OMC-138 will be delivered with the power supply set as required by the customer. If no power
supply is mentioned in the official ordering papers the OMC-138 power supply will be set for 230
Vac.
If during installation is found that the supply setting is wrong two things can be done, the unit can
be returned to the factory for modification or the user will modify the unit himself.
To modify the display unit for a different power supply proceed as follows,
On the power supply board, the Pcb with the terminal connection on the rear side, there is installed
a transformer. The transformer offers the possibility of 115 or 230 Vac. The supply depends on the
jumper settings between the filter transformer and the supply transformer. (see Pcb layout) If the
wired marked "B" are installed the unit is set for 115 Vac, If the wire "A" is installed the unit is set
for 230 Vac.
For 24 Vdc power supply the transformer TR1 has to be removed from the printed circuit board.
When the transformer has been removed two wire connection can be made (marked with "C")

As an option the OMC-138/139 can be delivered for 12 Vdc, If the unit has to be modified to work
with 12 Vdc the transformer has to be removed. With the transformer removed it becomes possible
to install a DC/DC converter on the location of the transformer. The DC/DC converter converts the
12 Volt supply voltage up to 24 Vdc.

Page 4

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

2.2.3. Connections
All connections to the OMC-138 display
are made to the rear of the display as
shown on the drawing on the right.

If the Obsermet windsensor is used, only


the terminals 1. 2. 3, and 4 are used.

Daisy chaining to the next instrument is


done on the terminals 5 and 6.

If a sensor is used providing a pulse


signal for windspeed connections must
be made to terminals 1 and 2.

If for wind direction a sensor is used with


a potentiometer connections must be
made to the terminals 13. 14 and 15.

1 = -15 Vdc sensor supply


2 = +15 Vdc sensor supply
3 = - serial currentloop input
4 = + serial currentloop input
5 = - daisy chain output
6 = + daisychain output
7 = - RS422 input
8 = + RS422input
9 = - RS422 output
10 = + RS422 output
11 = - pulse input (windspeed) (*)
12 = + pulse input (windspeed) (*)
13 = 0 Volt reference supply potmeter (winddirection)
14 = input signal potmeter
15 = + reference signal potmeter 2500 mV
16 = - analogue speed output 4..20 or 0..1 Volt
17 = + analogue speed output 4..20 or 0..1 Volt
18 = - analogue direction output 4..20 mA or 0..1 Volt
19 = + analogue direction output 4..20 mA or 0..1 Volt
*) it is possible to use the pulse input for windspeed to adjust the brightness of the display from a
remote location. This is optional and must be ask for when the instrument is ordered.

Page 5

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

2.2.4. Daisy chaining


The daisy-chain output is used to transfer the wind sensor information to a second wind display.
The cable length depends on the type of cable used. Depending on the total capacity of the cable a
distance up to 1000 meter is possible. The cable should be screened, and the screen should be
grounded at 1 point only.

Recommended cable: 1 twisted pair with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.

Page 6

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

3. Commissioning
Before switching ON the mains, check that the power supply is correct as indicated on the
identification label on the rear of the equipment.
With no signal cable connected, switch on the display and observe the front panel LED,s. The
system will perform a led test all led are switched on and off one by one. When the test is finished
the display shows on the led circle no information and on both speed displays only "---" is shown.
This is because no sensor information is received by the display.
Check the voltage at terminals [1] and [21 on the rear panel this should be 15 Volts DC. With all
cabling correctly connected, the display will show the wind speed and wind direction directly as
transmitted by the OMC-160 wind sensor.
Adjustment cannot be made as the sensor-signal is digitally transmitted.
When there is no serial information received from the wind sensor the watchdog circuit in the
display unit starts to switch the 15 Volt supply voltage to the sensor ON and OFF. The supply
voltage is 10 seconds ON and if none information is received from the wind sensor the supply
voltage is switched OFF for 5 seconds. If this is happening during the commissioning check the
wiring to the wind sensor.
When the display is fully operational and the and the sensor information is not received for more
than 5 seconds the display starts flashing indicating that the sensor information is not longer
received by the display unit.
The OMC-138 is also available as OMC-139. The OMC-139 is made to be used on board of ships.
The front panel of the OMC-139 is different, the degree scale is made from 0...180 degrees on both
sides of the scale.
If from the speed display inside the led circle the decimal point between the hundred and the ten
display is ON the Eeprom has been damaged. Settings for proper operation are most probably lost.
The display must be returned to the factory.
Extension (optional)
The display can provide information of wind speed and direction in the NMEA-183 format.
The display can be used with a Gill wind sensor
The display can be used with an Irdam wind sensor
The display can be used with Vector wind sensors (12 Vdc supply possible)
Adjusting brightness on remote location. (not when Vector sensors are used)
The display can provide 0...1 Volt or 4...20 mA output signals

Page 7

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

3.1 Internal hardware settings


3.1.1 Analogue output
The OMC-138/139 provides an analogue output signal for wind speed and wind
direction. This is optional and not as standard available.
On the processor board (middle board) there are some jumper settings to select
a current or an voltage output signal. There are three jumpers that have to be
set in the correct position. In the drawing the selection for a voltage output is
set. In jumper field J3 de position 2-3 is selected and in jumper field J4 the
jumper settings 1-3 and 2-4 are selected.
To get a 4...20 mA output the jumpers must be set as follows,
Jumper field J3 set 1-2
Jumper field J4 set 3-5 and 4-6
The Potmeters R18 and R19 are used to set the range of the analogue output
signals.
For analogue output the following IC,s must be placed in the sockets, IC16,
IC17, IC18 and IC20.

3.1.2 Serial in/output


The OMC-138 has two different serial in/output ports. Port 1 is used to receive information from the
windsensor on the input and to transmit information on the currentloop and RS422 output.
Port 2 is used to communicate via the RS232 port on the rear of the instrument.
Receive information port 1
The OMC-138/139 has the possibility to receive information on different levels, the
possibilities are RS422, RS485 and Currentloop. A selection is made with the
jumper field J1 in the following way.
Jumper field J1
Jumper field J1
Jumper field J1

RS485 set jumper 4-5


RS422 set jumper 2-3
Currentloop set jumper 1-2

Transmit information Port 1


The OMC-138/139 provides the possibility to transmit information on different
signal levels. Those levels are RS422 and Currentloop.
Transmit and receive Port 2
Port 2 is the 9-pin D-connector at the rear of the instrument. This port can be used
for setting up the instrument or to output the wind information (optional). The
baudrate for this port is standard set to 9600 bps. But with the menu options this
can be changed.

Page 8

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

Currentloop output OMC-160 message format


The currentloop output is normally used to transport the collected data from the currentloop input.
Using the system in this way it is not necessary anymore to output the data as analogue signals
which upgrade the performance and the accuracy. The data is transmitted with the same speed as
data is received from the windsensor. 300 baud 8N1.
If the currentloop output signal from the OMC-160 is repeated by the OMC-138 the message looks
as follows,
<LF>D125<sp>V234<sp >cscs<CR>
In the above message the transmitted wind direction is the number shown after the indent "D" 125
degrees. the windspeed in the message is shown after the indent "V" 234 is 23.4 m/s. The
windspeed is transmitted without decimal point and must therefor be divided by 10 to get the correct
windspeed.
The checksum is all information in the string added, the least significant byte is divided into high
and low nibble and both nibbles are incremented by hexadecimal 30. This information is sent out as
a checksum.
OMC-2900 message format
Sometimes the data is transmitted in the OMC-2900 format. This format is used when more
parameters are transmitted.
The wind data transported in the OMC-2900 format looks as following,
<STX> <LF>V21.2<SP>CSCS< CR>
<LF>D156<SP>CSCS<CR> <EOT>
Every message starts with a start of text character after this the messages are transmitted. All
messages start with a line feed followed with the identifier for the data, then the data and then a
checksum for protection reasons, the message end with a carriage return.
All input channels can be transmitted in this way every second to any receiving station.
RS232/RS422 in/output channel
The OMC-2900 and the OMC-160 format on the RS232/RS422 looks the same as the format used
in the currentloop output described paragraph 3.2.2.2
There are two possibilities to transmit data in the NMEA output, windspeed can be transmitted in
m/s or in knots, both messages are shown below.
SIIMWV,123,R,5.8,N,A*24 Windspeed in knots
SIIMWV,123,R,5.8,M,A*27 Windspeed in meters per seconds
The transmission speed is the same as the communication speed of the windsensor used, if this is
the OMC-160 it will be 300 bps 8N1.
If the currentloop input is not used the speed can be set from 300 to 9600 bps.

Page 9

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

3.2 Settings via frontpanel


On the frontpanel of the display there are three pushbuttons. The buttons are marked "MENU",
arrow up and arrow down. Under normal conditions the buttons marked arrow up and down are
used to adjust the brightness of the display.
3.2.1Units and averaging settings
When the menu button is pressed the led in the average time window starts flashing indicating that
the select option is on. It becomes possible now to make a selection using the arrow up and down
button. If the menu button is pressed again the led in the units window starts flashing indicating that
the select option is on. With the arrow up and down button it is possible now to select different units
for the windspeed.
When the buttons are not touched for 5 seconds the display will return to the normal operation
mode.
3.2.2 Lamp test
With both arrow buttons pressed all the displays and leds start flashing (lamp test) When the
interval time for gust is set to 0 seconds the Gust must be reset manually. this has to be done by
pressing the menu and the arrow down button at the same time.
3.2.3 Deviation setting
The display provide the possibilty to add an offset to the wind direction. This is very usefull for
windsysystems installed on oilrigs and for airports if they want to use the magnetic North instead of
the true North.
An offset is added in the following way, Press the arrow-up button and the Menu button, the Gust
display starts flashing and is showing the offset. As long as the display is flashing the offset can be
changed using the arrow-up or arrow-down buttons. The set value is added to the actual wind
information from the sensor.

3.3 Settings possible via the RS232 port.


1

Users interval time, 3 different times can be set, direction, speed and gust. When for gust a
time of 0 is selected the gust can be reseted by pushing the menu button and the arrow
down button at the same time.

Scaling analogue outputs. For the analogue outputs it is possible to set the span of the
signal. 4...20 mA can be 0...40 m/s or 50 m/s. For the direction a choice can be made
between 360 or 540 or 720 degrees.

Average time for analogue output signals, For the 2 available analogue outputs it is possible
to set a average time. This is done to prevent analogue recorder to paint the paper.

Page 10

Obsermet division
4

OMC-138/139 Manual

Selection of sensor type, a selection can be made between the following inputs.
a. Obsermet sensors OMC-160. OMC-170 and OMC-165 (standard)
b. Gill sensors RS422 (optional)
c. Irdam sensor RS422 (optional)
d. Vector puls/potmeter (optional)

When pulse/potmeter is selected it is possible to set the scaling factors for the input signals.

RS232 output on/off and baudrate setting

RS422 output on/off and baudrate setting

Repeat the sensor message on the RS232/422 or select NMEA-183 output signal.

4. Maintenance
The Obsermet OMC-138/139 digital display unit has no moving parts, and requires no routine
maintenance. If required, the perspex display front can be cleaned with a cloth, slightly moistened
with a soft detergent. Care must be taken that no liquid enters the display unit. Solvents should not
be used, and scratches should be avoided.
Fuses: Glass fuses 5x20 mm,
40 mA for 230 Vac.
80 mA for 115 Vac
250 mA for 24 Vdc
The fuse can be reached as follows,

Switch of the main supply and disconnect all the wiring on the rear of the display.
Remove the four 2.5 mm screws on the rear of the display.
Remove the front window, pull on a corner with both hands.
With holding the front down, the whole case can be removed now.
The fuse can be reached now. The fuse is placed on the PCB where all the wires are connected to.

Page 11

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

5. Setting up procedure
During final testing in the factory the
OMC-138/139 is setup for the system it is
manufactured for.
If at a later stage the settings have to be
changed then this can be done by the user in
the following way.
Connected a cable to the RS232 connector at
the rear of the instrument.Connected the other
end of the cable to a PC.
Start on the PC a terminal program like
"Terminal" under Windows or "Hyper terminal"
under windows 95.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
1 - Select input device
2 - Select output device
3 - Set averaging of channels
4 - Set options
5 - Show all settings

6 - Test Instrument
Select the proper transmission speed, the
speed is as a standard set to 9600 bps. This
setting might be set differently, if no response
from the instrument when pressing the ENTER
button on the keyboard try a different transmission speed.
If contact is established with the display the above shown menu will appear on your computer
screen.
5.1 Input device
With the given options the OMC-138 can be
set to customers needs.
If "Select input device" is selected the menu
on the right will appear on the screen. The
menu shows the actual setting (astrixs in front
of the option) and it shows the options that are
not available because they were not ordered.
That option are followed by the word disabled.
In the menu shown on the right the vector
sensors are selected as input.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Instument input device
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet equipment
2 * Vector wind sensor
3 - Gill wind sensor [disabled].
4 - Irdam wind sensor [disabled].
5 - NMEA input message [disabled].
6 - Young input message [disabled]
7 - Change baudrate CL/RS422 [300]
Select option :

Page 12

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

5.2 Vector range settings


If the vector sensor is selected a new window
will open. This window is shown on the right.
In this window the scaling values for the vector
instruments can be set.
Due to the fact that the vector wind-direction
sensor is using a potmeter the start and end
value can be set. For wind-speed the vector
sensor is using pulse signal. With option 3 the
value for every pulse can be set.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Vector range settings
0 - menu back
1 - Wind direction min. value [1.875]
2 - Wind direction max. value [358.125]
3 - Wind speed m/s / pulse [1.25]
Select option :

5.3 Instrument output device


The OMC-138 has several output possibilities.
All those possibilities needs to be set to
customers needs.
The output possibilities are. the analogue
outputs, the RS232 output and the CL/RS422
output.
For the analogue output the range can be set
as well for speed as for direction.
For the serial outputs (RS232 and CL/RS422)
the format of the output message and the
transmission speed can be set.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Instrument output device
0 - menu back
1 - Analog output
2 - RS232 output
3 - CL/RS422 output
Select option :

Page 13

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

5.4 Analogue output range settings


The OMC-138 provides two analogue output.
This outputs are optional. There are two
outputs one for the windspeed and one for
winddirection. With jumper settings on the
middle pcb if is possible to select current or
voltage. See paragraph 3.2.1
The scaling can be set with the menu shown
on the right. The actual settings are set to
0...360 degrees and 0...40 m/s over the full
output swing of the current or voltage signal.
The user can change this to meet his
requirements.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Analog output range settings
0 - menu back
1 - Range wind direction [360]
2 - Range wind speed [40]
Select option :

5.5 RS232 output settings


The 9-pin connector on the rear of the
instrument can be used to program the
instrument but can also be used to output
messages. (optional) With the menu shown on
the right it is possible to select the format of
the message.
Option 1 will output the message as received
from the wind sensor.
With option 1 it is possible to have the
Obsermet windsensor message as output
when a different windsensor is used for input.
On the daisy chain the (option 2) the message
is transmitted as received from the
windsensor.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
RS232 output settings
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet OMC-160 format [disabled]
2 - Obsermet OMC-160 format with dimmer
3 - Daisy chain [disabled]
4 - NMEA knots [disabled]
5 - NMEA m/s [disabled]
6 * No output
7 - Change baudrate [9600]
Select option :

Page 14

Obsermet division
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port
The communication speed of the RS232 port
can be set to one of the shown speeds.
Make a selection by typing the number in front
of the required speed and press the enter
button.
Change the communication speed of the
device which you are using for further
communication otherwise communication is not
possible anymore.

OMC-138/139 Manual

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Baudrate RS232 port
0 - menu back
1 - 300 baud
2 - 1200 baud
3 - 2400 baud
4 - 4800 baud
5 * 9600 baud
Select option :

5.7 Currentloop/RS422 output settings


In this menu it is possible to select what
message is transmitted on the
currentloop/RS422 output, also the
transmission speed can be set.
If the transmission speed is changed the input
speed will also changed. This will not be
possible is the OMC-160 wind sensor is used.
This sensor is transmitting data with a speed
of 300 bps en this can not be changed.
Option 1 will output the message as received
from the wind sensor.
With option 1 it is possible to have the
Obsermet windsensor message as output
when a different windsensor is used.
On the daisy chain the (option 2) the message
is transmitted as received from the
windsensor.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Currentloop / RS422 output settings
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet OMC-160 format.
2 * Daisy chain
3 - NMEA knots [disabled]
4 - NMEA m/s [disabled]
5 - No output
6 - Change baudrate [300]
Select option :

Page 15

Obsermet division
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422
If the transmission speed must be changed
and option 6 is selected the menu on the right
is shown.

OMC-138/139 Manual

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Baudrate currentloop /RS422 port

Select one of the numbers to change the


transmission speed on the currentloop and or
the RS422 output.

Beware of the fact that changing the speed of


the currentloop/RS422 output will also effect
the input. which is not allowed when an
Obsermet windsensor is used.

0 - menu back
1 - 300 baud
2 - 1200 baud
3 * 2400 baud
4 - 4800 baud
5 - 9600 baud
Select option :

5.9 Averaging of channels


On the front of the display a selection can be
made for the averaging of the wind
information. A choice can be made between 2
minutes, 10 minutes and user select. With the
menu shown the user select parameters can
be filled-in.
4. Average time of the analogue output for
wind speed and direction can be set.
1. Direction is the average time for the actual
direction indication. (red circle)
2. Variation direction is the average time for
the variation direction indication. (Yellow circle)
3. Speed is the average time for the speed
display.
6. The analogue output average time can be
set here.
Maximum wind speed (Gust) reset time can be
set. If this is set to zero the maximum wind
speed must be reset manually on the front
panel. Maximum time setting is 600 seconds.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Averaging of channels
0 - menu back
1 - Direction [0]
2 - Variation direction [0]
3 - Speed [0]
4 - Analog output direction [60]
5 - Analog output speed [60]
6 - Max wind speed reset [600]
Select option :
Enter new value : 60

Page 16

Obsermet division

OMC-138/139 Manual

5.10 Device options


If possible with the existing hardware it is
possible to change the software to customers
specification. Those options can than be
selected in the menu "Device options".
The option "Dim on distance" provide the
possibility to adjust the brightness of the
display on remote location. A push button must
be connected to the pulse input normally used
for pulsed wind speed information.
A windsensor with a pulse output can not be
used anymore.

OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
Device options
0 - menu back
1 - Dim on distance [disabled]
2 - Deviation [355]

The option "Deviation" is used to add an offset


to the wind sensor measured value.
5.11 Show all settings

OMC 138/139 Obsermet Wind display unit


Software version 1.5
Serial nr. : 00000000
Input device

: Vector Wind direction min


: Wind direction max.
: Wind speed m/s / pulse

RS232 output
RS232 Baudrate
Currentloop / Rs422 output
Currentloop / RS422 Baudrate
Analog output range direction
Analog output range speed

:
:
:
:
:
:

not in use
9600 baud
Daisy chain
2400 baud
360
40

Average direction
Average speed
Average analog out direction
Max wind speed reset time

:
:
:
:

60
60
60
60

Deviation

: 350

: 1.875
: 358.125
: 1.25

Average variation direction

: 60

Average analog out speed

: 60

Press a key

When this option is selected the above shown screen is displayed showing all the settings

Page 17

Operating instructions

OMC-138/139 Display

Average wind variation

Average interval
time window

Average wind direction


Average wind speed

Unit selection
Window

Arrow down button


Arrow up button
Menu button

Gust display
Display indication
LEDs

On the front panel of the display are 3 pushbuttons. Menu, arrow up & arrow
down .

Brightness control:
- Adjust the brightness with the arrow up & arrow down buttons.

Min-Max indication:
-

Press the Menu button


The max LED starts flashing
The display will show the minimum over the selected interval
After 30s the displays will switch back to the Max wind speed.

Average interval setting:


-

Press Menu button twice


The LED in the Average interval window will start flashing.
Select the interval with the arrow up & arrow down buttons

Unit selection:
-

Press the Menu button 3 times.


The LED in the Unit selection window will start flashing.
Select the unit with the arrow up & arrow down buttons.

Gust display reset (only when in user average mode):


- Press Menu & arrow down button at the same time.

LED test:
- Press both arrow buttons at the same time.
When the buttons are not touched for 5 seconds, the display will return to normal
operation mode.

User Manual
for
MRUs

This document contains the complete manual:


Seatex MRU, Users Manual, rev 8, issued 2004-10-21 by Seatex AS, Trondheim

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-651002-01MU

Unrestricted

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

Blank page

Document No.

Security Classification:

Issue No.

Page

CAA-651002-01MU

Unrestricted

2007 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund


The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.

Seatex MRU
User's Manual

Issued: 2004-10-21

Blank page

Notice

All rights reserved. Reproduction of any of this manual in any form whatsoever without
prior written permission from Kongsberg Seatex AS is forbidden.

The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.

All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual.
However, should any errors be detected, Kongsberg Seatex AS would greatly appreciate
being informed of them.

The above notwithstanding, Kongsberg Seatex AS can assume no responsibility for any
errors in this manual or their consequences.
Copyright 2004 by Kongsberg Seatex AS. All rights reserved.

Kongsberg Seatex AS
Pirsenteret, N-7462 Trondheim, Norway
Telephone: +47 73 54 55 00
Facsimile: +47 73 51 50 20
Duty phone: +47 73 50 21 11
E-mail: firmapost@kongsberg-seatex.no
www.kongsberg.com

III

Blank page

IV

Revision log
Document ID
MRU-D-001

Rev.

Date

Reason for revision

1997-08-28

First version of the renewed manual

FOS

1998-03-20

Minor corrections

FOS

1999-01-15

Updated with latest sales and


warranty conditions and minor
corrections

FOS

1999-11-02

Updated to correspond with MRU


FOS
300 version and the third generation
of the hardware

2001-03-12

Updated with latest specifications

2001-11-17

Corrected sign on analog PitchHippy FOS


signal and updated to correspond
with Windows version of MRC

2002-11-12

Updated with latest specifications

FOS

2004-06-24

Description of the MRU D and Z


models. Updated specification on
MRU 4 and H

FOS

2004-10-21

Updated specifications on the


models MRU 4, H, Z, 2 and D

FOS

9
10
11

Approved
(sign)

FOS

Blank page

VI

Table of contents
1.

INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 About this manual ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 References .................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms..................................................................... 2
1.3.1 Definitions .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2 Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 3

2.

TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 5


2.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Health, environment and safety ................................................................................... 7
2.3 Restrictions in guarantee.............................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 Mechanical shock and improper transportation ................................................. 7
2.3.2 Wrong electrical connection, fusing of the power supply .................................. 8
2.4 Performance data.......................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 MRU 6 specification........................................................................................... 8
2.4.2 MRU 5 specification......................................................................................... 10
2.4.3 MRU 4 specification......................................................................................... 12
2.4.4 MRU H specification........................................................................................ 15
2.4.5 MRU Z specification ........................................................................................ 17
2.4.6 MRU 2 specification......................................................................................... 19
2.4.7 MRU D specification........................................................................................ 20
2.4.8 MRU 1 specification......................................................................................... 22
2.5 Restrictions in use ...................................................................................................... 23
2.6 Physical dimensions................................................................................................... 24
2.7 Power ......................................................................................................................... 24
2.8 Environmental specification ...................................................................................... 24
2.9 Other data................................................................................................................... 25

3.

INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 27

4.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION...................................................................................... 29
4.1 Design principles........................................................................................................ 29
4.1.1 Six degrees of freedom motion......................................................................... 29
4.1.2 Gravity erection of orientation ......................................................................... 31
4.1.3 How to compute velocity/position.................................................................... 33
4.1.4 Magnetic north seeking .................................................................................... 35
4.1.5 Magnetic disturbances ...................................................................................... 36
4.1.6 Frames for measurements of motion entities.................................................... 36
4.1.6.1 Definition of frames and variables ..................................................... 37
4.1.6.2 Used reference frames ........................................................................ 39
4.2 Construction ............................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 Internal sensors ................................................................................................. 43
VII

4.2.1.1 The angular rate sensors ..................................................................... 43


4.2.1.2 The accelerometers............................................................................. 44
4.2.1.3 The magnetometer .............................................................................. 45
4.2.2 Sensor calibration procedure ............................................................................ 46
4.2.2.1 MRU calibration certificate................................................................ 46
4.2.3 Processing algorithms....................................................................................... 48
4.2.3.1 Computation of orientation ................................................................ 49
4.2.3.2 Magnetic heading estimation.............................................................. 53
4.2.3.3 Linear motion computation ................................................................ 54
4.2.3.4 Internal processing and I/O delays ..................................................... 60
4.2.3.5 Electronics and mechanics ................................................................. 63
5.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................... 65


5.1 Start procedure ........................................................................................................... 65
5.2 Operation.................................................................................................................... 65
5.3 Stop procedure ........................................................................................................... 66
5.4 Performance monitoring ............................................................................................ 66

6.

MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................ 67
6.1 Periodic maintenance ................................................................................................. 67
6.1.1 Software upgrades ............................................................................................ 67
6.1.2 Changing the internal lithium battery............................................................... 68
6.1.3 Recalibration..................................................................................................... 68
6.2 Repairs and modifications.......................................................................................... 68
6.2.1 Repair of the MRU ........................................................................................... 69
6.2.1.1 Installing a spare unit ......................................................................... 69
6.2.2 Repair of the MRU Junction Box ..................................................................... 70
6.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 70
6.3.1 No contact with the MRU................................................................................. 70
6.3.2 MRU status: Abnormal..................................................................................... 71
6.3.3 MRU status: Unreliable data or not ready........................................................ 72
6.3.4 Large oscillations in the roll and pitch measurements ..................................... 72
6.3.5 Reduced roll or pitch performance ................................................................... 72
6.3.6 Reduced heave performance............................................................................. 73

7.

DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 75

8.

PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................... 77

9.

APPENDIX A - ARRIVAL CHECK AND TEST OF THE MRU ............................. 79

10. APPENDIX B - STATUS MESSAGES FROM MRU ................................................. 83


11. APPENDIX C - MRU STATUS BITS........................................................................... 85
12. APPENDIX D - MRU EVENT NUMBERS.................................................................. 87
13. APPENDIX E - MRU HW REPORT STATUS BITS ................................................. 89
Index ........................................................................................................................................ 91
VIII

Reader's comments ................................................................................................................ 93

List of illustrations
Figure 1 MRU 6 functional modules........................................................................................ 8
Figure 2 MRU 5 functional modules...................................................................................... 11
Figure 3 MRU 4 functional modules...................................................................................... 13
Figure 4 MRU H functional modules..................................................................................... 15
Figure 5 MRU Z functional modules ..................................................................................... 17
Figure 6 MRU 2 functional modules...................................................................................... 19
Figure 7 The MRU-D functional modules ............................................................................. 21
Figure 8 MRU 1 functional modules...................................................................................... 22
Figure 9 Rigid body motion ................................................................................................... 29
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer........................................... 31
Figure 11 A single axis rate gyro based device...................................................................... 32
Figure 12 Computation of velocity/position .......................................................................... 34
Figure 13 Magnetic north seeking.......................................................................................... 35
Figure 14 Right oriented frame .............................................................................................. 37
Figure 15 Geographic frame and body frame ........................................................................ 38
Figure 16 Body/vehicle frame definition ............................................................................... 39
Figure 17 Overview of used frames ....................................................................................... 40
Figure 18 MRU 6 functional modules.................................................................................... 41
Figure 19 MRU 6 mechanical layout ..................................................................................... 42
Figure 20 The Coriolis force rate gyro function .................................................................... 44
Figure 21 The pendulum accelerometer construction ............................................................ 45
Figure 22 The Calibration Certificate for an MRU 6............................................................. 47
Figure 23 The magnetic heading estimation process ............................................................. 54
Figure 24 Relative heave residual in percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20
seconds .................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and
20 seconds ............................................................................................................. 58
Figure 26 Relative heave residual as percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with average heave period set to 10 seconds with various damping factors
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 and 0.9 ........................................................................................ 59
Figure 27 Selection of program mode to install..................................................................... 80
Figure 28 MRC Installation Complete ................................................................................... 80
Figure 29 MRU Configuration Window ................................................................................ 81

IX

Blank page

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Introduction

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1

About this manual

This is a compilation of information on the MRU products released for the user. The manual
is organised into the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Introduction - A brief presentation of this manual with references and
abbreviations.
Chapter 2 Technical data - Presents the technical data of the various MRU models, their
physical dimensions, required power and environment specifications, together
with restrictions in guarantee.
Chapter 3 Installation - Refers to the Installation Manual for the appropriate model
number.
Chapter 4 Technical description - An in-depth description of the design principles and
construction of the MRU. This chapter should be read before the MRU is used in
a new application.
Chapter 5 Operation instructions - Describes the start-up of the MRU, its operation and
how to monitor the performance of the unit.
Chapter 6 Maintenance - Presents how the MRU is to be repaired and serviced with
detailed description on how to troubleshoot the product.
Chapter 7 Drawings - Refers to the Installation Manual for the correct model number.
Chapter 8 Parts list - Lists the parts in the basic delivery and the additional equipment.
In this manual the following remarks are used:
CAUTION

Is used to make the user aware of procedures and operational practice which, if not
followed, may result in degraded performance or damage to the equipment.
Note

A note text has this format and is used to draw the user's attention to special
features or behaviour of the equipment.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

1.2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

Introduction

References
General Conditions for the Supply of Products, Orgalime S 2000 with one exception
sheet
MRU-D-091 Installation Manual, MRU 2, rev. 8
MRU-D-092 Installation Manual, MRU 5 & H, rev. 8
MRU-D-093 Installation Manual, MRU 6 & 4, rev. 8
MRU-D-094 Installation Manual, MRU 3 & 1, rev. 7
MRU-D-119 Installation Manual, MRU D & Z, rev. 0
MRU-D-011 Delivery Specific Documents, rev. 2

1.3

Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms

1.3.1

Definitions

alignment

Is the process of adjusting the current internal navigation


frame (g, h or b-frame) in the instrument to the true external
frame.

attitude

The orientation relative to the vertical axis of a vehicle.


Heading is not included. If heading is included, the word
orientation for the vehicle is used.

fluxgate

A sensor for magnetic fields based on chopping of field to be


measured by the use of time-varying magnetic permeability.

heading

The direction of the main axis (bow direction) of the vehicle


as opposed to course which is the direction of motion of the
vehicle. Heading has the measurement range 0 to 360, while
yaw is defined as an angle with measurement range 180.

heave

The vertical dynamic motion of a vehicle and defined


positive down. Heave position and velocity are dynamic
motion variables with a certain lower cutoff frequency.

inclinometer

A sensor measuring roll and pitch by measurement of the


direction of the acceleration. Inclinometers only provide
correct readings when there is no horizontal acceleration of
the vehicle.

pitch

A rotation about the pitch axis and defined positive when the
bow moves up. Normally pitch means the dynamic pitch
angle motion.

roll

A rotation about the roll axis and defined positive when


starboard side of the vehicle moves down. Normally roll
means the dynamic roll angle motion.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Introduction

starboard

When looking in the bow direction of a vehicle this is the


right hand side of the vehicle.

strap down

This means that the inertial sensors are fixed to the vehicle or
sensor instead of fixed to a turnable mechanical platform.

surge

The linear dynamic motion of a vehicle in the heading


direction (along the R-axis, but horizontal) and defined
positive for a forward motion.

sway

The sideways dynamic linear motion of a vehicle (along the


P-axis, but horizontal) and defined positive for a motion to
starboard.

yaw

A rotation about the vertical axis and defined positive when


turning eastward when the vehicle cruises in north direction.
Normally yaw means the dynamic yaw motion.

1.3.2

Abbreviations and acronyms

AHRS
b-frame
CG
EMI
HPR-system
g-frame
h-frame

INS
MP
MRC

Attitude & Heading Reference System. An inertial system measuring the


orientation of a vehicle.
Body frame. An orthogonal frame fixed to the MRU housing or to the
vehicle where the MRU is fixed.
Centre of gravity. The mass centre of a vessel. This is normally the location
with least linear acceleration, and hence the best location for measurements
of roll and pitch.
Electromagnetic interference.
Hydro Acoustic Positioning Reference System.
Geographic frame. An orthogonal frame having axes pointing north, east
and down at the current location of the vehicle.
Heading frame. This frame has common D-axis with the g-frame, but the
forward and starboard axes are turned the heading angle according to the
north and east axes. The forward and starboard axes are in the horizontal
plane.
Inertial Navigation System. A system consisting of gyros and
accelerometers intended for navigational purposes. These systems are
equipped with high performance gyros.
Measurement Point.
Special software delivered with all MRU units. Running on a PC under
Microsoft Windows. With this software the user can set up the MRU
according to his application by use of the delivered configuration cable. The
MRC software is used to change the configuration parameters, to check the
internal status, etc.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

MRU
NMEA
P-axis
RMS
R-axis
ROV
Tesla
Y-axis

Introduction

Motion Reference Unit. This is a unit measuring dynamic linear motion and
attitude.
A standard for interchange of information between navigation equipment.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the starboard direction
horizontally when the roll angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the bow of the vehicle is moving up.
Root mean square.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the forward direction
horizontally when the pitch angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the starboard side of the vehicle is moving down.
Remotely Operated (underwater) Vehicle.
Unit for magnetic field strength.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the downward direction when
the vehicle is aligned horizontally. Positive rotation about this axis is
turning the bow of the vehicle to starboard.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

2.

TECHNICAL DATA

2.1

General

The MRU products are supplied in a range of models from MRU 1 to MRU 6 as the top
performance model. The capabilities of the various models are:

MRU 6
MRU 5
MRU 4
MRU H
MRU Z
MRU 2
MRU D
MRU 1

Roll/pitch

Heading

Heave

0.02
0.02
0.05
0.05
0.15
0.15
0.35

1.0

5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm

1.2

Acceleration
[m/s2]
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.01

The top model MRU 6 is an inertial attitude and heading reference system (AHRS) with a
dynamic linear motion measurement capability included. The Seatex MRU 6 is primarily
intended for medium accuracy measurement of motion in marine applications where a long
lifetime and no regular maintenance is important. The MRU is not equivalent to a high
performance gyro platform or laser-gyro-based device, but it can compete with low-cost
"strap-down" rate gyro based AHRS.
Internally, the computing algorithms are designed as a "strap down" inertial navigation
system. The unit has a higher performance than simpler devices because it contains 3-axis
angular rate sensors and 3-axis acceleration sensors. The MRU performance in the heave
channel competes with expensive gyro platforms, while the performance in the horizontal
directions is only suitable to measure rather fast motions. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The MRU 6 outputs absolute roll, pitch and yaw (heading), and relative heave (dynamic).
Acceleration and velocity of the linear motions, as well as angular acceleration and velocity,
are also outputs from the MRU 6 unit. The MRU computes relative (dynamic) surge and sway
motions and the velocities and accelerations of these variables. Performance data of the MRU
6 and the other models are described in chapter 2.4.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

The MRU sensors can be supplied in a variety of performances and prices to meet the
customer's needs. The table below shows the various performances in relation to the MRU 6.
Overview of capabilities of MRU models
MRU 6

MRU 5

MRU 4

MRU H

MRU Z

MRU 2

MRU D

MRU 1

3
3
Yes

3
3
No

3
3
Yes

3
3
No

3
3
No

2
2
No

2
2
No

1
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
No
Yes

No
No
Yes

No
No
Yes

No
No
No

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Outputs:
Roll and pitch angles
Magnetic heading, static
Heading angle, dynamic only
Roll and pitch angular velocity
Magnetic field in g-frame
Magnetic field in b-frame
Acceleration in b-frame
Heave measurements
Surge and sway measurements

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes

Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes

No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No

Inputs:
Speed log
External heading

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

No
No

No
No

No
No

Interfaces:
Analog channels, 4
Digital RS-232/422 compatible

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Capability
Primary sensors:
Accelerometers
Angular rate sensors
Magnetometer
Functions:
Full "strap down" function
Free mounting orientation
Lever arm corrections
Sensor temperature comp. &
linearisation & orthogonalisation
Built-in self testing

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.2

Technical data

Health, environment and safety

Operation or troubleshooting of MRU equipment will not imply any risk for heavy lift, high
voltages, explosions or exposure to gas. The MRU complies with IEC 950/EN60950
standards regarding fire, mechanical and heat hazards, radiation and chemical hazards.

2.3

Restrictions in guarantee

The liability of Seatex is limited to repair of MRUs only under the terms and conditions stated
in reference [1] and excludes consequential damages such as customer's loss of profit or
damage to other systems traceable back to MRU malfunction. The warranty does not cover
malfunctions of the MRU resulting from the following conditions:
a) The MRU is not shipped in the original transport boxes.
b) The MRU has been exposed to extreme shock and vibrations.
c) The MRU housing has been opened by the customer in an attempt to carry out repair
work.
d) Over-voltage or incorrect power connection.
2.3.1

Mechanical shock and improper transportation

Whilst the MRU is designed to be very robust, it is nevertheless an accurate measurement


system and contains a number of relatively fragile components. For reliable performance and
long life the MRU should be protected at all times from excessive mechanical shock. The unit
can tolerate mechanical shocks up to 100 g. However, this limit can easily be exceeded if, for
example, the unit is dropped. In some applications extra shock damping may be needed. The
MRU is delivered in a specially designed transportation box which should be kept in store by
the customer. Always use this box for transportation and storage of the MRU because the
warranty does not apply unless the specified box is used for transportation.

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.3.2

Technical data

Wrong electrical connection, fusing of the power supply

Permanent damage to the MRU may occur if power is applied to signal pins or the unit is
exposed to over-voltage. Maximum allowed voltage to the MRU is 30 Volts.
Hence, it is imperative that the power connection is always checked whenever new cables and
connectors are used. This can be done by measuring the DC power voltage at the MRU
connector before connecting the MRU. The warranty does not cover burnt out power or signal
I/O circuits. The MRU must be protected by an external fast fuse rated at 1 A or a power
supply with a current limit must be used. The MRU will short circuit a reversed polarity
power supply and blow this fuse without damage to the unit. If such a fuse is not used, the
internal power supply will burn out and the MRU will be permanently damaged.

2.4

Performance data

2.4.1

MRU 6 specification

Function
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw with magnetic north seeking together with relative
dynamic heave, surge and sway measurements. It has accurate measurements of roll, pitch
and heave at high horizontal accelerations. Use of the built-in magnetic north sensor or an
external heading input provides a precise estimation of the angular yaw rate error and the
availability of heading information output at high data rate. The MRU can operate through
360 degrees in all axes.

Figure 1 MRU 6 functional modules

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Typical applications are sonar compensation of orientation and heave on ROVs and ships that
require absolute north information, motion sensor for motion control and damping systems for
high speed vessels and advanced ocean wave measurement systems with north information.
Variables Output from the MRU 6
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to
the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit outputs
relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway positions, velocities and accelerations in adjustable
frames. The MRU 6 provides a magnetic field in the fixed vehicle frame or geographic frame.
Variables Input to the MRU 6
The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 6 via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................150/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.3 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ................ 1 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): .............................................. 0.020 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.15% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Heave Motion Output


Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Magnetic Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Magnetic sensor input range: ................................................................................... 100 Tesla
Magnetometer resolution (all axes):........................................................................... <10 nTesla
Magnetic sensor noise1:...................................................................................... 0.1 Tesla RMS
Magnetic sensor scale factor error: .............................................................................0.5% RMS
Magnetic signature (at 1 m distance, worst direction typical 10 nTesla): ................. <50 nTesla
Magnetic Output
3-axis terrestrial field in the fixed vehicle or geographic frame: ............................. 100 Tesla
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.2

MRU 5 specification

Function
The MRU 5 is the same as the MRU 6 except that it contains no magnetic sensor. The MRU
unit provides no absolute north information and the measurement drifts slowly in yaw, except
when external heading is input to the MRU 5.

10

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Figure 2 MRU 5 functional modules


Typical applications are roll, pitch and heave compensation of multi-beam echo sounders on
ROVs and ships for seabed mapping, heave compensation of offshore cranes, dynamic motion
monitoring of roll, pitch angles and linear accelerations on offshore structures and platforms
and roll, pitch and heave measurements for use in dynamic positioning systems.
Variables Output from the MRU 5
The MRU 5 outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to
the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit outputs
relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway positions, velocities and accelerations in adjustable
frames.
Variables Input to the MRU 5
The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 5 via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................150/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001

11

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): .............................................. 0.020 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.15% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.3

MRU 4 specification

Function
The MRU 4 is built the same way as the MRU 6 but utilises a different type of angular rate
sensors. The MRU 4 is specially designed to accurately measure roll, pitch and heave together
with magnetic heading in environments with extreme horizontal accelerations.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and accelerations.

12

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Figure 3 MRU 4 functional modules


The MRU 4 is an ideal sensor for orientation and heave measurements of oceanographic
buoys, tow-fish and ROVs.
Variables Output from the MRU 4
The MRU 4 outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to
the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit outputs
relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway positions, velocities and accelerations in adjustable
frames. The MRU 4 provides a magnetic field in the fixed vehicle frame or geographic frame.

Variables Input to the MRU 4


The unit may be integrated with external input of speed log and heading from an external
gyro compass. Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 4 via the RS-232
interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................100/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001

13

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:...........................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ........................................................................................ 0.04 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.5 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ............. 1.2 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.05 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.2% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Magnetic Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Magnetic sensor input range: ................................................................................... 100 Tesla
Magnetometer resolution (all axes):........................................................................... <10 nTesla
Magnetic sensor noise1:...................................................................................... 0.1 Tesla RMS
Magnetic sensor scale factor error: .............................................................................0.5% RMS
Magnetic signature (at 1 m distance, worst direction typical 10 nTesla): ................. <50 nTesla
Magnetic Output
3-axis terrestrial field in the fixed vehicle or geographic frame: ............................. 100 Tesla
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.

14

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.4.4

Technical data

MRU H specification

Function
The MRU H is constructed in the same way as the MRU 5 but utilises a different type of
angular rate sensors. The MRU H is specially designed for motion measurements in marine
applications requiring highly accurate heave measurements in environments with extreme
horizontal accelerations.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.

Figure 4 MRU H functional modules


The MRU H is an ideal sensor for roll, pitch and heave compensation of echo sounders and
sonars. The MRU H can also be used on typical ship motions monitoring applications such as
hull stress monitoring, voyage recording, helideck motion monitoring, as well as with
dynamic positioning systems.
Variables Output from the MRU H
The MRU H outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed
to the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit
outputs relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway-positions, velocities and accelerations in
adjustable frames.

15

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Variables Input to the MRU H


The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU H via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................100/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:...........................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ........................................................................................ 0.04 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.05 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.2% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.

16

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.4.5

Technical data

MRU Z specification

Function
The MRU Z is constructed in the same way as the MRU H but utilises a different type of
linear accelerometers. The limitation compared to an MRU H is that the MRU Z can only be
mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship and that is with the connector pointing
down. The cost-effective MRU Z model is specially designed for use in marine applications
and is the ideal sensor for heave compensation of echo sounders. The unit incorporates 3-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.

Figure 5 MRU Z functional modules


Variables Output from the MRU Z
The MRU Z outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed
to the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit
outputs relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway-positions, velocities and accelerations in
adjustable frames.

17

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Variables Input to the MRU Z


The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU Z via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ....................................................................................................45
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................100/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:...........................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: .......................................................................................... 0.1 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.15 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.4% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 40 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: .............................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.05 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ...........................................................................................................1% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy (RMS):.......................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
Settling time in heave to obtain full accuracy (from power on): ...................... Max. 30 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.

18

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.4.6

Technical data

MRU 2 specification

Function
The MRU 2 is specially designed for use in marine applications that require both static and
dynamic roll and pitch measurements. The unit incorporates 2-axis sensors for linear
acceleration and angular rate. The limitation compared to an MRU H which has 3-axis
angular rate and acceleration measurements, is that the MRU 2 is not capable of measuring
heave and can only be mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship. The MRU 2
achieves high reliability by using sensors with no rotational or mechanical wear-out parts.

Figure 6 MRU 2 functional modules


Typical applications for an MRU 2 are roll and pitch measurements for use within voyage
recording and dynamic positioning systems, and for antenna compensation.
Variables Output from the MRU 2
The MRU 2 outputs roll and pitch angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to the
vehicle frame. The unit outputs relative (dynamic) surge and sway velocities and
accelerations.
Variables Input to the MRU 2
An external one second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin or the AUX3
line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical
from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).

19

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Angular Rate Sensors


Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 2
Angular orientation range: ....................................................................................................25
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................100/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch: ...................................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: .......................................................................................... 0.1 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.15 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.4% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 2
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 40 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: .............................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.05 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ...........................................................................................................1% RMS
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.7

MRU D specification

Function
The cost-effective MRU D model is specially designed for use in marine applications and is
the ideal sensor for roll and pitch measurements on board ships. The unit incorporates 2-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate. This unit achieves high reliability by using solid state sensors with no rotational or
mechanical wear-out parts.
This unit has to be mounted in a fixed direction relative to the ship and is best suited for
applications with limited range in roll and pitch. If unlimited mounting orientation and/or
unlimited mounting range is required we recommend one of the MRU models with sensors in
all three axis.

20

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Figure 7 The MRU-D functional modules


Typical applications for this MRU D model are roll and pitch measurements for use within
voyage recording and dynamic positioning systems, and for antenna compensation.
Variables Output from the MRU D
The MRU D outputs roll and pitch angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to the
vehicle frame. The unit outputs relative (dynamic) surge and sway velocities and
accelerations.
Variables Input to the MRU D
An external one second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin to enable
complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical from a GPS
system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 2
Angular orientation range: ....................................................................................................25
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................200/s
Resolution in all axes: ..........................................................................................................0.01
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch: ...................................................................................0.5/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: .......................................................................................... 0.3 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.35 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 15 amplitude): .............................................. 0.45 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.8% RMS

21

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 2
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 40 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: .............................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.05 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ...........................................................................................................1% RMS
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.8

MRU 1 specification

Function
The MRU 1 is a single axis motion sensor with the same external housing, signal processing
electronics and power supply as the MRU 6. This unit measures linear acceleration in one
axis by use of a high quality servo accelerometer. The MRU 1 is capable of synchronising and
time-tagging data to a master system. The MRU 1 has the same thermal accelerometer
modelling and calibration as found in the other MRU models.

Figure 8 MRU 1 functional modules

22

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

The MRU 1 is the ideal sensor for accurate measurement of vertical and transverse motion.
The sensor is specifically designed for measuring accelerations on board ships or in offshore
structures.
Variables Output from the MRU 1
The MRU 1 outputs linear acceleration in one axis, the Y-axis.
Variables Input to the MRU 1
An external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN line to enable
complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical from a GPS
system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:...............................................................................................................None
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 1
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Sensitive axis:.................................................. Y-axis, along length direction of MRU cylinder.
Vibration lowpass filtering (2 order LP-filter):................................... Adjustable, 0.01 to 25 Hz
Period range for integration: ...........................................................................................1 to 25 s
Internal Processing
Internal sample rate at accelerometer:......................................400 kHz (aliasing free sampling)
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.

2.5

Restrictions in use

The MRU models are designed for marine applications with a linear acceleration less than
30 m/s2 (3g) and an angular rate range less than 150/s. Only relative dynamic position,
velocity and acceleration are available from the models. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The linear motion measurements are limited by the selection of their motion periods available
in the range 1 to 25 seconds.
Note

Even though the dynamic measurement range of the MRU 5 and H models is
unlimited, the static measurement range is limited to maximum 45. If this limit
is exceeded, an instability may occur. This restriction in use can be avoided by
23

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

inputting external heading information to these models. The same restriction in


use will occur on the MRU 6 and 4 models if the fluxgate usage is disabled and no
external heading information is sent to the unit.

2.6

Physical dimensions

MRU 1, 2, H, 4, 5 and 6 models


Height:............................................................................................................................. 204 mm
Diameter:......................................................................................................................... 105 mm
Weight: ............................................................................................................................... 2.5 kg
Colour:...................................................................................................................................Blue
MRU D and Z models
Height:............................................................................................................................. 129 mm
Diameter:......................................................................................................................... 105 mm
Weight: ............................................................................................................................... 1.5 kg
Colour:...................................................................................................................................Blue

2.7

Power

Voltage input:....................................................................................................12 to 30 Volt DC


Recommended voltage: ..............................................................................................24 Volt DC
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (power up surge):................................Max. 11 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (max. at -5C operation temp): ...................... 9 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (max. at +50C operation temp. or above): ... 5 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 4, H, 3, 2 & 1 models: .................................................Max. 6 Watts
Power consumption, MRU D & Z models:.............................................................Max. 3 Watts
Power rise speed:........................................................................................................ Not critical
Batteries: ...................................................................... None, connection to UPS recommended

2.8

Environmental specification

All MRU models


Enclosure material:......................................................................................Anodised aluminium
Enclosure protection: .......................................................................................................... IP-66
Operating temp. range:...............................................................................................-5 to +55C
Operating humidity: ............................................................................................ Sealed, no limit
Storage temp. range:.................................................................................................-20 to +70C
Storage humidity: ................................................................................................ Sealed, no limit
Max. allowed vibration operational (10 - 2000 Hz continuous): .................................... 0.5 m/s2
Max. allowed vibration non operational (0 - 2000 Hz continuous): ................................ 20 m/s2
Max. shock non operational (10 ms peak): .................................................................. 1000 m/s2

24

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

2.9

Technical data

Other data

Digital I/O Protocol


No. of output serial lines: ......................................................................One, RS-232 compatible
Max. no of output variables: .................................................................................................... 16
Max. output data rate: .......................................................................................................100 Hz
Data delay:.........................................................................Typical 9 ms plus transmission delay
Data out: ............................................... By request from host computer or cyclic output of data
No. of input serial lines: ..................................................................... Three, RS-232 compatible
Digital RS-232 Interface
The digital interface is shared between the setup/configuration and general data output. The
digital interface can be used independent of the analog interface.
Digital output:
Digital input:
Baud rate:
Drive length:

RS-232 compatible, but high current drive capability. Ground common to


the MRU communication ground. Galvanically isolated from electronics.
RS-232 compatible, ground can be used differentially. Galvanically isolated
from electronics.
Software adjustable 1200 - 57600 baud 8 bits, no handshake, adjustable
parity.
The RS-232 drive length can be increased to 1 km by the use of a special
RS-232 enhancer at the cable end opposite to the MRU. Max. baud rate at 1
km is 9600 baud.

Analog Data Out


No. of channels:.......................................................................................................................... 4
Range:.....................................................................10V, 0 to 10V, 5V DC, 14 bits resolution
Absolute accuracy: .........................................................................................<0.1% of full scale
Output data rate: ................................................................................................................100 Hz
Data delay:............................................................................................................ Typical 7.5 ms
Electrical data:........................................................................................ Output resistance 100
Max. external load:...................................................................... 10k (1M for full accuracy)
Other
Internal lithium battery life: ..........................................................................................>10 years
MTBF (computed): ......................................................................................................... 50000 h
Connector: .................................................................................... Souriau 851-36RG 16-26 S50

25

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical data

Blank page

26

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

3.

Installation

INSTALLATION

For description of installation of the MRU, please see the Installation Manual for your MRU
model number, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6].

27

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Installation

Blank page

28

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

4.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

4.1

Design principles

This chapter covers basic properties of inertial motion measurement and explains how the
Seatex MRU models are functioning. It also defines the basic principles required to
understand the function of motion measurement devices.
4.1.1

Six degrees of freedom motion

A free moving body or vehicle has six independent degrees of freedom which may be
quantified as:
a) Linear translations in three perpendicular axes directions (x,y,z below).
b) Rotation about three perpendicular axes (shown below as x,y,z).

Figure 9 Rigid body motion


To obtain full knowledge concerning the state of this body or vehicle we also need to know
the velocities of the six entities above. Twelve totally independent numbers or variables are
needed to describe the full state of a moving stiff body at a given moment. The derivatives of
the velocities are accelerations, and the differentiated angular velocities are angular
accelerations. These six accelerations provide information about the forces acting on the
vehicle and can additionally be of value to the customer's system.

29

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Inertial motion measurement can similarly be divided into the following tasks:
a) Inertial orientation measurements.
b) Inertial linear translation measurements.
Inertial orientation measurement requires a gyro-like device which physically measures
angular acceleration, angular velocity or angular displacements. Some sensors physically
measure angular rate, and integrate the rate over time to compute the angular displacement in
the sensor interface. This allows an angular rate sensor to perform like an angular
displacement sensor.
The inertial linear translation measurement requires acceleration measurement. There exists
no inertial sensor that directly measures the physical linear velocity. Consequently, the linear
motion is integrated over time twice to obtain the translations. This puts high requirements on
the accelerometers. Also, the orientation measurement must be very accurate to alleviate the
unavoidable g-component of the acceleration.
Inertial measurement of linear translations are only useful if the orientation of the body or
vehicle is known (for example if the motion is mechanically constrained in some way), or the
orientation is measured. In most cases, orientation measurement cannot be avoided, even if
only the linear acceleration, velocity and translation are measured.
Variables Output from the MRU and Similar Systems
The theoretical maximum number of variables available from an inertial measurement system
is 18. This includes the six accelerations (3 linear, 3 rotational) resulting from the forces
acting on the body. The other 12 are six velocities (3 linear, 3 rotational) and six
displacements (3 linear, 3 rotational).
Most inertial systems can only output some of these variables because the units are dedicated
to a specific application. The MRU can output all 18 variables mentioned above, with some
limitations:
a) Only dynamic (short-term) changes in velocities and positions can be measured.
b) Only dynamic changes in heading (or rotation about a true vertical axis) can be measured
if magnetic heading cannot be used.
c) The angular accelerations are obtained by numeric differentiation of the angular rates.
There are no separate sensors that measure angular acceleration.
The 18 basic output variables can be represented in several ways that are more or less
equivalent. The user can, in principle, compute all the desired variables from these basic 18
variables.

30

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.1.2

Technical description

Gravity erection of orientation

Most practical Motion Reference Units utilise gravity to locate the vertical direction. The
gravity and the orientation of the system referred to earth down is measured by linear
accelerometers. Since the gravity is a known figure (g = 9.81 m/s2), the measured acceleration
from the accelerometer, a, is used to calculate the orientation of the accelerometer according
to earth down, see the figure below. The orientation angle of the accelerometer according to g
is directly given as:
= arcsin (a/g)
where,
a: measured acceleration by the accelerometer.
g: the gravity.

a
Accelerometer

g
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer
An important feature for such systems is to minimise the sensitivity to the horizontal
accelerations of the ship or vehicle. This is a contradiction because the last accelerations
cannot be separated from the g-vector by an accelerometer. A pure, classical inclinometer
directly measures the total acceleration direction. This results in large inclination errors when
horizontal accelerations are present.
The ideal situation is to utilise a Motion Reference Unit that averages the g-vector over an
extremely long period of time in order to obtain an accurate reading of the vertical direction.
A ship or a vessel will only accelerate for a limited time (except if cruising in circles). The
sensitivity to short term horizontal accelerations is restricted by averaging the gravity over
time. The angular erection to the vertical is calculated in the MRU in a complicated way,
since the calculation is carried out for 3 axes in parallel. The erection is performed through
software in the MRU. Figure 11 shows the principle for a simplified 1-axis MRU like device.
The function is:
a) Angular rate is integrated to roll angle.

31

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

b) Inclination is measured by the use of an accelerometer sensitive in the side direction of


the ship.
c) The roll angle is slowly adjusted from the difference between inclinometer output and
integrated roll rate.

Figure 11 A single axis rate gyro based device


A very small feedback in the controller results in low acceleration sensitivity, but errors in the
angular rate sensors will contribute largely to the error in the roll angle output . The better
the quality of the angular rate sensor and the better estimate errors in the angular rate sensors,
the better the total performance of the system will be. In a device like the MRU advanced
error models are used in order to reduce the errors as much as possible (see chapter 4.2.3 for
more details).
Figure 11 shows how the speedlog subtracts an adjustment on the side acceleration of the ship
to compensate for acceleration set up by the rate of turning at a high speed.

32

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.1.3

Technical description

How to compute velocity/position

Position and velocity are both computed from acceleration in inertial Motion Reference Units.
If the acceleration measurement was infinitely accurate, it would be sufficient to integrate this
measurement twice to obtain the true position. The basic problem is to subtract the gcomponent of the measured acceleration. It is also important to know the orientation of the
gravity force relative to the ship, and not just the magnitude of the gravity.
Angular rate sensors provide the orientation. The angular rate sensing and the accurate
determination of the orientation of g are the limiting factors concerning the computation of
the linear velocity and position in most motion sensing products. The subtraction of the gvector is easily performed on a stabilised mechanical platform, where the accelerometers are
directly mounted on the platform.
One fundamental property to be aware of is that it is much easier to remove the g-influence in
the vertical component than in the horizontal component of the acceleration vector. A small
error in roll/pitch angle results in the following horizontal acceleration error:
aerr = g
For the vertical direction the same influence is approximately:
aerr = 0.52
where,
is given in radians
aerr is given in m/s2
A small error in the acceleration will be integrated over a long period of time. It is necessary
to low pass filter the integration of the acceleration to velocity and position to some given
values, so that the unavoidable errors are kept under control. This principle is shown for a
single axis in Figure 12. In the Seatex MRU the reference position and reference velocity are
always kept at zero. This means that if the MRU senses no motion, it will slowly reset the
position and velocity to zero. This type of device is best for sensing fast changes in position
and velocity.

33

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 12 Computation of velocity/position


The controller shown in Figure 12 can be tuned to choose between good low frequency
performance or to minimise the bias in the velocity and the position. The unit will not perform
well for linear motion with a frequency below the cutoff frequency (see chapter 4.2.3.3 for
more information).

34

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.1.4

Technical description

Magnetic north seeking

North seeking can basically be performed in the following three ways:


1) By utilising the earth angular rotation rate, like in the gyro compasses.
2) By measuring the heading relative to an inertial frame from accurate position
measurements, like in GPS compasses.
3) By using the earth magnetic field, like in magnetic compasses such as the MRU models 4
and 6.
The MRU models 4 and 6 have a 3-axis magnetometer inside to provide magnetic north
measurements. The principle of determining heading from the MRU is very similar to the one
used for the vertical erection discussed above and shown in Figure 13.

Figure 13 Magnetic north seeking


The three measurements from the magnetometer can be compensated for the local vessel
softmagnetic and hardmagnetic field, described in chapter 4.1.5. This is very important when
the MRU is placed in a magnetic environment with steel, DC engines, etc. The compensated
magnetic measurements are rotated from the body frame to a horizontal frame by the MRU
roll and pitch angles, indicated by the "software gimbals" box in Figure 13. The north
direction is then found from the compensated horizontal magnetic measurements by utilising
the fact that the earth magnetism has no east component. The difference between the magnetic
heading and the MRU yaw is fed through a Kalman Filter (slow controller) that updates the
bias estimate of the yaw rate gyro. This is, however, more complicated than shown here, since
the true vertical axis is different from the yaw axis, when the vessel is rolling and pitching.

35

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.1.5

Technical description

Magnetic disturbances

Magnetic compasses operating in magnetic environments are disturbed by the local magnetic
field. The disturbances give larger azimuth errors for larger inclinations (the angle between
the vertical direction (gravity) and the earth magnetic vector), and especially in areas that are
closer to the poles, where the horizontal magnetic field is weaker.
Softmagnetic disturbances distort the earth field. Steel walls and other magnetic materials
change the direction and the magnitude of the earth magnetic field. However, these
disturbances are usually quite stable, since the distorting materials are not moving relative to
the magnetometer. These disturbances may cause an azimuth error of 4-30 degrees if not
compensated for, depending on the magnetic environment on-board the vessel.
Hardmagnetic disturbances from permanent magnets and electrical currents add magnetism to
the earth's field. These can change more easily by temperature changes, shocks, people
carrying magnets passing by etc. Typically, hardmagnetic disturbances can give an azimuth
error of 20-30 degrees if not compensated for depending on the magnetic environment onboard the vessel. Typically, a 1 A electrical current through a long straight wire located a 3
cm distance away from the magnetometer, will set up an equivalent magnetic field to the earth
magnetic field.
This illustrates how sensitive the magnetometer inside magnetic compasses is for magnetic
disturbances. In the MRU 4 and 6 models the magnetic disturbances can be compensated for
by the included software for magnetic neutralisation of the vessel's own magnetic signature.
In chapter 4.2.3.2 it is described how magnetic neutralisation is implemented in the MRU
software.
4.1.6

Frames for measurements of motion entities

It is necessary to operate with a unified co-ordinate frame in order to avoid confusion in the
definitions of the outputs from the MRU. Many different definitions are used in industry. The
following basic rules apply:
a) Frames are orthogonal, which means that there are 90-degree angles between the axes.
Frames have a name.
b) The frames are always right-hand oriented as shown in Figure 14. The succession of axes
are X, Y and Z. Translations, velocities and accelerations are positive in the direction of
the axis.
c) Turning is defined as positive around a given axis, when the rotation is clockwise seen
from the origin along a given axis. Rotation X means rotation around the axis X in the
frame.

36

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 14 Right oriented frame


4.1.6.1

Definition of frames and variables

Geographic Frame or G-frame


This frame is called the g-frame. The g-frame has its origin at the current geographic location
and is fixed to the earth surface. The frame is chosen with the following successive axes
directions:
N: Geographic north
E: Geographic east
D: Down

37

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 15 Geographic frame and body frame


Down is defined by the local gravity (normal to the ideal earth geoide).

Body Frame or B-frame


We call this frame the b-frame. This frame is fixed to the vehicle or ship with its origin in the
ship's centre of gravity, CG. The definition of the axes directions is as follows:
R:

R-axis

Points in the bow direction of a ship and horizontally when pitch angle is
zero.

P:

P-axis

Points in the starboard direction of a ship and horizontally when roll angle is
zero.

Y:

Y-axis

Points down in the direction of gravity when roll and pitch are zero.

38

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 16 Body/vehicle frame definition


4.1.6.2

Used reference frames

Commonly used frames in the MRU are:


g: Geographic frame, with north, east and down at a given location.
h: Heading frame, axes F(forward), S(starboard), D(down). The F and S are always in the
horizontal plane. The axis directions F and S are the axes for surge and sway motion as
defined here. This h-frame is the same as the g-frame rotated the heading angle around
the D-axis.
b: Body frame. This frame is fixed to the vehicle or ship with its origin in the ship's centre
of gravity, CG.
s:

Sensor frame. This frame is defined by the MRU itself (the axes marked on the housing
of the MRU). The s and b-frame are identical if the MRU mounting angles set in the
software configuration, are zero.

39

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 17 Overview of used frames

40

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.2

Technical description

Construction

This chapter contains an in-depth description of the function of the top model MRU 6. The
description is intended for potential users who want to see if the MRU is suitable for their
application. The differences between the MRU 6 and the lower model versions are described
in chapter 2.4.
The description of the highest level functions of an MRU 6 are shown in Figure 18 and the
mechanical layout in Figure 18. All functions are located inside the housing of the MRU,
including power supply and all signal processing. The function is similar to an Inertial
Navigation System (INS). This applies to both sensors and processing algorithms.

Figure 18 MRU 6 functional modules


The interior of the MRU is divided into two sub-assemblies consisting of an electronics unit
and a sensor unit. The model depends on the type of sensors in the MRU. The electronic unit
consists of plug-in circular multi layer boards. Extensive use is made of surface mounted
components. The number of sensor boards mounted will depend on the MRU model number.
The unit is divided into nine separate mechanical parts, which may be exchanged very quickly
by plug-in boards when the housing cylinder has been removed. The housing cylinder should,
however, not be removed by anyone else than Seatex.

41

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 19 MRU 6 mechanical layout

42

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.2.1

Technical description

Internal sensors

The MRU 6 has three built-in sensors that measure the following physical vector quantities:
angular rate, linear acceleration and magnetic field. The sensor system is equal for all three
axes, providing no limitations in mounting or operational orientation. The sensor readings are
scaled, linearized, orthogonalized and temperature compensated before they are passed on to
the more advanced signal processing inside the MRU. This is described in chapter 4.2.3.
The sensor axes are accurately aligned to the axes marked on the top lid of the MRU by the
orthogonalisation procedure. This means that accurate axis directional trimming is not
performed mechanically, but by computer software. The precision reference is the top lid.
Index holes in the top lid help the customer to align the MRU properly. The actual MRU axes
can be turned by software to various sets of roll, pitch and yaw angles relative to the basic
directions marked on the MRU housing.
No analog trimming is used inside the MRU. All sensors are trimmed by software during a
computer controlled calibration and burn-in-procedure completed at the factory.
4.2.1.1

The angular rate sensors

The MRU models measure the angular rate vector initially without the use of moving parts
(gyros). Coriolis force based vibratory angular rate sensors are used in the MRU 5 and 6
models. These rate sensors use linear vibratory motion instead of rotary motion, and have low
power consumption and no wear-out parts.
The accuracy of the angular rate sensors is very important for the accuracy of the MRU. If the
gyroscopes are accurate only small and slow feedback from the accelerometers is needed to
determine the vertical direction at all times. This ensures low sway and surge acceleration
sensitivity in the vertical direction.
The characteristics of the Coriolis force based angular rate sensors are as follows:

Very low environmental sensitivity to acceleration and vibration given by high frequent
oscillation (14 kHz), and a symmetric design that cancels external vibrations. This means
that mechanical vibrations in the sensor have only limited impact on the MRU rate
sensors.

Both the scale factor (gain) and the offset (zero) of the sensors are stabilised by a
symmetric and simple mechanical design of the oscillatory mechanical system. Electrical
drift is cancelled in the basic analog design.

High linearity, which results in small average drift errors during oscillating rate loads (as
on a ship's roll axis).

Small high frequency noise level.

The design of the Coriolis gyro is based on the use of a vibration cylinder.

43

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 20 The Coriolis force rate gyro function


d
f
s
c

v
ac

Drive axis direction.


Feedback, measurement of drive axis.
Sensing axis.
Compensation axis.
Rotation rate in an axis normal to the paper plane.
Linear velocity set up by driven oscillation.
The Coriolis acceleration.

The sensor is implemented as a force feedback system. The d-axis is used for excitation, and
the f-axis is used to measure the drive amplitude to control the excitation. A measurement
feedback loop controls an excitation along the c-axis. This excitation cancels the vibration set
up along axis s given by the Coriolis acceleration ac, which we want to measure. The drive
signal to the c-axis is thus the final output from the rate sensor. The gyroscopes are interfaced
to the computer by a high resolution A/D system ( technology), and some of the signal
processing for the rate integration is performed directly in a gate array creating the interface
to the micro-computer. A similar design based on quarts rate sensors are used in the MRU
models 4, H and 2.
4.2.1.2

The accelerometers

The accelerometers in the MRU 5 and 6 models are of the accurate pendulum type. These
accelerometers consist of a proof mass, a hinge, some damping, a pickoff, a forcer and a servo
loop.

44

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 21 The pendulum accelerometer construction


The etched quarts seismic element is held in place by an electronic servo loop during both
static and dynamic acceleration. Acceleration is determined by measuring the current required
to keep the seismic element (proof mass) in place. The current output is directly proportional
to the acceleration input.
The accelerometers are interfaced to the internal MRU computer with a special integrating
interface, based on gate array technology. This means that the computer directly reads
velocity increments and not acceleration, from this interface. The resolution of the
accelerometer interface is very high due to the signal conversion technology.
4.2.1.3

The magnetometer

The magnetometer is based on the servo fluxgate principle. This means that a local 3-axis coil
system (of Helmholtz type) cancels the external (the field to be measured) magnetic field. The
output from the sensor is then three DC currents representing the three magnetic field
components. The relation between current and magnetic field in a non-ferromagnetic
environment is linear and given by Biot Savart's law. This means high gain stability and high
linearity. This sensor has a much better linearity and stability than standard fluxgate sensors
based on direct voltage output from the fluxgate itself without the use of a zero field.
A zero field detector is placed inside this coil system and creates feedback to the DC current
flowing in the Helmholtz coils. The detection of the zero field offset is carried out by the use
of a traditional fluxgate based on a ferromagnetic metallic glass core and non-orthogonal use
of the core.
The electronics is directly controlled by the micro-computer for easy self-check and trimming
of the sensor from the internal MRU computer. Most of the electronics is placed in a gate
array. The DC current output conversion is implemented by the use of a high resolution
A/D converter.

45

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

4.2.2

Technical description

Sensor calibration procedure

An advanced, time efficient and error-safe procedure for calibration of the internal sensors is
one of the key properties to achieve the quality of the MRU product. Calibration,
orthogonalisation, linearisation and temperature compensation is carried out for each physical
sensor inside each MRU by a computerised procedure.
For calibration of the angular rate sensors and the accelerometers a 2-axis Acutronic rate table
system with temperature chamber, is used. The calibration process is fully automated with the
capacity of calibrating and testing eight MRUs simultaneously. Due to the temperature
chamber on the rate table, temperature gradients can be kept at a minimum during calibration.
The accuracy of this Acutronic system is better than 1 arc s (0.0003) and provides a very
accurate reference during calibration and testing. The calibration of the angular rate sensors is
performed at different rates and temperatures. The accelerometers in the MRU are calibrated
by setting the rate table at certain angles relative to the vertical and repeating the procedure
for different temperatures. From these data the complete sensor calibration parameters are
computed using a generalised least square parameter fit procedure.
The magnetometer is calibrated with the MRU inside a precise 3-axis Helmholtz coil set
controlled by a computer. This is a magnetic field generator that generates homogenous
magnetic fields. Fields with different directions and magnitudes are set up across the MRU.
The internal dynamic and static ferro-magnetism of the MRU is compensated for in the sensor
calibration.
The parameters from the calibration process for each MRU can be found in the ASCII file
with the name "mruNNNN.par" on the floppy disk accompanying each MRU delivery. Here
NNNN is the serial number of the MRU.
4.2.2.1

MRU calibration certificate

After calibration, static and dynamic tests are performed on each MRU for final performance
verification. These tests are carried out utilising the Acutronic rate table system and
performed immediately after sensor calibration. The results from these tests are presented on
the MRU Calibration Certificate delivered with each unit.
In order to provide the customers with data showing the quality of each MRU compared with
its technical specifications, the following tests are carried out:
1) Dynamic roll and pitch test that combines two sine functions with different frequencies for
a five-minute recording period. The results are presented by RMS numbers and plots of
both the measurements and the errors are shown on the certificate.
2) Static noise level test for the roll, pitch and yaw angles and angular rate along with the
accelerometers and the magnetic sensor. The results are presented as RMS numbers for a
30-minute recording period.

46

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

3) Rate gyro scale factor test by rotating each sensor axis in the rate table at 10/s and
30/s. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
4) The accelerometer scale factor is tested by tilting the MRU in steps of 30 degrees around a
circle. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
All the above tests are performed at room temperature. The Calibration Certificate contains
data of each measurement along with the test requirements and an approval column
(passed/failed). The test requirements are according to the technical specifications for each
MRU model given in chapter 2.4 in this manual.

Figure 22 The Calibration Certificate for an MRU 6


When an MRU has passed the test requirements for each test, the certificate is signed by the
tester and included in the MRU Delivery Specific Documents, ref. [7]. At the top of each
MRU Calibration Certificate there is a model type number, the serial number of the approved
unit and a unique Calibration Certificate number.
The formula for the RMS (Root Mean Square) calculation of the errors used in presenting the
performance accuracy on the MRU Calibration Certificate and the technical specification for
each MRU model, is as follows:

47

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

RMS ( x) =

1
N

N
x2
i =1 i

where,
x

the measured variable amplitude for the sample, i.

the total number of samples.

4.2.3

Processing algorithms

It is important to understand its internal functions to fully exploit the possibilities of the
MRU. This section should be read before the MRU is used in a new application. The Seatex
MRU should not be used in applications for which it is not designed.
The MRU 6 operates much like a magnetic north seeking "strap down" inertial navigation
system. It is an inertial navigational system without use of gimbals or a mechanical platform.
All sensors are "strapped" to the housing of the unit or to the vehicle where the MRU is
mounted. The MRU 6 algorithms are tailored to obtain optimum performance from the
MRU's internal sensors in marine applications dominated by ocean wave induced roll, pitch
and heave motion. It is important to obtain as much information as possible from the angular
rate sensors, and to provide fast data response for use in critical real time applications of the
MRU.
A variable gain Kalman filter is part of the sensor error estimator. The algorithms take into
account the fact that the placement of the ship's centre of gravity, the MRU 6 location and the
measurement location on a ship, are usually different (lever arm compensation). An
"intuitive" description on how the MRU works, can be summarised as:
a) The angular rate sensors determine the short term orientation of the MRU, expressed as
roll, pitch and yaw angles or body angular velocity. Internally, the orientation
information is kept in a rotation matrix (a 3 x 3 matrix). This computation is executed at
fast cyclic rates and gives instant orientation response to the user.
b) A small feedback from the horizontal acceleration of the vehicle's centre of gravity, CG,
and the earth rate compensates for the angular rate sensor errors. (Compensation for
centripetal acceleration by speed log input is also performed, if available). In a time
frame of 3 to 10 minutes, the horizontal frame in the MRU will slowly be adjusted so that
the observed horizontal accelerations of the CG is averaged to zero.
c) A small feedback from the magnetometer in the heading direction compensates for the
angular rate sensor errors. This is done by first finding the true horizontal component of
the magnetic field, and then computing the north direction. The deviation from north is
used to correct angular rate sensor errors in the heading (yaw) direction. If no magnetic
sensor is available (MRU 5), or the magnetic conditions are poor, then external heading
information input from a gyro compass may replace the internal heading information.
When there is no heading information available, the measurement will drift slowly in
yaw. In this case the yaw angle is of no use.

48

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

d) Linear motions are computed by limited double integration of the acceleration. This
computation is performed in the g-frame. The limited integration means that the ideal 40
dB/decade frequency response of a double integration is broken at a lower cutoff
frequency. This frequency is typically chosen to be 0.005 Hz, but the user can change it
freely. If a low cutoff frequency is chosen, there will be a moving bias in the velocity
outputs. If a high frequency is chosen, the MRU will not measure low-frequency motions
well. The exact setting can be tuned to achieve the best performance from the MRU. (The
setting of this cutoff frequency corresponds to a tradeoff between external navigation
input weight and INS weight, for those who have worked with integrated navigation.)
The corresponding navigational input of the MRU is always set to zero.
Trimming of the MRU Axis Directions
The axis directions of the MRU are set to be aligned with the axis directions marked on the
MRU housing (R, P, Y) during the calibration procedure. When the MRU is installed in the
vehicle, it is important that the MRU axes are trimmed and aligned to the vehicle axis or the
axis of the system for which it is supposed to compensate the vehicle motions. These offset
angles between the MRU and the vehicle axes need to be downloaded to the MRU from the
setup software, MRC, or from a PC (see the Installation Manual for instructions). The entered
offset angle setting will change the directions of the sensor axes immediately, but the rate
sensors will not "feel" any physical rotation of the MRU. This means that the MRU will align
to the new direction given by the accelerometer and the axes of the magnetometer.
4.2.3.1

Computation of orientation

The orientation information is kept in an on-line rotation matrix representing the rotation of
the geographic frame (g-frame) relative to the body or vehicle frame (b-frame). From a given
initial value of the rotation matrix from b to g-frame Cbg , the present value of Cbg is calculated
by using the differential equation:

C&bg = Cbg b
Here,

C&bg

the skew symmetric form of the angular rate vector b


the time derivative of Cbg .

Angular rate sensors measure the angular rate. The equation above is solved with high
numeric accuracy using a special numerical method. Some of the processing is carried out in
the electronic interface and some in the software. An accurate computation is important for
the MRU's ability to operate in vibrating environments, where strong coning motion is a
problem.

49

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

The initial value of Cbg is computed in a special initial alignment procedure, where the average
value of the acceleration ab is supposed to provide the down-direction, and the heading from
the magnetic north defines the R-axis. If no magnetic north is available, the measurement will
drift slowly in yaw.
The average time needed to stabilise the initial alignment computation is approximately one
minute. Initial alignment starts immediately after power on, or after a command from the user.
If the vehicle has high dynamics (moves a lot) during startup, there may be problems with the
Kalman filter. At worst the alignment must be redone by restarting the MRU. High
dynamics during startup means that the MRU is moved up to 10 degrees in all axes.
The Orientation Estimation
The orientation estimator observes angular rate sensor errors from the measurement of
acceleration and magnetic fields in the g-frame. The estimator is designed as a variable gain
Kalman filter. The gain is a function of the present noise levels estimated from the
measurements (dependent on the present orientation of the MRU) and the present estimated
error variance in this estimator.
Earth rate compensation takes place in the orientation estimator. The earth rate is slightly
higher than the random drift of the angular rate sensors. Earth rate compensation gives a
small improvement to the performance of the MRU during fast changes in the
orientation of the vehicle. Earth rate is only compensated for when absolute north direction
is available (this means MRU 6, 5, 4 or MRU H with external heading input).
If the vehicle turns with a high velocity or accelerates up to a high velocity, this may result in
a dangerous long term acceleration error in the vehicle's CG. This can occur even if there are
no excursions in roll or pitch angle.
Over a very long period of time (> 500 sec), the size of this error in radians is directly
given by

= a/g [rad]
where "a" is the horizontal acceleration and "g" is the gravity. In this case the MRU functions
like an inclinometer.
Over a short period of time, the roll and pitch error of the MRU is given by

= kv v
where "v" is the change in horizontal velocity of the MRU or the actual time integral of
acceleration, while
kv = 0.0014 [s/m]
A changed pitch rate will give a roll error with the opposite sign. The value of kv is rather low
for the MRU if compared to similar products. This means that the sway acceleration
sensitivity is generally lower for the MRU.

50

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

In the case of turning at a high speed, we get a centripetal acceleration caused error given by

= kv v
where "" is the turn angle [rad] and "v" is the cruise speed.
An Example
A ship accelerates up to 10 m/s (20 knots) from standstill in a short time. The measured pitch
error caused by this is given as:

= kv 10 = 0.014 rad (0.8)


The same ship does a fast turn of 180 at the same speed v = 10 m/s. The resulting roll error
angle is given as:

= kv 10 = 0.044 rad (2.5)


As seen above, it is necessary to use an external velocity input to the MRU 6 (both speed and
heading input to MRU 5 and H) to restrict the errors on vessels that accelerate fast or operate
at high speeds. Note that the calculation above requires the turn to be so sharp that the
equivalent inclination error (direction of total acceleration) in the turn is more than 2.5
degrees. The error will converge to the acceleration direction after a long period of time. Most
of these errors will be eliminated with a velocity speed log (both speed and heading input
required for MRU 5 and H). An alternative is to neglect the vertical erection during short
periods of expected high acceleration.
Orientation Output Alternatives from the MRU
The orientation can be output as a rotation quaternion or as roll, pitch and yaw angles. The
basic internal entity in the MRU is the rotation quaternion from which the other quantities are
derived. There are several ways of defining these entities and below you will find how this is
defined in the MRU.
Roll, Pitch and Yaw (Angle) Output
There are numerous ways to define the orientation between the g-frame and the b-frame. We
will denote the roll, pitch and yaw angles (,,), which are actual outputs from the MRU. It
is important to note that these angles are not directly related to the R, P and Y-axes. The used
definitions for roll, pitch and yaw angles (named ,,) are given by the following turning
operation between the frames g and b:
a) Start with the two frames g and b aligned.

51

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

b) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the common Y and D-axis. This angle is defined as
the heading of the vehicle.
c) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new P-axis of the b-frame.
d) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new R-axis of the b-frame.
These definitions of rotation angles correspond to the standard definition of roll/pitch/yaw
angles for ships. The definition is a set of so-called Euler angles.
Notes

The angles are measured from the start position to the final position in each step above.
Positive angular directions are clockwise rotations around the actual turning axis, when
looking from the origin to the end of the axis.

Roll and yaw - angles are not defined for pitch angles of /2 (so-called singular
configurations). This is because the roll angle and the yaw angle in this case both describe
a rotation about the same vertical axis. Ships do not reach this configuration of a 90degree pitch in normal operations. If the MRU is used on an ROV with full orientation
control, the user should apply the quaternion outputs. An MRU requiring external heading
input will also malfunction in the internal processing close to these points, due to that yaw
angle input (same as heading). An MRU 6 using the internal magnetometer will, however,
function in the entire orientation space.

How to Compute the Rotation Matrix from Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Each of these three rotations given by the roll, pitch and yaw angles can be represented by a
rotation matrix. If all three transformations are multiplied, we get the rotation matrix shown
below. The definition can be used if the user wants to generate the rotation matrix from roll,
pitch and yaw outputs from the MRU (C and S are short notes for cosine and sine).
C ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( ) S ( ) S ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( )
Cbg = S ( )C ( ) C ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( ) S ( ) C ( ) S ( ) + S ( ) S ( )C ( )
S ( )

C ( ) S ( )
C ( )C ( )

The roll and yaw outputs are also unusable close to = /2 due to numeric inaccuracies. This
means that the roll, pitch and yaw angles should not be used when close to the singularity,
that is when operation in the vicinity of pitch angle = /2 is expected. For example, do not
try to generate Cbg from ,, when close to this singularity.

52

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Rotation Quaternion Output


The user can derive the rotation matrix by use of the corresponding symmetric Euler
parameters (quaternions ). The MRU quaternion output is a four parameter vector which
expresses the rotation matrix by the formula below. The quaternions can be an efficient way
to generate the rotation matrix in the user's software, because trigonometric function
evaluation is avoided, and there are no problems with singularities like at pitch = /2. The
quaternion components are denoted q1 to q4, and the rotation matrix can be expressed as:

q12 q 22 q 32 + q 42

C bg = 2(q1 q 2 + q 3 q 4 )
2(q1 q 3 q 2 q 4 )

2(q1 q 2 q 3 q 4 )
q +q q +q
2(q 2 q 3 + q1 q 4 )
2
1

2
2

2
3

2(q1 q 3 + q 2 q 4 )

2
4

2(q 2 q 3 q1 q 4 )
q12 q 22 + q 32 + q 42

q bg = [q1 , q 2 , q 3 , q 4 ] = l x sin ( / 2), l y sin ( / 2), l z sin ( / 2), cos( / 2)


T

Here lx, ly and lz are the direction cosines of the rotation axis, and is the angle of rotation.
Horizontal Plane Pitch Angle Output

The MRU can output horizontal plane roll angle instead of roll angle around the present pitch
axis. This type of roll angle is used in the sensors manufactured by Datawell. The Datawell
sensors additionally output the sine of the roll and pitch angles. The MRU in this case
outputs:
RollHippy (var. no. 66) = sin() = sin()cos()
PitchHippy (var. no. 67) = sin() = -sin()
Here
is the Euler roll angle.
is the Euler pitch angle.
4.2.3.2

Magnetic heading estimation

The MRU models 4 and 6 include a 3-axis fluxgate magnetometer measuring the magnetic
field at the MRU location. In case of a dominating earth magnetic field (small magnetic
disturbances), a fairly good estimate of the vessels heading angle relative true north can be
determined and output from the MRU. An even better estimate is obtained if the measured
magnetic field can be compensated for the vessel magnetic signature.
The MRU software includes a procedure which can be performed in order to find this
magnetic signature. During training an internal model describing the magnetic signature is
updated continuously while providing online information about the model quality to the user.
If the user accepts the result from the training procedure, the model is stored and used
internally at runtime.

53

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Magnetic field from magnetometer

Ship magnetic
signature
neutralization

Ship magnetic
signature
estimation

Magnetic
heading
estimation
Internal heading

Angular rate
gyro bias
estimation

Figure 23 The magnetic heading estimation process


The training of the internal magnetic model is performed by running the MRU configuration
program, MRC, while turning the vessel. In the MRC magnetic neutralisation menu a model
quality figure is displayed that indicates when the model is properly trained. The collection of
magnetic samples has to last for at least five minutes and the vessel has to complete at least
one circle before a good magnetic model can be achieved. The data collection should continue
until the model quality figure is 0.8 or higher.
For more details on the magnetic estimation process, see description of the MRC software in
the Installation Manuals ref. [2], [3], [4], [5] and [6].
Note

If the vessel is operating in the vicinity of external constructions such as offshore


structures, putting up an additional magnetic field, the true north reference can
generally not be found, even though the vessel magnetic signature has been found.

4.2.3.3

Linear motion computation

The linear motion computation basically provides acceleration, velocity and position in the gframe (geographic north, east, down). Alternatively, they can be provided in the h-frame
(heading frame F, S, D) or the b-frame (R, P and Y-axes). See definitions of frames in chapter
4.1.6. All internal processing takes place in the h-frame, and data are later transferred to the
other actual frames.
The relative linear position computation is based on double integration of acceleration over
time. Only changes within a short time frame can be estimated, since we do not get static
information on motion (no position measurements). Hence, the MRU cannot be used for any
direct navigation purposes but it can be used to provide smooth measurements within a time
frame up to 25 seconds. The performance is far better in the heave direction than in the surge
and sway directions. The reason for the difference between the channels is the influence of
54

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

roll/pitch-error generated gravity components being a first order effect in the horizontal
channels, and a second order effect in the vertical channel.
A ship or vessel will have short term motions dominated by ocean waves when it is at sea.
The average heave level for a ship or vessel is zero and the heave measurements from the
MRU will always be output relative to this zero level. For surge and sway motions we can
expect motions around a straight-line trajectory.
Acceleration Processing

The measured acceleration is initially transformed to the h-frame at a high sample rate in the
same way as for the vertical erection acceleration processing. The down direction remains
stationary, hence the heave velocity and position can be obtained by direct integration over
time of the acceleration.
The acceleration is compensated for lever-arm effects and gravity. The user can specify a
lever arm from the MRU to the actual measurement point during the installation of the MRU.
The linear motions are then computed in the measurement point. The static value of g is
subtracted before the linear motion computation takes place. The static value is obtained by
using a low-pass filter for the computed acceleration in the vehicle's centre of gravity. The
angular velocity is low-pass-filtered with a cutoff at approximately 10 Hz, prior to processing
of lever-arms in order to reduce effects from sensor noise. This will influence the high
frequency heave/sway/surge components of the lever arm.
The acceleration at the measurement point is computed from:
g
g
& )r b
amp
= amru
+ Cbg ( 2 +
mp

where:
b
rmp

Lever arm vector from the MRU to the actual measurement location
(measurement point) for surge, sway and heave.

Angular velocity (from the angular rate sensors, b-frame), skew symmetric form.

&

Angular acceleration (derived from the angular rate, b-frame), skew symmetric
form.

g
amru

Acceleration sensed by the MRU.

55

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Computation of Velocity and Position

The linear motion computation for position is a double integration over time for a selected
average period To. Integration of the acceleration over time for each axis gives velocity and
position. However, it is problematic to measure linear motions with long periods, like periods
of 25 seconds or more. The reason for using a highpass filter on the acceleration
measurements, is to remove static or slowly varying errors. These errors will give errors in the
velocity and position data. The filter may be made under-damped to improve the amplitude
response slightly down to To and to improve the phase response above To. The phase varies
more close to To. Low damping also means ringing at the selected average period To. The user
must tune this filter according to the requirements.
The user can set the average period To in the range 1 to 25 seconds. If a too long period is
selected, the velocity and position outputs will have a slowly varying error. If a short period is
chosen, the estimated heave will have a phase error for long period motions.
A low damping factor reduces the short term error for long period motions close to the
selected average period To, since the phase error is reduced. However, ringing in the output at
To may cause some problems. The damping factor can be set in the range 0.3 to 1.0. The
bias in the surge and sway directions is higher than the bias in heave. This is caused by the
influence of small orientation errors providing gravity components in the horizontal direction.
Average periods To set above 2.5 seconds is not recommended in surge and sway due to this
problem.
In the software two different types of filter structures are implemented. The filter mode
"General purpose" is implemented to achieve optimal amplitude performance, whereas the
"Hydrographic survey" mode provides optimal phase performance. For the "Automatic" filter
mode the hydrographic survey filter structure is used. This algorithm estimates the sea
conditions by computing the dominating period of the waves seen from ship or vehicle and
automatically sets the average heave period To in real time during operations. For the surge
and sway measurements the filter mode "General purpose" is the only mode available.
Selection of Heave Filter Mode

The following selections are available in the MRU configuration in order to achieve the
optimal heave performance:
Heave filter mode. Selection between different filter structures.
Period. The average heave period for the vessel, To.
Damping. The heave damping factor to be used in the filter.
The heave filter damping and average period should be chosen in order to obtain the best
possible correspondence between the estimated heave motion and the real heave motion.
These parameters can be set to a constant value or the automatic adaptive filter may be chosen
in case of varying sea environments. The following should be considered when selecting the
different heave filter modes and parameters:

56

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Heave filter mode:


Automatic. To be selected when the vessel is operating in various sea states or when the
average heave period is unknown.
General purpose. Is selected when an optimal heave amplitude is to be measured and the
heave phase is of no importance. This mode is typically selected when the MRU is to be
used for measuring the heave height and period on oceanographic buoys.
Hydrographic survey. To be selected when the heave phase and amplitude have to be
output correctly according to real time. This mode is typically selected when the heave
output signal from the MRU is to be used for heave compensation of echo sounders and
offshore crane systems.
Period:
An expected average heave period has to be set to the heave filter. This period can be
determined by measuring the time between two wave-tops by a watch or by looking at the
MRU output variable 129 Heave period, when the vessel is operating in the actual survey
area.
The settling time for the heave measurements from power-on or after a turn will be about
10 times the selected period, To. By selecting an unnecessary high heave period the settling
time will be slower than it has to. For vessels performing surveys with frequent turns, the
period should be set as low as possible to minimise the heave settling time after turns.
Damping:
The heave damping factor shall usually be set to 0.7. Only for special occasions should this
parameter be changed. In operations with heave periods of more than 25 seconds, the
damping factor should be reduced to 0.6 in order to achieve correct phase measurements.
In operations with heave periods of less than 2 seconds, the damping factor should be
increased to 0.8.
Figure 24 and Figure 25 below are to be used as a guideline for selecting the correct average
heave period (To) in the "Hydrographic survey" filter.

57

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Figure 24 Relative heave residual in percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"


filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20 seconds

Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20 seconds
The selection of heave filter settings is a trade-off between low heave error over a wide range
of heave periods and the settling time after an occurrence introducing a step response in the
heave filter, like after a turn if the MRU does not have external input of the vessel speed.
Input of vessel speed to the MRU is important to reduce the heave errors after a turn or
changes in speed.

58

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

For an MRU without external input we recommend the following selections:


The selection To =5 or lower is recommended for vessels performing surveys with a lot of
turning on rivers or within harbours. The settling time in heave will be about 50 seconds.
The selection To =10 is the default setting for this heave mode and covers most surveys,
unless long period heave motions.
The selection To =20 is recommended used for vessels operating in oceans with deep
waters or vessels that frequently operates with following sea.
Figure 26 illustrates the change in the "Hydrographic survey" filter performance by changing
the damping factor. We recommend that the damping factor is set to 0.7.

Figure 26 Relative heave residual as percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"


filter with average heave period set to 10 seconds with various damping factors 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8 and 0.9
The filter mode "General purpose" has been the only heave mode used in the MRU software
up to version 2.51. For the users that prefer to use this heave mode and their original setting,
the corresponding heave period and damping for each heave application used in earlier
versions, are as follows:

59

Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8

Technical description

Application

Period
[s]
10
25
14
10
3
3
3

General purpose
Rigs & non-cruising ships
Large ships, cruising
Small ship, cruising
ROVs, towfishes & buoys
High speed vessels
Small survey boat

Damping

0.6
0.45
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.8
0.8

Heave Measurements with Mean Value Dependent on Vessel Tilt

In the MRU it is possible to output heave position and velocity measurements where the mean
heave value is not zero, but depends on the vessel trim and list at any time. These output
variables are:

109 LA PosMonD

Lever arm compensated heave position with the mean value


dependent on vessel tilt.

119 LA VelMonD

Lever arm compensated heave velocity with the mean value


dependent on vessel tilt.

These variables are calculated in the following way; First, the CG heave acceleration is
integrated twice to obtain the CG heave position and velocity in the normal way. Then the CG
heave position and velocity is lever arm compensated using the vector between CG and MP
(measurement point) to obtain the alternative MP heave position and velocity. The difference
lies in the lever arm compensation of heave position and velocity after integration, instead of
performing heave acceleration compensation before the integration process. Hence, the
measurement point (MP) heave position is not zero mean, instead its value depends on the
vessel tilt at any time. These variables are useful especially in applications where the distance
between the MP and the sea level is to be determined, like in offshore crane operations or in
echo sounder installations with depth changes due to changes in vessel trim and list.
4.2.3.4

Internal processing and I/O delays

The total time delay for the output data seen from the user is a sum of a number of d